Skip to main content

Full text of "The art of illuminating as practised in Europe from the earliest times"

See other formats


^fjirry^/^:' 


JC-NRLF 


$B    3fi2    T53 


\^: 


fci:^Mr:>!5 


.P^^fe^^ 


i.w 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/artofilluminatinOOtymmrich 


4 

^ 

^^ 

ft 

^ 

t 

f^ 

'^WP 

1^ 

m 

W 

$0' 

■'/ 

% 

mi 

ilk  \  ^w#^^i^Mw^M 

M 

/A 

i 

m 

■ 

[ftJl^^ 

^~='^''^. :  ■ ;  ^*?^X :  -;  /., 

ND33/0 
T9 


h 


1 

^ 

'"^  1  J  V  ^ 

JJ^ 

'^^m.:^ 

^"^'^VVXS^? 

THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 


PART  I. 

WHAT   THE  ART  OF  HLUMINATING    WAS. 


CURSORY  inspection  of  this  volume  will  at  once  suffice 
to  convince  the  student,  that  the  principal  aim  of  all  who 
have  concurred  in  its  production  has  been  to  render  it  as 
practically  useful  as  possible,  to  those  who  may  desire  to 
see  illumination  revived  as  one  of  the  most  graceful 
Decorative  Arts  of  the  present  day.  Any  such  revival 
would  be  but  barren,  which  contemplated  the  displacement 
of  the  printer  to  make  way  for  the  scribe ;  and  sad  indeed 
would  be  the  sacrifice  of  human  life  and  energy  involved 
in  any  such  unsatisfactory  competition.  It  is  by  extending  the  scope  of  the 
Art  alone,  that  it  can  be  accommodated  to  the  exigencies  of  the  present 
moment ;  and  it  is  to  an  attempt  to  place  that  extension  upon  a  proper  and 
useful  basis — one  alike  precluding  contempt  for  the  labours  of  the  past,  and 
fostering  the  independent  inventive  spirit  of  the  present, — that  this  memoir,  and 
this  selection  of  examples  for  study  and  imitation,  are  devoted.  In  the  present 
part,  however,  my  remarks  will  be  restricted  to  the  primitive,  and,  wi^^^""  rare 
exceptions,  the  only  important,  application  of  the  Art  in  past  ages^  .z.  its 
application  to  the  decoration  of  manuscripts.  ' 

It  is  necessary  only  to  glance  at  the  ponderous  folios  of  those  pioneers  in 
palaeographical  research,  the  Benedictines,  or  at  the  noble  and  costly  volumes  of 
the  Count  Bastard,  Sylvestre  and  ChampoUion,  Owen  Jones  anc^i^oel  Humphreys, 
to  recognize  the  futility  of  attempting  in  such  a  work  as  this  to  do  justice  to  the 
antiquarian  interest  of  this  subject,  or  to  give  any  series  of  examples  sufficient  to 
convey  an  adequate  idea  of  the  magnificence  and  peculiarities  of  the  rich  store  of 
monuments  of  art,  treasured  in  the  great  public  and  private  libraries  of  Europe. 
Men  of  the  profoundest  learning  have  devoted,  some  Avhole  lives,  and  many  of  them 
long  years,  to  the  study  of  those  precious  pages,  on  the  decoration  of  A<'hich  the 


25S305 


2  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

highest  efforts  of  the  illuminists  of  old  were  lavished ;  and  have  yet,  one  and  all, 
confessed  the  partial  and  incomplete  mastery  of  the  subject  which  they,  with  all 
their  labour,  have  heen  enabled  to  acquire,  or  in  elaborate  disquisitions  to  record 
for  the  benefit  of  posterity. 

With  works  pis^iuced  with  such  preparations,  such  energy,  such  devotion,  it 
would  be  presumiDtROus  to  suppose  that  this  little  essay  could  for  one  moment 
compete  ;  it  can  but  aim  at  the  humble  merit  of  endeavouring,  firstly,  to  draw  the 
attention  of  the  unlearned  to  the  interest  and  practical  value  of  the  Art  it  illustrates; 
and,  secondly,  to  direct  the  student  to  those  sources  of  information  from  a  careful 
study  of  which  alone  any  proper  knowledge  of  the  archaeology  of  the  subject  can 
be  acquired. 

The  reader  being  thus  forewarned  of  the  elementary  nature  of  the  information 
he  is  likely  to  derive  from  a  perusal  of  the  following  notes,  I  at  once  proceed  to 
take  up  the  first  section  of  my  theme. 

The  books  of  the  ancients  were  scarcely  books  in  the  modern  acceptation  of 
the  term.  From  Egypt,  where  a  rude  form  of  illumination  had  been  practised  from 
the  most  remote  period,  they  obtained  leaves  of  the  papyrus,  converted  into  a  kind 
of  paper  by  gluing  them  together  in  two  thicknesses, — ^generally  with  the  muddy 
water  of  the  Nile, — the  fibres  in  the  upper  leaf  being  placed  so  as  to  cross  those  of 
the  lower  at  right  angles.  Pliny^  describes  the  manufacture,  and  how  the  sheets, 
limited  in  size  by  the  dimensions  of  the  papyrus-leaf,  were  cemented  end  to  end, 
until  nearly  twenty  having  been  so  connected,  they  were  fit  to  form  the  scapus,  or 
roll,  which  constituted  the  usual  Grecian  and  Roman  books.  Eumenes,  king  of 
Pergamus,  being  unable  to  procure  the  Egyptian  papyrus,  through  the  jealousy  of 
one  of  the  Ptolemys,  who  occupied  himself  in  forming  a  rival  library  to  the  one 
which  subsequently  became  so  celebrated  at  Pergamus,  introduced  the  use  of 
parchment  properly  ''  dressed "  for  taking  ink  and  pigments ;  and  hence  the 
derivation  of  the  word  "  pergamena "  as  applied  to  parchment  or  vellum ;  the 
former  substance  being  the  prepared  skin  of  sheep,  and  the  latter  of  calves.'' 

The  sheets  of  parchment  were  joined  end  to  end,  as  the  sheets  of  papyrus 
had  been,  and  when  written  upon,  on  one  side  only,  and  in  narrow  transverse 
columns  across  the  breadth  of  the  scroll,  were  rolled  up  round  staves  and  bound 
with  strings  known  as  "  umbilici, "  to  which  bosses  of  metal,  or  "  bullae, "  were 
attached.'* 

The  custom  of  dividing  books  into  pages  is  said  by  Suetonius  to  have  been 
introduced  by  Julius  Gaesar,  whose  letters  to  the  Senate  were  so  made  up,  and  after 

^  Lib.  xiii.  cap.  II. 

^  M.  Gabriel  Peignot,  in  his  "  Essai  sur  I'Histoire  du  Parcliemin  et  du  Velin,"  Paris,  i8i2, 
and  in  his  paper  on  the  same  subject  in  "Le  Moyen  Age  et  la  Renaissance,"  vol.  ii.  Paris,  1849, 
produces  evidence  of  the  use  of  parchment  for  writing  upon  anterior  to  the  age  of  Eumenes  ;  and 
consequently  limits  his  interpretation  of  Pliny's  words,  "Varro  membranas  Pergami  tradidit 
repertas,"  to  an  assertion  of  the  discoveiy  of  improved  processes  by  which  parchment  was  rendered 
more  available  for  writing  upon  than  it  had  been  previous  to  the  accession  of  Eumenes. 

^  The  appearance  of  these  rolls  when  closed,  and  the  manner  of  holding  them  to  read  from, 
are  very  (jjearly  shown  in  a  painting  in  the  "  house  of  the  surgeon  "  at  Pompeii,  where  a  man  is 
represented  evidently  engaged  in  deep  study. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  3 

whose  time  the  practice  became  usual  for  all  documents  either  addressed  to,  or 
issuing  from,  that  body,  or  the  emperors.  As  that  form  subsequently  crept  into 
general  use,  the  books  were  known  as  "  codices ;"  and  hence  the  ordinary  term  as 
applied  to  manuscript  volumes.  All  classes  of  books,  the  reeds  for  writing  in  them, 
the  inkstands,  and  the  "  capsae  "  or  "  scrinia,"  the  boxes  in  which  the  "  scapi "  or 
rolls  were  kept,  are  minutely  portrayed  in  ancient  wall  painting^and  ivory  diptychs. 
The  inkstands  are  generally  shown  as  double,  no  doubt  for  containing  both  black 
and  red  ink,  with  the  latter  of  which  certain  portions  of  the  text  were  written.-^ 

Nearly  two  thousand  actual  rolls  were  discovered  at  Herculaneum,  of  course  in 
a  highly-carbonized  condition,  and  of  them  some  hundreds  have  been  unrolled. 
None  of  them  appear  to  have  been  embeUished  with  illumination,'*  so  that  for 
proof  of  the  practice  of  the  art  in  classical  times,  we  are  thrown  back  upon 
the  classical  authors  themselves.  The  allusions  in  their  writings  to  the  employ- 
ment of  red  and  black  ink  are  frequent.  Martial,  in  his  first  epistle,  points  out 
the  bookseller's  shop  opposite  the  JuHan  Forum,  in  which  his  works  may  be 
obtained  "smoothed  with  pumice-stone  and  decorated  with  purple."  Seneca 
mentions  books  ornamented  "  cum  imaginibus."  Varro  is  related  by  PHny  to 
have  illustrated  his  works  by  likenesses  of  more  than  seven  hundred  illustrious 
persons.  Pliny,  again,  informs  us  that  writers  on  medicine  gave  representations 
in  their  treatises  of  the  plants  which  they  described.  Martial  dwells  on  the 
editions  of  Virgil,  with  his  portrait  as  a  frontispiece.  The  earliest  recorded 
instance  of  the  richer  adornments  of  golden  lettering  on  purple  or  rose-stained 
vellum,  is  given  by  Julius  Capitolinus  in  his  life  of  the  Emperor  Maximinus  the 
younger.  He  therein  mentions  that  the  mother  of  the  emperor  presented  to  him, 
on  his  return  to  his  tutor  (early  in  the  3rd  century),  a  copy  of  the  works  of 
Homer,  written  in  gold  upon  purple  vellum.  Whether  derived  from  Egypt  or  the 
East,  this  luxurious  mode  of  embellishment  appears  to  have  been  popular  among 
the  later  Greeks,  a  class  of  whose  scribes  were  denominated  "  writers  in  gold." 
From  Greece  it  was,  no  doubt,  transplanted  to  Rome,  where,  from  about  the  2nd 
century,  it,  at  first  slowly,  and  ultimately  rapidly,  acquired  popularity.  St.  Jerome, 
ingleed,  writing  in  the  4th  century,  in  a  well-known  passage  in  his  preface  to  the 
Book  of  Job,  exclaims  :  "  Habeant  qui  volunt  veteres  libros  vel  in  membranis 
purpureis  auro  argentoque  descriptos  vel  uncialibus,  ut  vulgo  aiunt.  Uteris,  onera 
magis  exarata  quam  codices  j  dummodo  mihi  meisque  permittant  pauperes 
habere  scedulas,  et  non  tam  pulchros  codices  quam  emendatos." 

This  almost  pathetic  appeal  of  the  great  commentator  was  scarcely  necessary 
to  assure  us  that  such  sumptuous  volumes  were  executed  for  the  rich  alone, 
since  the  value  of  the  gold  and  vellum,  irrespective  of  the  labour  employed, 
must  necessarily  have  taken  them,  as  he  indicates,  altogether  out  of  the  reach  of 
the  poor.  Evidence  indeed  is  not  wanting,  that  many  of  the  Fathers  of  the 
Church  laboured  with  their  own  hands  to  supply  themselves  with  writings,  which 

'  A  good  representation  of  a  scrinium  and  scapi,  from  a  painting  in  the  '*  Casa  Falkene^" 
described  in  the  **  Museum  of  Classical  Antiquities,"  vol.  ii.  p.  54,  is  given  in  one  of  the  cubicula 
of  the  Pompeian  Court  at  Sydenham. 

*  See  Gell's  **  Pompeiana,"  Appendix  ;  and  the  '*  Memoir  of  the  Canonlco  lorio." 

B   2 


4    •  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

no  golden  letters  or  purpled  vellums  could  make  more  valuable  to  them  or  their 
primitive  followers  :  thus,  Pamphilus,  the  martyr,  who  suffered  in  the  year  309, 
possessed,  in  his  own  handwriting,  twenty-five  stitched  books,  containing  the  works 
of  Origen.  St.  Ambrose,  St.  Fulgentius,  and  others,  themselves  transcribed  many 
volumes,  precious  to  themselves  and  most  edifying  to  the  faithful.  Whatever 
ornaments  or  pictures  these  volumes  contained,  no  doubt  reproduced  the  style 
of  art  fostered,  if  not  engendered,  in  the  Catacombs. 

Roman  illuminated  manuscripts  would  appear,  therefore,  to  have  been  mainly 
divisible  into  two  classes  ;  firstly,  those  in  which  the  text,  simply,  but  elegantly 
written  in  perfectly-formed,  or  rustic  (that  is,  inclined)  capitals,  mainly  in  black 
and  sparingly  in  red  ink,  was  illustrated  by  pictures,  usually  square,  inserted  in 
simple  frames^  generally  of  a  red  border  only ;  and  secondly,  the  richer  kind,  in 
which  at  first  gold  letters,  on  white  and  stained  vellum  grounds,  and  subsequently 
black  and  coloured  letters  and  ornaments  on  gold  grounds,  were  introduced.  The 
first  of  these  appears  to  have  been  the  most  ancient  style,  and  to  have  long 
remained  popular  in  the  Western  Empire,  while  the  second,  which,  as  Sir 
Frederick  Madden  has  observed,  no  doubt  came  originally  to  the  Romans 
from  the  Greeks,  acquired  its  greatest  perfection  under  the  early  emperors  of 
the  East. 

Of  both  styles  there  are  still  extant  some  invaluable  specimens,  which,  although 
not  of  the  finest  periods  of  art,  may  still  be  regarded  as  typical  of  masterpieces 
which  may  have*  existed,  and  which  fire  or  flood,  Goth  or  Vandal,  may  have 
destroyed.  Before  proceeding,  however,  to  an  enumeration  of  any  of  these,  it 
may  be  well  to  define  certain  terms  which  must  be  employed  to  designate  the 
peculiarities  of  character  in  which  the  difierent  texts  were  written,  some  slight 
knowledge  of  which  is  of  great  assistance  in  arriving  at  an  approximate  knowledge 
of  the  dates  at  which  they  may  have  been  executed.  Such  a  definition  cannot  be 
more  succinctly  given  than  in  the  following  passage,  extracted  from  Mr.  Noel 
Humphreys'  interesting  work  "  On  the  Origin  and  Progress  of  the  Art  of 
Writing:"^ — 

"Nearly  all  the  principal  methods  of  ancient  writing  may  be  divided  into 
square  capitals,  rounded  capitals,  and  cursive  letters  ;  the  square  capitals  being 
termed  simply  capitals,  the  rounded  capitals  niicia/s,  and  the  small  letters,  or  such 
as  had  changed  their  form  during  the  creation  of  a  running  hand,  minuscule. 
Capitals  are,  stricdy  speaking,  such  letters  as  retain  the  earliest  settled  form  of  an 
alphabet  ;  being  generally  of  such  angular  shapes  as  could  conveniently  be  carved 
on  wood  or  stone,  or  engraved  in  metal,  to  be  stamped  on  coins.  The  eariiest 
Latin  MSS.  known  are  written  entirely  in  capitals,  like  inscriptions  in  metal 
or  marble. 

"  The  uncial  letters,  as  they  are  termed,  appear  to  have  arisen  as  writing  on 
papyrus  or  vellum  became  common,  when  many  of  the  straight  lines  of  the 
capitals,  in  that  kind  of  writing,  gradually  acquired  a  curved  form,  to  facilitate 
their  more  rapid  execution.  However  this  may  be,  from  the  6th  to  the  8th,  or 
even  loth  century,  these  uncials  or  partly- rounded  capitals  T:>revail. 
'  P.  113.     Ingram,  Cooke,  &  Co.    London,  1853. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  5 

"  The  modern  minuscule,  differing  from  the  ancient  cursive  character,  appears 
to  have  arisen  in  the  following  manner.  During  the  6th  and  7  th  centuries,  a  kind 
of  transition  style  prevailed  in  Italy  and  some  other  parts  of  P2urope,  the  letters 
composing  which  have  been  termed  semi-uncials^  which,  in  a  further  transition, 
became  more  like  those  of  the  old  Roman  cursive.  This  manner,  when 
definitively  formed,  became  what  is  now  termed  the  minuscule  manner ;  it 
began  to  prevail  over  uncials  in  a  certain  class  of  MSS.  about  the  8th  century, 
and  towards  the  loth  its  general  use  was,  with  few  exceptions,  established.  It  is 
said  to  have  been  occasionally  used  as  early  as  the  5  th  century ;  but  I  am  unable 
to  cite  an  authentic  existing  monument.  The  Psalter  of  Alfred  the  Great,  written 
in  the  9th  century,  is  in  a  small  Roman  cursive  hand,  which  has  induced  Casley  to 
consider  it  the  work  of  some  Italian  ecclesiastic." 

To  return  from  this  digression  on  the  character  of  ancient  handwriting,  to  the 
examples  still  extant  of  the  two  great  sections  into  which  the  manuscripts  of 
classical  ages  may  be  divided,  I  would  observe,  that,  first  in  importance  and 
interest  of  the  first  class  may  certainly  be  reckoned  the  Vatican  square  Virgil 
with  miniatures,  which  has  been  referred  by  many  of  the  best  palaeographers  to  the 
3rd  century.  It  is  written  throughout  in  majuscule  Roman  capitals,  which, 
although  MM.  ChampoUion  and  Sylvestre^  describe  them  as  of  an  "elegant  but 
careless  form,"  appeared  to  me.  when  I  examined  the  volume  minutely  in  1846,^  to 
exhibit  great  care  and  regularity.  The  miniatures,  many  engravings  from  drawings 
traced  from  which  are  given  in  D'Agincourt's  "  Histoire  de  I'Art  par  les 
Monuments,"^  are  altogether  classical,  both  in  design  and  in  the  technical 
handling  of  the  colours,  which  are  applied  with  a  free  brush,  and  apparently  in 
the  true  antique  manner,  i.e.  with  scarcely  any  previous  or  finishing  outline. 
These  miniatures  have  also  been  engraved  by  Pietro  Santo  Bartoli,  but  not  with 
his  usual  accuracy  of  style.  A  complete  set  of  coloured  tracings  made  by  him  are 
in  the  British  Museum  (Lansdovvne  Coll.),  but  they  even  are  not  quite  satisfactory. 
The  Terence  of  the  Vatican,  which  is  without  miniatures,  is  in  a  somewhat  similar 
writing,  and  belongs  to  about  the  same  period.  The  third  in  importance  of  the 
ancient  Vatican  manuscripts  of  this  class,  is  in  the  rustic  instead  of  elegant  capital 
lettering,  and  is  supposed  to  be_  of  the  5th  century  ;  certainly  not  later.  It  is  a 
Virgil,  decorated  throughout  with  pictures  executed  in  apparent  imitation  of  the 
square  Virgil,  but  in  a  much  more  barbarous  and  lifeless  style.''  From  an  entry 
of  the  13th  century  contained  in  the  volume,^  and  from  our  knowledge  of  its 
having  been  long  and  at  a  remote  period,  preserved  in  France,  it  would 
appear  to  have  belonged  to  the  Parisian  monastery  of  St.  Denis,  if  not  to 
the  saint  himself. 

'   '*  Universal  Palaeography."  London,  Bohn. 

2  Through  the  kindness  of  the  late  Mr,  Dennistoun,   of  Dennistoun,   and  Cardinal  Acton,  who 
obtained  the  requisite  facilities  for  me. 
^  Tome  V.  pi.  Ixv,  ;  tome  iii.  p.  29. 

*  D'Agincourt's  famous  mistake  in  attributing  these  miniatures  to  the  12th  or  13th  century, 
and  Ottlcy's  ascription  of  those  in  the  Saxon  "  Aratus  "  of  the  9th  century  to  the  2nd  or  3rd,  are 
among  those  slips  of  the  learned  which  prove  that  even  great  men  are  fallible. 

*  *'  Iste  liber  est  beati  Dionysii." 


6  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

So  far  as  antiquity,  irrespective  of  merit  in  point  of  illumination  is  concerned, 
the  most  remarkable  ancient  Roman  manuscript^  existing  belongs  to  the  curious 
class  known  as  "  PaUmpsests,"  or  books  from  which  the  colouring  matter  of  an 
original  writing  has  been  discharged,  in  order  to  prepare  the  vellum  for  receiving 
an  altogether  different  text,  the  latter  being  generally  written  at  right  angles  to  the 
former.^  This  precious  document  is  the  celebrated  treatise  "  de  Republica,"  by 
Cicero,  written  in  uncial  characters,  evidently  in  an  Augustan  period,  and  was 
discovered  by  Cardinal  Angelo  Mai,  under  a  copy  of  St.  Augustine's  Commentary 
on  the  Psalms,  made  previous  to  the  loth  century. 

The  Ambrosian  Library  at  Milan  contains  a  codex  of  Homer,  of  equal 
antiquity  with  the  Cicero,  with  fifty-eight  pictures,  much  in  the  style  of  the  Vatican 
square  Virgil.  This  important  MS.  has  been  commented  upon  by  the  same 
distinguished  antiquary.^ 

The  Vienna  Roman  calendar,  supposed  to  have  been  executed  in  the  4th 
century,  and  embellished  with  eight  allegorical  figures  of  the  months,  is  both  an 
early  and  very  important  specimen  of  Roman  illumination,  not  only  on  account  of 
the  elegance  and  dexterous  execution  of  these  figures,  but  because  it  is  the  most 
ancient  manuscript  in  which  anything  like  ornament^  independent  of  pictured 
illustration  of  the  author's  text,  is  introduced.  Of  little  less  note  in  the  history  of  art, 
is  the  celebrated  Dioscorides  of  the  same  imperial  library,  the  date  of  which  is 
fixed  by  the  fact  of  its  being  enriched  with  a  very  graceful  portrait  of  the  Empress 
Juliana  Anicia,  for  whom  it  is  known  to  have  been  written  at  the  commencement 
of  the  6th  century.  Both  Lambecius*  and  D'Agincourt  give  various  facsimiles 
(omitting  colour)  of  the  fine  illustrations  which  decorate  this  remarkable  volume. 

Another  5  th  century  Virgil  of  remarkable  purity  in  the  text,  although  without 
miniatures,  is  the  well-known  "  Medicean  "  of  the  Laurentian  Library  at  Florence. 
The  Paris  Prudentius,  in  elegant  rustic  capitals  of  the  6th  century,  is  another  fine 
codex  of  the  same  type.  There  are,  in  addition  to  those  already  cited,  various 
other  early  texts  of  the  classics  contained  in  the  different  public  libraries  of  Europe  ; 
and  it  is  singular  to  remark,  that  (so  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  ascertain)  none  of 
them  are  embellished  with  those  richer  decorations,  which  appear  to  have  been 
reserved  after  the  end  of  the  5th  century,  for  the  great  text-books  of  the  Christian, 
and  more  particularly  of  the  Eastern  Church.  Of  these  sacred  volumes,  that  which 
is  generally  supposed  to  be  the  oldest  complete  version  of  the  Bible  in  Greek,^  is  the 
Codex  Alexandrinus  of  the  British  Museum,  attributed,  by  consent  of  all  the  best 
palaeographers,  to  the  commencement  of  the  5  th  century.  It  is  without  gold 
altogether,  and  has  no  other  illumination  than  the  occasional  contrast  of  red   and 

'  The  palimpsest  Homer  of  the  British  Museum,  discovered  by  Mr.  Cureton,  is  of  equal 
importance  in  Grecian  palaeography. 

*  In  the  case  of  the  "  de  Republica, "  they  are  written  in  the  same  direction.  See  facsimiles 
in  Sylvestre  and  Ferdinand  Sere. 

^  "Iliadis  Fragmenta-antiquissima  cum  Picturis,"  ed.  Angelo  Maio. 
"*  Petri  Lambecii  "Commentaria  de  BibUotheca  Vindobonensi,"  vol.  ii. 

*  The  Bible  formerly  belonging  to  Theodore  Beza;  now  at  Cambridge,  and  one  in  the  Vatican, 
are  rival  claimants  to  this  honour, 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  7 

black  inks,  and  a  line  slightly  flourished,  at  the  close  of  each  book.^  The  next 
fragment  of  the  Scriptures,  in  point  of  probable  date,  is  the  once  celebrated 
Cottonian  Genesis,  or  at  least  its  ghost,  for  unfortunately  a  few  charred  and 
shrunken  fragments  are  all  that  have  been  saved  from  the  disastrous  fire  which 
destroyed  so  many  of  Sir  Robert  Cotton's  precious  volumes  in  1731.  In  its 
original  state,  as  we  know  from  several  collations  made  previous  to  the  fire,  it 
contained,  on  165  pages,  no  less  than  250  miniatures,  each  about  four  inches  square. 
Astle^  has  given  a  facsimile  of  a  page  which,  on  comparison  with  the  existing 
shrivelled  fragments,  proves  that  in  their  present  state  they  are  just  about  one  half 
their  original  size.  The  paintings  are  in  all  respects  antique,  and  correspond  m 
general  character  with  cotemporary  secular  miniatures.  Dr.  Waagen'^  remarks  that 
"  only  the  hatched  gold  upon  the  borders,  the  glories,  and  the  Hghts  on  the  crimsor 
mantle  indicate  the  commencement  of  Byzantine  art."  The  great  rival  to  the 
*'  Codex  Cottonianus  Geneseos  "  is  the  "  Codex  Vindobonensis  Geneseos,"  which 
consists  of  twenty-six  leaves  with  eighty-eight  miniatures.  It  forms  one  of  the 
four  great  lions  of  the  Vienna  Imperial  Library.  These  two  remarkable  versions  of 
Genesis  are  supposed  to  be  of  nearly  equal  date,  and  correspond  as  to  the  character 
of  the  truly  antique  miniatures  very  fairly ;  the  fact,  however,  of  the  text  of  the 
English  version  being  in  black  ink  with  very  regularly  formed  letters,  while  that  of 
the  Vienna  one  is,  for  the  most  part,  written  in  gold  and  silver,  and  in  less  evenly- 
distributed  characters,  induces  a  fair  presumption  in  favour  of  the  greater  antiquity 
of  the  Cottonian  fragments.  In  the  more  gorgeous  details  of  the  Vienna  Genesis, 
coupled  with  its  square  and  unadorned  classic  pictures,  we  may  thus  clearly 
recognize  the  transition  from  our  first  or  Latin  class  of  ancient  illumination,  to  our 
second  or  purely  Byzantine  style.  We  especially  designate  this  class  as  "  Byzantine," 
because  as  art  in  illumination,  as  in  all  other  branches,  declined  in  the  seven-hilled 
city,  it  rose  in  the  seat  of  empire  founded  in  the  East  by  the  first  great  Christian 
emperor.  It  is  true  that  ideal  art  degenerated  almost  contemporaneously  in  the 
capitals  of  both  empires ;  but  in  decorative  art,  at  least,  there  can  be  no  question 
but  that  Byzantium  gained,  as  Rome  lost,  ground.  The  former  no  doubt  drew 
fresh  inspiration  from  her  close  intercourse  with  the  Persian  and  other  nations  of 
the  East,  while  the  latter  was  content  to  produce  little,  and  that  little  in  slavish 
reminiscence  of  the  past.  Italy  no  doubt  fed  the  earliest  monastic  libraries  of 
Western  Europe  with  the  quantities  of  texts  of  ancient  authors  we  know  them  to 
have  contained ;  but  we  may  fairly  assume  those  texts  to  have  been  but  rarely 
illustrated,  since  the  original  styles  of  illumination  produced  in  those  countries  to 
which  the  classic  volumes  travelled,  would  unquestionably  have  betrayed  an  antique 
influence  more  strongly  than  they  did,  had  the  means  of  deriving  that  influence 
been  brought  copiously  within  their  reach. 

I  proceed  now  to  a  slight  notice  of  the  second  class  of  ancient  codices,  that 
on  which  the  ultimate  splendour  of  the  Byzantine  school  was  founded.  Fortunately, 
time  has  spared  to  our  days  several  brilliant  specimens  of   the  richest  of  these 

'  It  was  given  to  Charles  I.  of  England,  by  Cyrilliis  Lucaris,  Patriarch  of  Constantinople. 

'  In  his  "Origin  and  Progress  of  Writing." 

'  '*Trea$ures  of  Art  in  Great  Britain,"  vol.  i.  p.  97. 


8  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

quasi-classic  manuscripts.  Of  such,  the  principal  are,  as  Sir  Frederick  Madden 
observes,^  "  the  celebrated  Codex  Argenteus  of  Ulphilas,  written  in  silver  and  gold 
letters  on  a  purple  ground,  about  a.d.  360,  which  is,  perhaps,  the  most  ancient 
existing  specimen  of  this  magnificent  mode  of  caligraphy ;  after  it,  may  be  instanced 
the  copy  of  Genesis  at  Vienna,"  already  mentioned,  "  the  Psalter  of  St.  Germain 
des  Pres,  and  the  fragment  of  the  New  Testament  in  the  Cottonian  Library,  Titus 
C.  XV.,  all  executed  in  the  5th  and  6th  centuries." 

The  first-named  of  these  contains,  on  about  1 60  leaves,  a  considerable  portion 
of  the  four  gospels,  and  is  now  preserved  in  the  Royal  Library  of  Upsal,  in  Sweden. 
It  is  the  earliest  version  of  any  part  of  the  sacred  writings  in  the  Moesogothic  or 
ancient  Wallachian  dialect.^  The  second  of  Sir  Frederick  Madden's  notabilities 
has  been  alluded  to  as  of  transition  character.  The  third,  the  Psalter  of  St. 
Germain  des  Pres,  is  ascribed  by  M.  Champollion  Figeac,  who  has  given  a  portion 
of  it  in  coloured  facsimile  in  the  "  Moyen  Age  et  la  Renaissance  "^  to  the  6th 
century.  It  is  unquestionably  a  beautiful  specimen  of  gold  writing  on  purple,  but 
neither  in  the  size  of  the  letters  nor  in  the  ample  spacing  of  the  lines,  will  it  bear 
comparison  with  the,  no  doubt,  earlier  example,  the  Cottonian,  Titus  C.  xv.  Our 
greatest  authority  upon  all  matters  connected  with  early  illuminated  versions  of  the 
Holy  Scriptures,  Mr.  Westwood,  remarks,  in  speaking  of  this  last-named  manuscript, 
that  "  Codices  purpureo-argentei  are  much  rarer  than  those  in  golden  writing,  the 
latter  material  being  used  not  only  on  purple,  but  also  on  white  vellum  ;  whereas  the 
silver  letters  would  not  easily  be  legible  except  on  a  dark  ground.  The  writing  is 
in  very  large  and  massive  Greek  uncials  ;  the  words  denoting  God,  Father,  Jesus, 
Lord,  Son,  and  Saviour,  being,  for  dignity's  sake,  written  in  golden  letters.  The 
colour  of  the  stain  has  faded  into  a  dingy  reddish  purple,  and  the  silver  is 
greatly  tarnished  and  turned  black.  This  fragment  is  stated  by  Home  to  be  one 
of  the  oldest  (if  not  the  most  ancient)  manuscripts  of  any  part  of  the  New 
Testament  that  is  extant,  and  is  generally  acknowledged  to  have  been  executed  at 
the  end  of  the  4th,  or,  at  the  latest,  at  the  beginning  of  the  5  th  century;  although 
Dr.  Scholz  refers  it  to  the  7  th  or  8th.  Casley,  however,  whose  knowledge  of  the 
age  of  manuscripts  has  never  been  surpassed,  considered  that  it  is  as  old,  or  older 
than  the  Codex  Cottonianus  Geneseos  ;  and  Mr.  Baber  is  inclined  to  give  it 
chronological  precedency  to  any  previously-named  MSS.  Dr.  Dibdin'*  states,  that 
the  writing  is  executed  in  the  largest  Greek  capitals  which  he  had  ever  seen ;  the 
Bodleian  Library,  however,  possesses  a  noble  manuscript,  written  in  still  larger  but 
narrower  characters.  The  Vatican  codices  351  and  1522,  of  which  specimens  are 
given  by  Blanchini,  are  also  written  in  larger  letters  ;  but  these  are  much  more 
recent  than  the  Cottonian  MS." 

The  Vienna  gold,  silver,  and  purple  Gospels,  the  lettering  of  which  corresponds 
closely  with  that  last  described,  may  be  regarded  as  certainly  next  in  importance, 
and  are  of  about  equal   antiquity.     In  none  of  these  relics  of  magnificence  are 

'  Text  to  *'  Shaw's  Illuminated  Ornaments,"  page  4. 

^  For   a    full    description,     with    references    to    numerous    commentators,     see    Westwood's 
"  Paloeographia  Sacra  Pictoria,"  cap.  49. 

^  Tome  ii.  article  "  Manuscrits,"  fig.  15.  <  "Bib.   Decam."  i.  p.  68. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  9 

we  enabled  to  trace  the  Eastern  or  Persian  influence,  which  unquestionably 
imported  a  previously  unknown  originality  and  character  into  the  art  of  Byzantium 
during  the  reign  of  Justinian  the  Great,  a.d.  527  to  565.  It  is,  no  doubt,  true,  as 
Dr.  Waagen  remarks,^  that  "  the  style  of  painting  up  to  his  time,  both  in  concep- 
tion, form,  and  colour,  was  much  the  same  as  that  which  has  been  preserved  to  us 
in  the  paintings  at  Pompeii ;  Avhile  the  spirit  of  Christianity,  operating  upon  the 
artistic  Greek  nature,  stimulated  it  anew  to  beautiful  and  original  inventions.  In  a 
few  single  instances  this  style  of  Art  was  maintained  until  the  loth  century;  but, 
generally  speaking,  a  gradual  degeneracy  ensued,  which  may  be  dated  from 
Justinian's  period.  The  proportions  of  the  figures  gradually  became  exaggerated, 
elongated,  the  forms  contracted  with  excessive  meagreness,  the  motives  of  the 
draj^ery  grew  paltry,  appearing  either  in  narrow  parallel  folds  stiffly  drawn  together, 
or  so  overladen  with  barbaric  pearls  and  jewels  as  to  exclude  all  indication  of  form. 
The  flesh  assumed  a  dark  tone,  the  other  colours  became  heavy,  gaudy,  and  hard, 
while  in  glories,  hatchings,  and  grounds,  gold  was  called  into  requisition.  In  these 
qualities,  united  to  a  gloomy  and  ascetic  character  of  heads,  consist  the  elements  of 
the  Byzantine  school."  But,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  ever  to  be  remembered  that 
the  mortification  of  the  old  flesh  was  but  a  symptom  of  the  more  active  life  beneath 
it,  sloughing  off"  the  Pagan  tradition,  and  gradually  replacing  it  by  that  new  and 
healthy  Christian  vigour  which,  for  many  centuries,  nourished  and  aided  the 
northern  and  western  nations  of  Europe  in  their  efforts  to  organize  those  national 
styles  of  Christian  Art  which  are  commonly  designated  as  Gothic.^ 

To  return  to  Justinian,  and  his  direct  influence  on  the  change  of  style  which 
took  place  during  his  reign,  it  may  be  noted  as  a  curious  fact,  that  the  year  in  which 
the  great  Church  of  Sta.  Sophia  was  commenced  was  the  very  year  in  which  he 
concluded  an  eternal  peace  with  Chosroes  Nushirvan,  king  of  Persia.  In  one  or 
two  reigns  antecedent  to  his,  Greek  artists  had  been  employed  in  Persia,  and  there 
had  been  a  friendly  communication  between  the  two  countries.  It  may  be  there- 
fore assumed,  that  when  Justinian  proposed  to  build  this  structure  in  so  short  a 
time,  he  not  only  enlisted  the  ability  of  those  about  him,  but  that  he  recalled  those 
straying  Greeks  who  had  gone  to  seek  their  fortunes  in  other  countries.  He  most 
likely,  indeed,  employed  not  only  his  own  subjects,  but  foreigners ;  and  in  that  way 
probably  a  considerable  portion  of  v/hat  no  one  can  fail  to  recognize  as  Oriental 
Art,  was  mixed  with  that  known  as  Byzantine.  Certain  it  is  that  in  many  of 
the  mosaic  ornaments  of  Sta.  Sophia  a  very  marked  Oriental  character  is  still 
to  be  traced. 

On  a  close  comparison  of  these  mosaics"'  with  the  unique  Eusebian  Canons  on 
an  entirely  gold  ground,  two  leaves  of  which,  painted  on  both  sides,  are  preserved 

*  "Treasures  of  Art  in  Great  Britain,"  vol  i.  p.   96. 

'  Dr.  Kugler  ("  Handbuch  der  Kunstgeschichte, "  p.  401),  in  speaking  of  Anglo-Saxon 
illuminated  manuscripts,  observes,  "dass  wir  diese  Arbeiten  als  ein  der  ersten  Zeugnisse  des 
germanischen  Kunstgeistes  in  seiner  Selbstandigkeit,  und  zugleich  als  das  Vorspiel  oder  als  den 
ersten  Beginn  des  romanischen  Kunststyles,  zu  betrachten  haljen," 

^  As  represented  in  the  plates  to  Salzenberg's  fine  work,  "  Alt-Christliche  Baudenkmale  von 
Constantinopel,  vom  V.  bis  XII.  Jahrhundert. "     Folio,  Berlin,  1854. 


lo  rilE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

in  the  British  Museum  (Addit/ No.  Sm),  and  from  which  the  ornaments  engraved 
in  our  second  plate  ^  have  been  copied,  the  student  will  certainly,  I  think,  be  induced 
rather  to  agree  with  Sir  Frederick  Madden,  in  ascribing  them  to  the  6th  century, 
than  with  Dr.  Waagen,  who  considers  that  they  "  can  scarcely  be  older  than  the 
9th  century."  To  the  practical  illuminator,  these  fragments  are  of  far  higher 
importance  than  all  the  others  to  which  we  have  as  yet  alluded,  since,  while  of  equal 
archaeological  interest,  they  constitute  the  earliest  specimens  from  which  really 
decorative  illumination  can  be  studied.^ 

Anothex  illustration  of  the  Eastern  influence  brought  to  bear  upon  Christian 
manuscripts  of  the  age  of  Justinian,  is  furnished  by  the  celebrated  Syriac  Gospels  of 
the  6th  century,  written  in  the  year  586  (one-and-twenty  years  after  the  emperor's 
death)  by  Rabula,  a  scribe  in  the  monastery  of  St.  John,  in  Zagba,  a  city  of 
Mesopotamia,  and  now  preserved  in  the  Laurentian  Library  at  Florence.  Mr. 
Westwood  regards  this  as  "  so  important  a  manuscript  in  respect  to  the  history  of 
the  arts  of  illumination  and  design  in  the  East,"  and  by  reflection  in  the  West,  that 
he  is  induced^  to  give  an  elaborate  description  of  its  embellishments,  from  which 
the  following  is  a  short  extract : — 

"  The  first  illumination  represents  Christ  and  the  twelve  apostles  seated  in  a 
circle,  with  three  lamps  burning  beneath  a  wide  arch  supported  by  two  plain 
columns,  with  foliated  capitals,  and  with  two  birds  at  the  top.  The  second 
illumination  represents  the  Virgin  and  Child  standing  within  a  double  arch,  the 
columns  supporting  which  are  tessellated,  and  the  upper  arch  with  several  rows  of 
zigzags,  and  peacocks  standing  at  the  top.  The  third  represents  Eusebius  and 
Ammonius  standing  beneath  a  kind  of  tent-like  canopy,  supported  by  three  columns, 
with  undulated  ornament,  two  peacocks  with  expanded  tails  standing  at  the  top. 
The  nineteen  following  plates  are  occupied  by  the  tables  of  the  Eusebian  Canons, 
arranged  in  columns,  between  pillars  supporting  rounded  arches,  generally  enclosed 
between  larger  and  more  ornamented  columns  supporting  a  large  rounded  arch,  on 
the  outsides  of  which  are  represented  various  groups  of  figures  illustrating  scriptural 
texts,  plants,  and  birds.  In  some  of  these,  however,  the  smaller  arches  are  of  the 
horseshoe  character.  The  capitals  are,  for  the  most  part,  foliated ;  but  in  one  or 
two  they  are  composed  of  human  faces,  and  a  few  of  birds'  heads.  The  arches,  as 
well  as  the  columns  by  which  they  are  supported,  are  ornamented  with  chevrons, 
lozenges,  nebules,  quatrefoils,  zigzags,  flowers,  fruit,  birds,  &c. ;  many  of  which 
singularly  resemble  those  found  in  early  Anglo-Saxon  manuscripts,  especially  in 
the  columns  supporting  the  Eusebian  Canons  in  the  purple  Latin  Gospels  of 
the  British  Museum  (MS.  Reg.  I.E.  6).  There  is,  however,  none  of  the 
singular  interlacing  of  the  patterns  so  characteristic  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  and  Irish 
manuscripts." 

I  have  dwelt  thus  in  detail  upon  these  Greek  pictorial  and  decorative  features, 
because  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  exportation  "of  books  so  adorned,  by  the 

'  The  whole  are  given  in  Shaw's  "  Illuminated  Ornaments,"  plates  i,  2,  3,  and  4. 
^  It  is  on  this  accomit  that  we  have  refrained  from  giving  any  specimens   of  manuscripts 
anterior  to  the  6th  century. 

3  "Palseographia  Sacra  Pictoria,"  cap.  Syriac  MSS, 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 


II 


early  missionaries,  who  carried  Christianity  and  a  degree  of  civilization  to  the 
Northern  and  Western  countries,  supplied  the  original  types  from  which,  however 
barbaric  the  imitations,  the  first  attempts  were  made  to  rival,  in  the  extreme  West, 
the  arts  and  spiritual  graces  of  the  East.  On  this  plea,  I  hope  I  may  be  pardoned 
for  dwelling  yet  further  upon  some  of  the  leading  distinctions  between  the  Byzantine 
and  Latin  (that  is,  between  the  Eastern  and  Western)  modes  of  working  out  religious 
conceptions,  which  were,  that  in  the  Western  or  Latin  mode  symbolism  was 
universal ;  the  art  of  the  Catacombs  was  followed  distinctly,  though  frequently 
remotely,  developing  itself  in  mythical  and  sentimental  forms,  and  systems  of 
parallelism  between  type  and  prototype.  \\\  the  Greek  Church,  the  exposition  of 
faith,  through  art,  took  a  more  tangible  forni.  Symbolism  was  avoided  on  all 
possible  occasions,  and  the  direct  representation  of  sacred  themes  led  to  a  partial 
transfer  to  the  representation  of  the  adoration  due  to  the  thing  represented. 
Iconoclasm  was  the  reaction  to  this  abuse.  In  the  advanced  periods  of  Greek  art, 
this  realistic  tendency  led  to  a  painful  view  of  the  nature  of  religion,  more 
particularly  in  connection  with  the  martyrdom  of  saints,  and  the  physical  sufferings 
of  our  Saviour  and  his  followers,  which  are  frequently  represented  in  the  most 
positive  and  often  repellent  forms.* 

Long,  however,  before  Byzantine  Art  had  time  to  deviate  much  from  its  ancient 
traditions,  and  even  while  it  maintained  an  easy  supremacy  over  the  Westerti 
empire,  the  Lombard  kingdom,  and  all  the  Visi-  and  Mceso-Gothic  and 
Frankish   races,    a   formidable    competitor    for    the   leadership    in    the   Art   of 


'  The  artistic  peculiarities  which  specially  characterize  the  march  of  Greek  intellect  in  the 
caligraphic  direction,  have  been  admirably  indicated  by  Dr.  Kugler,  in  his  *'  Handbook  of 
Painting."  "Many  of  the  representations  of  Byzantine  art,"  he  observes,  " may  be  traced  back 
even  to  classical  antiquity  (particularly  the  representations  of  allegorical  figures),  and  not  unfre- 
quently  contain  very  significant  and  clever  motives.  But  the  particular  knowledge  of  nature,  that 
is  of  the  human  form,  is  entirely  wanting :  this  is  apparent  in  the  drawing  of  the  naked,  and  in 
the  folds  of  drapery,  which  follow  no  law  of  form,  but  succeed  each  other  in  stiff  lines,  sharp  and 
parallel.  The  heads  do  not  want  character,  but  the  expression  is  not  merely  defective, — they 
have  in  common  something  of  a  spectral  rigidity,  indicating,  in  its  type-like  sameness,  a  dull 
servile  constraint.  The  figures  are  long  and  meagre  in  their  proportions,  and  so  lifeless  in  their 
movements,  that  they  set  at  defiance  even  the  common  law  of  gravity,  and  appear  to  totter  on 
level  ground. 

*'  In  the  Byzantine  manuscript  miniatures,  the  execution  is  generally  distinguished  by  extreme 
finish,  though  not  by  particular  harmony  of  colour.  A  prevailing  greenish-yellow  dull  tone  is 
peculiar  to  them  :  this  has  been  attributed  to  a  more  tenacious  vehicle, '  which  has  also  produced  a 
streakiness  in  the  application  of  the  pigment  :  another  peculiarity  is  the  frequent  use  of  gold, 
particularly  in  the  grounds,  which  are  entirely  gilt.  This  was  not  the  case  with  the  early  Italians, 
who  also  made  use  of  a  lighter  and  moi-e  fluid. vehicle." 


'  "Bindemittel. —  The  technical  term  for 
the  more  or  less  fluid  medium,  of  whatever 
kind,  with  which  the  colours  are  mixed,  or 
which  serves  to  dilute  them.  The  two  vehicles 
described,  by  an  early  Florentine  painter, 
Ceunini  ('Trattato  della  Pittura,' p.  70),  and 
which  are  known  to  have  been  very  anciently 


used,  would  quite  account  for  the  difference 
above  alluded  to.  The  Greek  paintings  on 
panel  were  partly  done  with  wax,  if  an  ana- 
lysis recorded  by  Morrona  ('  Pisa  Illustrata ') 
was  accurate.  See  Rumorh,  'Ital.  Forsch.'  i. 
312." — Note  by  the  editor,  SirC.  L.  Eastlake, 
P.R.A. 


12  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

Illumination,  had  sprung  up  in   the    extreme   West,  in  the  island  homes  of  the 
Celtic  races. 

It  is  not  necessary  now  to  prove,  what  historians  have  freely  admitted,  that 
Ireland  was  certainly  christianized  for  a  long  time  previous  to  the  date  of  the 
mission  of  Augustine  to  England.  The  disputes  which  arose  between  the  followers 
of  that  saint  and  the  Irish  priests,  so  soon  as  they  clearly  apprehended  the  nature  of 
the  supremacy  claimed  by  the  Church  of  Rome,  assure  us  of  their  early  isolation  in 
the  Christian  world.  Even  in  their  at  first  entire,  and  ultimately  partial,  rejection  of 
the  Vulgate  text  of  the  Gospels,  and  their  retention  of  the  older  versions,  from 
which  no  doubt  their  formulas  of  faith  were  derived,  they  steadily  maintained  their 
Ecclesiastical  freedom  from  the  dogmatism  of  Rome.  As  their  creed  was  inde- 
pendent, so  was  their  Art  original ;  nothing  resembling  it  can  be  traced  previous  to 
it.  "  Thus,"  as  Mr.  Westwood  declares,  "  at  a  period  when  the  fine  arts  may  be 
said  to  have  been  almost  extinct  in  Italy  and  other  parts  of  the  Continent,  namely, 
from  the  fifth  to  the  end  of  the  eighth  century,  a  style  of  Art  had  been  established 
and  cultivated  in  Ireland,  absolutely  distinct  from  that  of  all  other  parts  of  the 
civilized  world.  There  is  abundant  evidence  to  prove  that  in  the  sixth  and 
seventh  centuries  the  art  of  ornamenting  manuscripts  of  the  Sacred  Scriptures,  and 
especially  of  the  Gospels,  had  attained  a  perfection  in  Ireland  almost  marvellous." 
•  Before  proceeding  to  examine  the  precise  form  assumed  by  this  "  marvellous 
perfection,"  it  may  be  well  to  remind  the  student  that,  with  the  exception  of  a  few 
manuscripts  decorated  in  the  style  of  the  Laurentian  Syriac  Gospels  and  the 
British  Museum  golden  fragments,  the  general  character  of  the  decoration  of 
all  writings,  previous  to  the  origination  of  the  Celtic  style  in  Ireland,  had  been 
limited  to  the  use  of  different-coloured,  golden,  and  silver  inks,  on  stained  purple 
and  white  vellum  grounds,  to  the  occasional  enlargement  of,  and  slight  flourishing 
about,  initial  letters  ;  to  the  introduction  of  pictures,  generally  square,  or  oblong, 
enclosed  in  plain,  or  slightly  bordered,  frames ;  and  occasionally,  to  the  scattering 
about,  throughout  the  volumes,  of  a  few  lines  and  scrolls.  Let  us  now  see — 
in  the  words  of  Mr.  Westwood,  who  has  done  more  than  any  previous  writer 
had  done  to  vindicate  the  honour  of  the  Irish  school  of  caligraphy^ — what  features 
of  novelty  it  was  mainly  reserved  for  that  school  to  originate.  "  Its  peculiarities,"* 
he  states,  "consist  in  the  illumination  of  the  first  page  of  each  of  the  Sacred 
Books,  —  the  letters  of  the  first  few  words,  and  more  especially  the  initial, 
being  represented  of  a  very  large  size,  and  highly  ornamented  in  patterns 
of  the  most  intricate  design,  with  marginal  rows  of  red  dots  ;  the  classical 
Acanthus  being  never  represented.  The  principles  of  these  most  elaborate 
ornaments  are,  however,  but  few  in  number,  and  may  be  reduced  to  the  four 
following  : — ist.  One  or  more  narrow  ribbons,  diagonally  but  symmetrically 
interlaced,  forming  an  endless  variety  of  patterns.  2nd.  One,  two,  or  three  slender 
spiral  lines,  coiling  one  within  another  till  they  meet  in  the  centre  of  the  circle, 
their  opposite  ends  going  off  to  other  circles.  3rd.  A  vast  variety  of  lacertine 
animals  and  birds,  hideously  attenuated,  and  coiled  one  within  another,  with  their 

'  O'Conor  and  others  were  of  course  earlier  in  the  field. 
^  "  Palreographia  Sacra  Pictoria,"  Book  of  Kells,  page  i. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMIXATING.  13 

tails,  tongues,  and  top-knots  forming  long  narrow  ribbons  irregularly  interlaced. 
4th.  A  series  of  diagonal  lines,  forming  various  kinds  of  Chinese-like  patterns. 
These  ornaments  are  generally  introduced  into  small  compartments,  a  number  of 
which  are  arranged  so  as  to  form  the  large  initial  letters  and  borders,  or  tessellated 
pages,  with  which  the  finest  manuscripts  are  decorated.  The  Irish  missionaries 
brought  their  national  style  of  art  with  them  from  lona  to  Lindisfarne  in  the 
seventh  century,  as  well  as  their  fine,  large,  very  characteristic  style  of  writing ; 
and  as  these  were  adopted  'by  their  Anglo-Saxon  converts,  and  as  most  of  the 
manuscripts  which  have  been  hitherto  described,  are  of  Anglo-Saxon  origin,  it.  has 
been  the  practice  to  give  the  name  of  Anglo-Saxon  to  this  style  of  art.  Thus 
several  of  the  finest  facsimiles  given  by  Astle  as  Anglo-Saxon,  are  from  Irish 
manuscripts  ;  and  thus  Sylvestre,  who  has  copied  them  (without  acknowledgment), 
has  fallen  into  the  same  error ;  whilst  Wanley,  Casley,  and  others,  appear  never  to 
have  had  a  suspicion  of  the  existence  of  an  ancient  school  of  art  in  Ireland." 

The  monks  of  lona,  under  the  great  Irish  saint  and  scribe  Columba,  or 
Columbkill,  and  their  Anglo-Saxon  disciples  at  Lindisfarne,  under  his  friend  St. 
Aidan,  together  with  the  Irish  monks  at  Glastonbury,  spread  Celtic  ornament  in 
England,  from  whence  it  had,  to  a  great  extent,  retired  with  the  expulsion  of  the 
ancient  British.  St.  Boniface,  the  principal  awakener  of  Germany  to  Christianity, 
carried  with  him  his  singularly  ornamented  book  of  Gospels,  which  is  still  pre- 
served as  a  relic  at  Fulda.  Similar  evidence  of  the  transmission  of  the  Art 
prevalent  during  the  early  centuries  of  the  Church  in  Ireland,  to  other  lands,  by 
means  of  the  missionaries  who  left  her  shores,  is  to  be  found  in  the  books  of 
St.  Kilian,  the  apostle  of  Franconia,  still  preserved  at  Wurtzburg;  in  those  of 
St.  Gall,  now  in  the  public  library  of  St.  Gall,  in  the  canton  of  Switzerland  which 
still  bears  his  name;  and  in  the  very  important  series,  of  which  Muratori  has 
given  an  interesting  catalogue,  connected  with  the  monastic  institution  founded 
by  St.  Columbanus,  at  Bobbio,  in  Italy,  and  now  principally  in  the  Ambrosian 
Library  at  Milan.  Many  of  these  pious  men  were  themselves  scribes,  and  their 
autograph  copies  of  the  Holy  Gospels  are  still  in  existence,  with  the  name  of 
the  writers,  in  some  cases  identifying  the  volumes,  and  absolutely  fixing  their 
date.  Thus  we  have  the  Gospels  of  St.  Columba,  the  Leabhar  Dhimma,  or 
(Gospels  of  St.  Dhimma  MacNathi,  and  the  MacRegol  Gospels  in  the  Bodleian 
Library.  All  of  these  are  anterior  to  the  ninth  century,  and  are  distinguished  by 
an  elaborate'  style  of  ornament  unlike  any  other  European  type.  The  extent  of 
influence  exercised  by  these  eminent  m.en  and  the  "  Episcopi  Vagantes,"  or 
missionaries,  is  strongly  insisted  upon  by  M.  Libfi,  unquestionably  one  of  the 
most  eminent  and  correctly-informed  bibliographers  of  the  present  day.  Speaking 
of  the  latitudinarianism  of  some  among  these  Christian  men,  he  observes,  "  No 
doubt  certain  pious  but  narrow  minds  hoped  to  open  the  door  to  ecclesiastical 
literature  only ;  but  the  exclusion  sometimes  pronounced  against  the  classics  was 
never  general  amongst  writers  v/ho,  even  in  their  rudeness,  always  showed  them- 
selves imitators  of  antiquity.  Thus  we  find  that  the  celebrated  manuscript  of 
Livy,  in  the  Imperial  Library  at  Vienna,  belonged  to  Sutbert,  an  Irish  monk,  one 
of  those  wandering  bishops  who,  towards  the  close  of  the  seventh  century,  had  gone 


14  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

to  preach  Christianity,  and,  as  it  would  seem  also,  to  teach  Roman  history  in 
Belgium.  One  cannot  help  remarking,  that  the  most  celebrated  of  these  pious 
missionaries,  St.  Columbanus,  laid  the  foundations  at  Luxeuil  in  France,  at  St.  Gall 
in  Switzerland,  and  at  Bobbio  in  Italy,  of  three  monasteries  which  afterwards 
became  famous  for  their  admirable  manuscripts,  in  many  of  Avhich  the  influence  of 
the  Irish  and  Anglo-Saxon  schools  can  be  recognized  at  a  glance.  The  library  of 
St.  Gall  is  too  celebrated  to  require  mention.  The  Bobbio  manuscripts  are  known 
everywhere  by  the  discoveries  which  have  been  made  in  the  palimpsests  which  once 
belonged  to  that  collection.  As  for  the  manuscripts  of  Luxeuil,  they  have  been 
dispersed;  but  the  specimens  of  them  which  are  to  be  found  in  the  Libri 
collection,  joined  to  what  has  been  published  on  the  subject  by  Mabillon, 
O'Conor,  and  others,  prove  unanswerably  that  in  this  abbey,  as  well  as  in  that  of 
Stavelot  in  Belgium,  and  other  ancient  monasteries  on  the  Continent,  a  school  of 
writing  and  mmiature  had  sprung  up,  as  remarkable  for  the  beauty  of  its  caligraphy, 
as  for  the  care  applied  to  reproduce  the  forms  of  the  Anglo-Irish  schools."^ 

In  delicacy  of  handling,  and  minute  but  faliltless  ^execution,  the  whole  range  of 
palaeography  offers  nothing  comparable  to  these  early  Irish  manuscripts,  and  those 
produced  in  the  same  style  in  England.  When  in  Dublin,  some  years  ago,  I  had 
the  opportunity  of  studying  very  carefully  the  most  marvellous  of  all — "  The  Book 
of  Kells  ; "  some  of  the  ornaments  of  which  I  attempted  to  copy,  but  broke  down 
in  despair.  Of  this  very  book,  Mr.  Westwood  examined  the  pages,  as  I  did,  for 
hours  together,  without  ever  detecting  a  false  line,  or  an  irregular  interlacement. 
In  one  space  of  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  superficial,  he  counted,  with  a 
magnifying  glass,  no  less  than  one  hundred  and  fifty-eight  interlacements,  of  a 
slender  ribbon  pattern,  formed  of  white  lines,  edged  by  black  ones,  upon  a  black 
ground.  No  wonder  that  tradition  should  allege  that  these  unerring  lines  should 
have  been  traced  by  angels.^  HoAvever  "  angelic  "  the  ornaments  may  be,  but 
little  can  be  said  in  favour  of  the  figure  subjects  occasionally  introduced.  In  some 
manuscripts,  such  as  the  Book  of  Kells,  in  pose  and  motive  it  is  generally  obvious 
that  some  ancient  model  has  been  held  in  view  ;  but  nothing  can  be  more  barbaric 
than  the  imitation  ;  while  in  the  other  specimens,  such  as  the  so-called  autograph 
Gospels  of  St.  Columba,  or  Columbkill,  who  died  a.d.  594,  two  years  before  the 
advent  of  St.  Augustine — the  Book  of  St.  Chads,  or  the  Gospels  of  MacRegol, — no 
such  evidence  of  imitation  is  to  be  met  with,  and  the  figures  are  altogetlier  abortive. 

I  was  enabled  some  years  ago,  by  the  kindness  of  the  Rev.  J.  H.  Todd,  the 
learned  librarian  of  Trinity  College,  Dublin,  to  compare  the  so-called  autograph 
Gospels  of  St. .  Columba  with  tlie  Book  of  Kells,  which  is  traditionally  supposed  to 
have  belonged  to  that  saint,  and  remained  strongly  impressed  with  the  superior 

*  Catalogue  of  the  Libri  collection  of  MSS.,  Introduction  by  M.  Libri,  pages  xiv.  and  xxvi. 
London,  1859. 

^  Giraldus  Cambrensis,  speaking  probably  of  this  very  book,  says,  "Sin  autem  ad  perspicacius 
intuentuni  oculorum  aciem  invitaveris,  et  longe  penitus  ad  artis  arcana  transpenetraveris,  tam 
delicatas  et  subtiles,  tarn  actas  et  arctas,  tam  nodosas  et  vinculatim  colligatas,  tamque  recentibus 
adhuc  coloribus  illustratas,  notare  poteris  intricaturas,  lit  vere  htcc  omnia  angelica  potius  quam 
humana  diligentia  jam  asseveraveris  esse  composita." 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  15 

antiquity  of  the  former  to  the  latter.  The  one  may  have  been  his  property,  and 
the  other  illuminated  in  his  honour  after  his  death,  as  was  the  case  with  the  Gospels  of 
St.  Cuthbert.  In  none  of  them,  at  any  period,  were  shadows  represented  otherwise 
than  by  apparent  inlayings  under  the  eyes  and  beside  the  nose ;  and  yet,  at  the 
same  time,  the  ornaments  were  most  intricate,  and  often  very  beautiful,  both  in 
form  and  colour.  The  purple  stain  is  frequently  introduced,  and  is  of  excellent 
quality ;  but  gold  appears,  so  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  observe,  only  in  the 
Durham  Book,  and  in  that  even  most  sparingly.^  From  that  precious  volume 
several  of  the  subjects  on  our  PI.  5,  7th  Century,  and  all  upon  7th  Century, 
PL  6,  have  been  taken.  It  is  the  most  celebrated  production  of  the  Anglo- 
Hibernian  monastery  of  Lindisfarne,  founded  by  St.  Aidan  and  the  Irish  monks  of 
lona,  or  Icolumkille,  in  the  year  634. 

St.  Cuthbert,  who  was  made  bishop  of  Lindisfarne  in  685,  was  renowned  as 
well  for  his  piety  as  for  his  .learning ;  he  died  in  698,  and,  as  a  monument  to  his 
memory,  his  successor.  Bishop  Eadfrith,  caused  to  be  written  this  noble  volume, 
generally  called  the  Durham  Book,  and  known  also  as  St.  Cuthbert's  Gospels,  now 
in  the  British  Museum.  This  manuscript,  surpassed  in  grandeur  only  by  the  Book 
of  Kells,  in  the  same  style,  was  greatly  enriched  by  ^thelwald,  bishop  of 
Lindisfarne,  who  succeeded  Eadfrith  in  721,  and  caused  St.  Cuthbert's  book  to  be 
richly  illuminated  by  the  hermit  Bilfrith,  who  prefixed  an  elaborate  painting  of  an 
Evangelist  to  each  of  the  four  Gospels,  and  also  illuminated  the  capital  letters  at 
the  commencement  of  each  book.  The  bishop  caused  the  whole  to  be  encased  in 
a  splendid  binding  of  gold,  set  with  precious  stones ;  and  in  950  a  priest  named 
Aldred  rendered  the  book  still  more  valuable  by  interlining  it  with  a  Saxon  version 
of  the  original  manuscript,  which  is  the  Latin  text  of  St.  Jerome. 

Want  of  space  alone  prevents  our  following  Simeon  of  Durham  in  his  touching 
narrative  of  the  circumstances  which  attended  the  translation  of  this  volume, 
together  with  the  body  of  the  much-loved  saint,  to  Durham  Cathedral,  in  which 
both  were  long  and  profoundly  venerated.  The  peculiar  importance  of  this  volume 
in  the  history  of  Illumination,  consists  in  its  clearly  establishing,  by  its  coincidence 
with  earlier  examples,  the  class  of  caligraphy  practised  by  that  primitive  Church^  and 
people,  to  whom  Gregory  the  Great  despatched  St.  Augustine,  at  the  end  of  the  • 
6th  century.  With  the  mission,  which  reached  its  destination,  and  effected  the 
conversion  of  Ethelbert  and  of  many  of  his  subjects,  in  the  year  597,  Gregory 
forwarded  certain  sacred  volumes,  of  which  the  following  were  long  preserved 
with  the  greatest  veneration  : — A  Bible  in  two  volumes  ;  two  Psalters  ;  two  books  of 
the  Gospels ;  a  book  of  Martyrology ;  apocryphal  Lives  of  the  Apostles,  and 
expositions  of  certain  Epistles  and  Gospels. 

The  first — the  Bible — which  was  beautifully  written  on  purple  and  rose-coloured 

^  It  is  more  abundantly  used  in  Vesp.  A  i,  which,  as  we  shall  have  occasion  to  notice  hereafter, 
is  in  a  very  mixed  style. 

'  Bede  expressly  says,  that  at  Augustine's  sjniod,  held  at  the  commencement  of  the  7tli  century, 
the  bishops  and  learned  men  attending  it,  "after  a  long  disputation,  refused  to  comply  vv^ith  the 
entreaties,  exhortations,  or  rebukes  of  the  saint  and  his  companions,  but  preferred  their  own 
traditions  before  all  the  churches  in  the  world,  which  in  Christ  agree  among  themselves. " 


1 6  THE   ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

leaves,  with  rubricated  capitals,  was  certainly  in  existence  in  the  reign  of  James  I. 
Mr.  Westwood  ("  Palaeographia  Sacra,"  1843-45)  looks  upon  the  magnificent  purple 
Latin  Gospels  of  the  British  Museum  (Royal  Library,  i  E  6)  as  "  no  other  than  the 
remains  of  the  Gregorian  Bible."  In  this,  with  the  utmost  respect  for  his  opinion, 
I  cannot  concur,  since  the  fragment  exhibits  far  too  many  genuine  Saxon  features 
to  have  been  possibly  executed  in  the  Eastern  or  Western  empires,  previous  to  the 
date  of  the  mission  of  St.  Augustine.  That  it  may  have  been  produced  in  this 
country,  in  imitation  of  the  more  classical  original,  by  the  immediate  followers  of 
the  saint,  is,  I  consider,  very  highly  probable ;  and  from  the  tenour  of  Mr. 
Westwood's  recent  writing,  in  the  "  Archaeological  Journal,"  1859,  it  may  be 
inferred  that  his  opinion  may  have  been  modified  since  the  issue  of  his  profoundly 
valuable  work  —  the  "  Palaeographia  Sacra  Pictoria." 

The  second  —  the  two  Psalters  —  have  disappeared.  Several  learned  men  have 
indeed  looked  upon  the  British  Mirseum  Cottonian  MSS.  Vesp.  A  i,  from  which 
our  7th  Century,  Pis.  3  and  4,  have  been  taken,  as  one  of  these  celebrated  books, 
but,  as  I  venture  to  tliink,  erroneously  ;  for  it  is  difficult  to  believe  that  ornaments, 
so  entirely  of  the  ^Anglo-Irish  school  of  Lindisfame,  as  those  we  have  engraved, 
could  have  been  executed  at  Rome  during  either  the  6th  or  even  the  7  th  century. 
Nothing  is  more  probable  than  that,  out  of  the  forty  persons  who  are  believed  to 
have  constituted  Augustine's  mission,  several  should  have  been  skilled,  as  most 
ecclesiastics  then  were,  in  writing  and  in  the  embellishment  of  books  ;  and  in  any 
school  established  by  St.  Augustine  for  the  multiplication  of  those  precious  volumes, 
without  which  ministrations  and  teachings  in  consonance  with  Roman  dogmas 
could  not  be  carried  on  in  the  new  churches  and  monastic  institutions  founded 
among  the  converts,  it  is  most  likely  that  the  native  scribes,  on  their  conversion, 
should  be  employed  to  write  and  decorate  the  holy  tpxts,  with  every  ornament 
excepting  those  of  a  pictorial  nature.  In  the  execution  of  these,  they  could 
scarcely  prove  themselves  as  skilful  as  the  followers  of  St.  Augustine  would, 
from  their  retention  of  some  classical  traditions,  be  likely  to  be.  Thus,  and  thus 
only,  as  I  believe,  can  we  account  for  the  singular  combination  of  semi-antique 
with  Saxon  writing,  and  of  Latin  body-colour  pictures,  executed  almost  entirely 
with  the  brush,  and  regularly  shadowed  (such  as  David  with  his  Attendants,  in  the 
Vespasian  A  i  Psalter),  with  ornaments  of  an  absolutely  different  character,  such 
as  the  a  ch  and  pilaster,  engraved  on  our  plate  7th  Century,  PI.  8,  Fig.  9,  which 
form  the  framework  for  the  picture  of  King  David.  Another  argument,  which 
weighs  greatly  in  my  mind  against  the  probability  of  such  a  Psalter  as  Vespasian 
A  I  being  a  prototype,  is  the  fact,  that  the  LTtrecht  and  Harleian  Psalters,  to  both 
of  which  I  shall  have  occasion  again  to  allude,  in  their  pictorial  illustrations,  present 
us  with  evident  copies,  in  outline,  of  some  classic  coloured  original  ;  just,  in  fact,  of 
such  a  manuscript  of  the  Psalms  as  the  celebrated  Vatican  Roll  ^  is  of  the  book  of 
Joshua.  What  more  likely  than  that  one  of  the  venerated  Psalters  brought  from 
Rome  should  have  been  such  a  manuscript,  and  should  have  been  the  very  one 
copied  in  the  case  of  the  Utrecht  Psalter,  in  the  "  rustic  capitals  "  of  the  original, 
and  in  the  later  Harleian  replica  in  the  current  Saxon  uncial  % 

'  D'Agincourt,  "  Painting,"  plates  xxviii.  xxix.  xxx. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMiyATIXG.  17 

As  respects  the  third  class  of  Augustinian  books — the  Gospels^ — the  case  is  far 
difterent ;  for  the  accredited  and  traditional  originals  are,  in  every  respect,  such  as 
would  be  likely  to  have  been  produced  at  Rome  or  at  Constantinople,  but  most 
probably  the  former,  during  the  pontificate  of  (^regory  the  Great.  Fragments  of 
the  most  important  of  these  Gospels  are  preserved  in  the  library  of  Corpus  Christi 
College,  Cambridge.  They  are  written  in  black  ink  generally,  with  occasional  lines 
in  red,  in  the  ancient  manner.  Two  pages  only  of  illuminations  are  left,  though  it 
is  evident  that  the  volume  once  contained  a  large  and  complete  series.  The  most 
important  of  these  represents  St.  Luke,  clad  in  tunic  and  toga,  seated  under  just 
such  a  triumphal  arch  as  is  frequently  to  be  met  with  in  the  Roman  Mosaics  of  the 
5th  and  6th  centuries.^  The  second  illuminated  page  comprises  a  series  of  small 
scjuare  pictures,  framed  round  with  the  simple  red  line  of  the  oldest  Latin 
manuscripts. 

The  other  Augustinian  fragmentary  Gospel  is  to  be  found  among  the  Hatton 
manuscripts  in  the  Bodleian  Library,  Oxford  :  it  is  without  any  other  illumination 
than  the  contrast  of  red  and  black  ink,  and  a  few  ornaments  about  some  of  the 
initial  letters.  The  evidence  upon  which  it  may  be  assumed  that  these  volumes 
were  either  brought  to  this  country  by  St.  Augustine,  or  formed  some  of  the 
"  codices  multos,"  ^  sent  by  Gregory  the  Great  to  the  mission  on  its  establishment, 
rests  not  only  upon  the  antiquity  and  purely  Latin  character  of  the  fragments,  but 
on  the  fact  that  both  Gospels  contain  entries  in  Saxon  of  upwards  of  one  thousand 
years  old,  connecting  them  with  the  library  of  the  Abbey  of  St.  Augustine  at 
Canterbury  ;  and,  furthermore,  they  correspond  with  the  description  given  by  a 
monk  of  that  monastery,  who,  writing  in  the  reign  of  Henry  V.,  dwells  upon  the 
"  primitie  librorum  totius  Ecclesie  Anglicane  "  preserved  in  that  library,  as  the  very 
Gospels  in  the  version  of  St.  Jerome,  brought  to  England  by  St.  Augustine  himself. 

The  Martyrology,  the  apocryphal  Lives  of  the  Apostles,  and  the  Expositions 
which  completed  the  series,  cannot  be  now  identified. 

To  rapidly  multiply  copies  of  these  text-books  of  the  Church  of  Rome,  was,  no 
doubt,  one  of  the  first  and  most  important  duties  of  the  monks  of  Canterbury ;  and 
from  the  traces  we  may  detect  in  various  manuscripts  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  mode  of 
writing  and  ornamenting  Avriting,  combined  with  paintings  such  as  the  Anglo- 
Saxons  were  incompetent  to  execute  for  some  time  after  the  close  of  the  6th 
century,  we  may  safely  infer  that  the  monks  both  worked  themselves  and  largely 
employed  the  native  scribes.  Thus,  as  Mr.  Westwood  observes  in  a  recent  article 
in  the  "Archaeological  Journal,"  "We  have  sufficient  evidence  that,  soon  after  the 
settlement  of  the  followers  of  St.  Augustine,  there  must  have  been  established  a 
scriptorium,  where  some  of  the  most  beautiful  manuscripts  were  written  in  the 
purest  uncial  or  rustic  capitals,  but  decorated  with  initials  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  or 
Irish  style.     Of  such  MSS.  we  can  now  record — 

"  I.  The  purple  Gospels  at  Stockholm,  written  in  very  large  uncials,  but  with 
illuminated  title-pages,  Avith  pure  Anglo-Saxon  ornaments,  and  grand  figures  of  the 
Evangelists  in  a  mixed  classical  and  Anglo-Saxon  style. 

'  This  precious  volume  and  its  illustrations  were  first  figured  and  descril^cd  by  Mr.  Westv.  god. 
'  "Life  of  Gregory  the  Great,"  by  Johannes  Diaconiis,  lib.  ii.  cap,  37. 

C 


1 8  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

''  2.  The  Utrecht  Gospels. 

"  3.  The  Gospels  in  the  Cathedral  Library,  Durham  ;  Astle's  ^  Origin  and 
Progress  of  Writing,'  pi.  14,  fig.  B.,  p.  83. 

"  4.  The  Utrecht  Psalter. 

"  5.  The  so-called  Psalter  of  St.  Augustine,  MSS.  Cotton.,  Vespasian,  A  i  ; 
Astle,  pi.  9,  fig.  2. 

"6.  The  Bodleian  MS.  of  the  Rule  of  St.  Benedict;  Lord  Hatton's  MSS., 
No.  93 ;  Astle,  pi.  9,  fig.  i,  p.  82.^ 

"  Were  it  not  for  the  initials,  and  other  illuminations  in  the  genuine  Anglo- 
Saxon  style,  not  one  of  these  MSS.  would  be  supposed  to  be  executed  in 
England.  They  are,  nevertheless,  among  the  finest  specimens  of  early  caligraphic 
art  in  existence." 

One  of  the  most  important  of  this  interesting  class  of  manuscripts  is, 
unquestionably,  that  of  the  Psalms,  now  preserved  in  the  public  library  at 
Utrecht.  Jt  was  formerly  in  the  possession  of  Sir  Robert  Cotton,  and  should 
be  now  with  the  rest  of  his  library  in  the  British  Museum.  The  volume  contains, 
besides  the  Psalms,  the  "  Pusillus  eram,"  the  Credo,  and  the  Canticles,  with  a  few 
leaves  from  the  Gospel  of  St.  Matthew.  It  is  written  upon  vellum,  and  each  psalm 
has  a  pen-and-ink  illustration,  in  the  same  style  as  those  in  the  Harleian  Psalter, 
No.  603,  which  was  written  in  the  loth  century,  and  similar  also  to  those  in  the 
Cambridge  Psalter  of  the  12th  century.  The  writing  in  the  Utrecht  Psalter  is 
executed  in  Roman  rustic  capitals  ;  it  is  arranged  in  three  columns  in  each  page ; 
and  the  elegance  with  which  the  letters  are  formed  would  place  the  manuscripts 
amongst  those  of  the  6th  or  7th  century  :  but  the  illustrations  before  mentioned, 
with  the  large  uncial  B,  heightened  with  gold,  in  the  Saxon  interlaced  style,  which 
commences  the  first  psalm,  would  give  it  a  later  date,  certainly  not  earlier  than  the 
7th  or  8th  century;  and  the  pen-and-ink  drawings  were  probably  executed  a 
century  later. 

Mr.  Westwood,  to  whose  highly  interesting  "Archjeological  Notes  of  a  Tour  in 
Denmark,  Prussia,  and  Holland,"  published  in  the  "Archaeological  Journal,"  I  am 
indebted  for  the  above  information,  tells  us  that  the  date  of  the  few  pages  of  the 
Gospel,  mentioned  as  being  bound  up  in  this  volume,  is  as  uncertain  as  that  of 
the  Psalter ;  the  text  being  written  in  a  style  which  would  place  it  amongst  the 
works  of  the  6th  or  7th  century,  whilst  the  word  *'  Liber,"  with  which  it  com- 
mences, is  written  in  large  square  Roman  capitals,  in  gold,  with  the  remains  of 
ornament  similar  to  that  in  the  Psalter  of  St.  Augustine.  Mr.  Westwood  says, 
that  the  title  page  and  inscriptions  are  "written  in  eight  lines,  in  uncials  even  larger 
than  those  of  the  Psalter  of  St.  Germain  des  Pres,  but  enclosed  within  an 
ornamental  circle,  with  an  interlaced  pattern,  in  the  interstices  of  which  is 
inscribed,  >J<  APIA  MAPIA  BOHGHPO  TO.  PPA^ANTL" 

That  which  gives,  however,  its  greatest  value  to  the  Utrecht  Psalter,  is  the 
remarkable  freedom  and  cleverness  of  the  pen-and-ink  drawings  with  which  it  is 
embellished.     In  them  may  be  recognized,   I  believe,  the  earliest  trace  of  those 

•  I  tmst  that  ere  long  Mr,  Westwood  will  add  to  this  list  the  supposed  fragment  of  the  ••Biblia 
Gregoriana,"  alluded  t^  at  page  16  of  this  essay. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  19 

peculiar  fluttered  draperies,  elongated  proportions,  and  flourished  touches,  which 
became  almost  a  distinct  style  in  later  Anglo-Saxon  illumination.  So  different  is 
it,  both  from  the  Anglo-Hibernian  work,  prevalent  in  England  up  to  the  advent  of 
St.  Augustine,  and  from  the  contemporary  imitation  of  the  antique,  practised  by 
Byzantine,  Latin,  Lombard,  or  Frankish  illuminators,  that  the  conclusion  seems, 
as  it  were,  forced  upon  us,  that  it  can  have  been  originated  in  no  other  way  than 
by  setting  the  already  most  skilful  penman,  but  altogether  ignorant  artist,  to 
reproduce,  as  he  best  could,  the  freely-painted  miniatures  of  the  books,  sacred 
and  profane,  imported,  as  we  know,  in  abundance,  from  Rome,  during  the 
7th   and    8th  centuries. 

To  so  great  an  extent  do  antique  types  and  features  prevail  in  the  earlier 
specimens  of  this  class  of  Anglo-Saxon  volumes,  that,  until  comparatively  recently^ 
the  catalogue  of  the  Utrecht  Library  has  designated  the  illustrations  of  the  Psalter 
now  under  notice,  as  evidently  productions  of  the  reign  of  Valentinian  ;  ^  while 
the  outline  subjects,  in  a  similar  style,  and  of  considerably  later  date,  which  are 
introduced  in  the  British  Museum  "  Aratus,"  were  attributed,  by  even  Mr.  Ottley's 
critical  judgment,  to  a  somewhat  similar  period. 

The  Harleian  Psalter  (No.  603),  to  which  allusion  has  been  already  made, 
page  16,  although  written  in  later  characters,  is  decorated  with  many  pictures,  all 
but  identical  with  those  in  the  Utrecht  manuscript,  thereby  demonstrating,  with 
comparative  certainty,  that  both  were  taken  from  some  popular  prototype,  possibly 
one  of  the  Augustinian  Psalters  already  alluded  to.'"* 

The  Bodleian  Caedmon's,  or  pseudo-C?edmon's,  "  Metrical  Paraphrase  of  the 
Book  of  Genesis,"  written  and  illustrated  in  outline,'*  during  the  loth  or  nth 
century,  and  the  ^^Ifric's  Heptateuch  of  the  British  Museum,  "  Cottonian, 
Claudius  B  iv.,"  of  a  somewhat  later  date,  afford  excellent  illustrations  of  the 
enduring  popularity  of  this  peculiar  mode  of  outline  drawing.  The  striking 
difference  may.  however,  be  noted  between  these  later  and  the  earlier  specimens 
in  the  same  style,  that  whereas  the  types  of  the  latter  are,  with  scarcely  any 
exception,  antique,  those  of  the  former  are  comparatively  original,  and  exhibit 
that  strong  inclination  to  caricature,  which  has  always  formed  one  of  the  leading 
features  of  English  illumination. 

'  The  words  are,  "  qua}  omnia  illustrantur  Romano  habitu,  figuris,  et  antiquitatc.  Imperatoris 
Valcntiniani  tempora  videntur  attingere. "  This  mistake  of  the  old  librarian  has  been  corrected  with 
much  care  and  learning  by  the  Baron  van  Tiellandt. — See  his  "  Naspeuringen  nopens  zekeren 
Codex  Psalmorum  in  de  Utrechtsche  Boekerij  berustende,  door  W.  H.  J.  Baron  van  Westreeinen 
van  Tiellandt." 

2  The  MS.  department  of  the  British  Museum  possesses  some  tracings  from  the  Utrecht  Psalter, 
and  on  confronting  them  with  the  Harleian  603,  it  requires  a  sharp  eye  to  detect  the  slight 
differences  existing  between  several  of  the  illustrations  to  each  of  the  volumes.  In  the  Harleian 
volume,  all  the  subjects  hav6  not  been  filled  in ;  some  are  left  out  altogether,  spaces  being 
reserved  for  them  in  the  text,  and  others  are  faintly  traced  with  a  leaden  or  silver  point, 
preparatory  to  inking  in  :  very  few  artists  of  the  present  day  could  block  in  the  general  forms 
in  so  peculiar  a  style  with  greater  freedom  or  more  complete  conveyance  of  expression,  by  similarly 
slight  indications. 

^  The  whole  of  the  illumination^  are  given  in  the  twenty-fourth  volume  of  the  "  Archa^ologia." 
The  manuscript  stands  in  the  Bodleian  Catalogue,  "Junius,  No.  II." 

C    2 


20  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

While,  in  this  class  of  Anglo-Saxon  manuscripts,  the  influence  of  Latin  art 
may  be  traced  on  the  original  Hiberno-British  school  of  scribes,  a  corresponding 
change  was  effected  through  the  introduction  into  this  country  of  specimens  of 
the  more  brilHant  examples  of  Byzantine  execution  or  derivation.  Thus,  as  Sir 
Frederick  Madden  observes,^  "  The  taste  for  gold  and  purple  manuscripts  seems 
only  to  have  reached  England  at  the  close  of  the  7th  century,  when  Wilfrid, 
archbishop  of  York,  enriched  his  church  with  a  copy  of  the  Gospels  thus 
adorned  ;  and  it  is  described  by  his  biographer,  Eddius  (who  lived  at  that  period 
or  shortly  after),  as  '  inauditum  ante  seculis  nostris  quoddam  miraculum,' — almost 
a  miracle,  and  before  that  time  unheard  of  in  this  part  of  the  world.  But  in  the 
8th  and  9th  centuries  the  art  of  staining  the  vellum  appears  to  have  declined,  and 
the  colour  is  no  longer  the  same  bright  and  beautiful  purple,  violet,  or  rose-colour 
of  the  preceding  centuries.  It  is  rare  also  to  meet  with  a  volume  stained 
throughout ;  the  artist  contenting  himself  with  colouring  a  certain  portion,  such 
as  the  title,  preface,  or  canon  of  the  mass.  Manuscripts  written  in  letters  of  gold, 
on  white  vellum,  are  chiefly  confined  to  the  8th,  9th,  and  loth  centuries.  Of 
these,  the  Bible  and  Hours  of  Charles  the  Bald,  preserved  in  the  Royal  Library 
at  Paris,  and  the  Gospels  of  the  Harleian  collection.  No.  2788,  are  probably  the 
finest  examples  extant.  In  England,  the  art  of  writing  in  gold  seems  to  have 
been  but  imperfectly  understood  in  early  times,  and  the  instances  of  it  very 
uncommon.  Indeed,  the  only  remarkable  one  that  occurs  of  it  is  the  Charter  of 
King  Edgar  to  the  new  minster  at  Winchester  in  the  year  966.  This  volume  is 
written  throughout  in  gold." 

Although  but  few  books  were  thus  gorgeously  written,  many  were  sumptuously 
decorated ;  and,  indeed,  there  exist  no  more  brilliant  volumes  than  some  of  those 
produced  by  Anglo-Saxon  scribes.  Of  these  many  exist ;  but  if  two  or  three  only 
are  noticed,  it  will  be  quite  sufficient  to  establish  the  leading  characteristics  of 
the  school,  v/hich  appears  to  have  been  organized  under  St.  Ethelwold,  bishop  of 
Vv'inchester,  at  New  Minster,  or  Hyde  Abbey,  near  Winchester,  during  the  loth 
century.  The  names  of  several  leading  masters  of  that  great  nursery  of  illumi- 
nation have  been  handed  down  to  us.  Thus  Ethric  and  Wulfric — monks — are 
recorded  as  having  been  "  painters  ; "  but  Godwin  is  spoken  of  as  the  greatest  of 
all.  Fortunately,  a  magnificent  specimen  of  his  art  is  preserved  in  the  celebrated 
benedictional  of  St.  Ethelwold,  in  the  library  of  the  Duke  of  Devonshire,  and 
engraved  in  extenso,  with  great  care,  in  the  twenty-fourth  volume  of  the  "  Archaeo- 
logia."^      This    is   one   of   the   most    sumptuous    manuscripts  which   has   been 

'  Introduction  to  Shaw's  "  Illuminated  Ornaments,"  pages  4  and  5. 

'  The  following  inscription,  written  in  letters  of  gold  on  the  reverse  of  the  fourth  leaf  and  the 
bottom  of  the  recto  of  the  fifth,  identifies  both  the  artist  and  the  patron  under  whose  auspices  the 
volume  was  executed,  between  the  years  970  and  984,  the  term  of  Ethelwold's  occupation  of  the 
see  of  Winchester  : — 

''  Presentem  Biblum  jussit  perscribere  Presul 
Wintoniffi  Diis  que  fecerat  esse  Patronunl 
Magnus  .-Ethckvoldns        *         *         * 

^  4:  4:  ^  ^  H<  * 

Atque  Patri  magno  jussit  qui  scribcre  librum  hiinc 


THE  ART  OF  ILl.UMIXATIXG.  21 

executed  in  any  age  by  any  scribe,  and  differs  widely  from  the  Anglo-Saxon 
MSS.  previously  described.  The  text  is  generally  enclosed  within  a  rich 
framework,  formed  by  wide  and  solid  bars  of  gold,  about  and  over  which  twine 
and  break  elegantly-shaded  masses  of  conventional  foliation.  In  the  initial 
letters,  and  occasionally  in  the  ornament,  the  peculiarly  Saxon  interlacing  and 
knotwork  is  retained ;  but,  in  most  of  the  embellishments,  a  reaction  can  be 
traced  from  the  Carlovingian  manuscripts  themselves,  originally  acted  upon,  as 
will  be  hereafter  seen,  by  the  Saxon  school  of  caligraphy.^  The  figure  subjects 
in  this  volume  are  cramped  in  style  and  action,  exhibit  but  little  classical  influence, 
and  possess,  as  a  leading  merit,  only  a  singularly  sustained  brilliancy  of  tint  and 
even  execution  throughout. 

Next  to  this  great  masterpiece,  and  from  the  same  fountain-head,  come  the 
following,  several  of  which  are  exceedingly  beautiful : — The  two  Rouen  Gospels  ; 
the  Gospels  of  King  Canute,  in  the  British  Museum,  Reg.  D  9  (loth  Century, 
plate  23) ;  the  Cottonian  Psalter,  Tib.  C  vi. ;  the  Hyde  Abbey  Book,  lately  in 
the  Stowe  Library ;  and  the  Gospels  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge.  The  orna- 
ments in  all  these  volumes  are  painted  in  thick  body-colours,  and  with  a  vehicle 
so  viscid  in  texture,  that  Dr.  Dibdin  ^  infers  from  its  character,  as  evidenced  in 
the  Benedictional,  ''the  possibility  or  even  probability  of  oil  being  mixed  up  in 
the  colours  of  the  more  ancient  illuminations."  In  this  opinion  I  do  not  concur, 
as  I  believe  the  peculiar  body  and  gloss  of  the  pigment  to  be  produced  by  the  use 
of  white  of  egg. 

I  have  dwelt  in  some  detail  upon  Saxon  illumination,  for  two  reasons :  firstly, 
because  it  is  a  theme  on  which  some  national  self  gratulation  may  be  justifiably 
entertained;-^  and  secondly,  because  it  is  one  on  which,  although  much  has 
been  written,  comparatively  little  light  has  as  yet  been  thrown.  Before  leaving 
it,  however,  some  general  observations  should  be  made  upon  the  classes  of  books 
most  in  demand,  and  the  means  by  which  they  were  multiplied  in  this  country ; 
and,  indeed,  with  slight  local  differences,  on  the  great  continent  of  Europe  as 
well, — Byzantium,    Ravenna,     Rome,    Monte    Cassino,    Subiaco,    Paris,   Tours, 

Omnes  cernentes  bibkim  hunc  semper  rogitent  hoc 

Post  meta  carnis  valeam  cells  in  herere 

Obnixe  hoc  rogitat  Scriptor  supplex  Godemaniiy 

'  If  the  celebrated  coronation  book  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  kings  (see  Plate  9th  Century,  No,  i), 
should  turn  out  to  have  been  written  and  illuminated  in  this  country,  it  would  afford  a  striking 
illustration  of  this  reaction.  The  general  opinion,  however,  appears  to  be,  among  the  leamed,  that 
it  may  have  been  given  to  Athelstan  l)y  Otho  of  Germany,  who  married  his  sister,  and  by  Matilda, 
Otho's  mother.  The  argimients  in  favour  of,  and  against,  the  Anglo-Saxon  origin  of  the  volume 
would  be  too  long  to  discuss  in  this  place.     The  writing  is  mainly  Carlovingian. 

2  "Bib.  Dec."  vol,  i.  p.  cxxii. 

^  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  propriety  of  those  just  and  learned  remarks  of  Muratori,  in  which 
he  exhibited  himself  as  one  of  tlie  earliest  foreign  scholars  inclined  to  do  justice  to  the  ancient 
Irish  and  British  schools, — Neque  'enim  silenda  laus  Britannire,  Scotite,  et  Hibernise,  qua;  studio 
liberalium  artium  eo  tempore  antecellebant  reliquis  occidentalibus  regnis  ;  et  cura  proesertim 
monachonim,  qui  literarum  gloriam,  alilii  aut  languentem  aut  depressam,  in  iis  regionibus  impigre 
suscitarent  atque  tuebantur"  (Murat.  "Antiq.  Ital,"  diss,  43), — should  have  been  impugned  by  the 
Rev.  Mr.  Berington  in  his  "Literary  History  of  the  Middle  Ages,"  pages  180,  i8i. 


22  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

Limoges,  Aries,  Soissons,  .Blois,  Aix-la-Chapelle,  Cologne,  Hildesheim,  Worms, 
Treves,  Glastonbury,  Canterbury,  Winchester,  York,  Durham,  Lindisfarne, 
Wearmouth,  Jarrow,  Croyland,  and  Peterborough,  being  the  great  centres  of 
production. 

From  the  earliest  period  religious  zeal  was  much  shown  in  its  offerings  to  the 
Church,  by  laymen,  more  or  less  pious, — the  least  pious  being,  in  fact,  sometimes 
the  most  liberal  donors, — and  very  large  sums  were  expended  in  illuminating  and 
ornamenting  manuscripts  for  that  purpose.  Many  of  these  books  were  remarkable 
for  the  extreme  beauty  of  the  paintings  and  ornamental  letters  enriched  with 
gold  and  silver,  which  decorate  them,  as  well  as  for  the  execution  of  the  writing, 
the  most  precious  bindings  frequently  adding  greatly  to  their  cost.  Gospels,  books 
of  anthems,  and  Missals,  were  most  frequently  chosen  for  such  gifts  ;  but  they  were 
not  confined  to  sacred  subjects,  including  occasionally  the  best  writings  of  Greece 
and  Rome,  which  were  eagerly  sought  after  as  models  of  eloquence,  and,  still  more, 
as  often  being  supposed  to  contain  prophecies  of  the  coming  of  Christ,  and  proofs 
of  the  truth  of  his  doctrines. 

The  piety  of  individuals  often  led  them  to  expend  large  sums  in  the  pre-* 
paration  of  their  oiferings  to  the  Church  ;  the  finest  and  best  parchment  which 
could  be  procured,  being  used  for  manuscripts.  When  black  ink  was  used  in 
liturgical  writings,  the  title-page  and  heads  of  the  chapters  were  written  in  red  ink  ; 
whence  comes  the  term  Rubric.  Green,  blue,  and  yellow  inks  were  used, 
sometimes  for  words,  but  chiefly  for  ornamental  capital  letters  ;  the  writers  and 
miniature-painters  exercising  their  own  taste  and  judgment  in  the  decoration,  and 
heightening  its  effect  with  gold  and  the  most  expensive  colours,  such  as  azure 
and  the  purest  cinnabar.^ 

The  greater  part  of  these  works  were  entrusted  to  monks  and  their  clerks, 
who  were  exhorted  by  the  rules  of  their  order,  to  learn  writing,  and  to  persevere 
in  the  work  of  copying  manuscripts,  as  being  one  most  acceptable  to  God  ; 
those  who  could  not  write  being  recommended  to  learn  to  bind  books.  Alcuin 
entreats  all  to  employ  themselves  in  copying  books,  saying,  "  It  is  a  most 
meritorious  work,  more  useful  to  the  health  than  working  in  the  fields,  which 
profits  only  a  man's  body,  whilst  the  labour  of  a  copyist  profits  his  soul."^ 

Home  production  could,  however,  by  no  means  suffice  to  multiply  books,  and 
especially  religious  books,  with  sufficient  rapidity  to  satisfy  the  eager  demand  for 
them.  Long  journeys  appear  to  have  been  taken  to  foreign  countries,  by  learned 
ecclesiastics  for  scarcely  any  other  purpose  than  the  collection  of  manuscripts ; 

*  These  pious  monks,  until  prol)ably  some  time  after  the  Norman  conquest,  generally  worked 
together  in  an  apartment  capable  of  containing  many  persons,  and  in  which  many  persons  did,  in 
fact,  work  together  at  the  transcription  of  books.  The  first  of  these  points  is  implied  in  a  curious 
document,  which  is  one  of  the  very  few  extant  specimens  of  French  Visi-Gothic  MS.  in  uncial 
characters,  of  the  8th  century.  It  is  a  short  but  beautiful  form  of  consecration  or  benediction, 
barbarously  entitled  "Orationem  iij  Scripturio,"  and  is  to  tlie  following  effect  :  "Vouchsafe, 
O  Lord,  to  bless  this  Scriptorium  of  thy  servants^  and  all  that  divcll  therein  ;  that  whatsoever 
sacred  writing  shall  be  here  read  or  written  by  them,  they  may  receive  with  understanding 
and  bring  the  same  to  good  effect,  through  our  Lord,"  &c. — See  Merryweather's  "Bibliomania 
in  the  Middle  Ages," 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  23 

while  quantities  were  imported  into  England  from  abroad.  Thus  Bede  tells  us, 
that  Wilfrid,  bishop  of  Wearmouth  and  Jarrow,  and  Acca,  Wilfrid's  successor, 
collected  many  books  abroad  for  their  libraries,  at  the  end  of  the  7  th  century. 
Thus  Theodore  of  Tarsus  brought  back  an  extensive  library  of  Grecian  and 
Roman  authors  on  his  return  to  Canterbury,  in  668,  from  a  mission  to  Rome ; 
and  thus,  as  we  are  told  by  Mr.  Maitland,^  when  "  Aldhelm,  who  became  Bishop 
of  Schirebum  in  the  year  705,  went  to  Canterbury,  to  be  consecrated  by  his  old 
friend  and  companion  Berthwold  (pariter  Hteris  studuerant,  pariterque  viam 
religionis  triverant),  the  archbishop  kept  him  there  many  days,  taking  counsel 
with  him  about  the  affairs  of  his  diocese.  Hearing  of  the  arrival  of  the  ships  at 
Dovor  during  this  time,  he  went  there  to  inspect  their  unloading,  and  to  see  if  they 
had  brought  anything  in  his  way  (si  quid  forte  commodmn  ecdesiastico  nsui  attulissent 
iiautce  qui  e  Gallico  sinu  in  Angliam  provedi  lihrorum  copiam  apportassent). 
Among  many  other  books  he  saw  one  containing  the  whole  of  the  Old  and 
New  Testaments,  which  he  at  length  bought  ;  and  William  of  Malmesbury, 
who  wrote  his  life  in  the  12  th  century,  tells  us  it  was  still  preserved  at  that 
place." 

How  deeply  must  all  lovers  of  illumination  regret  the  infinite  destruction  of 
books  that  has  prevailed  in  all  ages  !  Of  all  this  "  librorum  copiam,"  how  few 
survive.  Even  in  the  days  of  Alfred  the  Great,  the  Danes  had  destroyed  the 
majority  of  them ;  for  as  that  great  royal  Bibliomaniac  exclaims,  in  his  preface  to 
the  "  Pastoral  of  Gregory," — "  I  saw,  before  all  were  spoiled  and  burnt,  how 
the  churches  throughout  Britain  were  filled  with  treasures  and  books." 

I  now  leave  our  own  country  for  a  while,  and  return  to  the  general  continent 
of  Europe,  having,  I  trust,  satisfactorily  established  the  individuality  of  those 
three  great  styles  of  illumination,  from  the  fusion  of  which  the  Romanesque,  and 
ultimately  the  Mediaeval,  system  sprang, — viz.,  the  Roman,  or  pictorial  ;  the 
Greek,  or  golden  ;  and  the  Hiberno-Saxon,  or  intricate.  The  commencement  of 
that  fusion  has  been  traced  in  the  later  Anglo-Saxon  work,  and  it  now  remains  to 
observe  the  circumstances  under  which  a  similar,  and  even  more  marked,  amalga- 
mation took  place  on  the  Continent,  under  the  auspices  of  Charlemagne,  the 
greatest  patron  of  the  art  who  ever  lived. 

In  the  series  of  8th  Century,  Ps.  7,  8,  9,  and  10,  of  this  work,  are  given 
various  examples  of  the  illuminated  letters  prevalent  in  different  parts  of  Europe 
before  this  amalgamation  was  effected  ;  and  a  comparison  of  them  with  the  three 
preceding  plates,  will  at  once  suffice  to  show  that  the  only  features  of  design  in 
the  former  series,  of  any  merit,  are  but  imperfect  renderings  of  the  leading 
characteristics  of  the  latter. 

The  specimens  on  8th  Century,  8  and  9,  which  are  taken  from  manuscripts 
executed  by  Visi-Gothic  races,  whose  style  had  been  remotely  affected  only  by 
that  carried  abroad  by  the  early  Irish  missionaries,  are  of  an  altogether  barbaric 
description. 

Much  has  been  assumed  by  early  Palaeographers,  and  even  some  recent  ones, 
with  respect  to  the  influence  exercised  by  the  Lombard  MSS.,  executed  between 
*  "Dark  Ages,"  second  edition,  p.  193. 


24  THE  ART  OF  JLLUMI.VATIXG. 

the  establishment  of  the  Lombard  kingdom  in  the  year  568,  and  its  absorption 
A.D.  774,  in  the  empire  of  Charlemagne,  on  the  class  of  illmiiination  introduced 
under  his  auspices  ;  but  the  specimens  which  have  descended  to  these  days 
exhibit  such  an  entire  decrepitude  of  style,  as  to  justify  the  belief  that,  with  the 
exception  of  a  peculiar  broken-backed  letter,  known  as  "  Lombard  brise,"  the 
Lombards  themselves  contributed  little  or  nothing  to  the  results  which  attended 
the  efforts  made  by  that  great  sovereign  to  raise  the  art  of  book-decoration  in  his 
day  to  its  highest  pitch.  It  was  mainly  by  the  aid,  and  through  the  direct 
instrumentality  of  the  learned  Anglo-Saxon,  Alcuin,  that  Charlemagne  carried  out 
his  laudable  design.  This  industrious  ecclesiastic,  Avho  was  born  in  the  year  735, 
received  his  education  under  Egbert  and  Elbert,  successive  archbishops  of  the 
see  of  York, — having  been  appointed  at  an  early  age,  "  custodian  "  to  the  library 
collected  by  the  former.  On  the  death  of  Elbert  he  was  sent  to  Rome  to  receive 
the  pallium  of  investiture  for  the  new  archbishop  Enbalde.  On  his  journey 
home,  in  780,  he  passed  through  Parma,  where  Charlemagne  happened  to  be  at 
the  time.  The  consequence  of  their  meeting  in  that  city  was,  that  Alcuin  received 
and  accepted  an  invitation  to  take  up  his  residence  at  the  court  of  the  Frankish 
sovereign.  During  four-and-twenty  years,  until  his  death,  indeed,  in  804,  he 
retained  the  affection  and  respect  of  his  royal  patron,  and  occupied  himself  in 
incessant  labour  for  the  advancement  of  learning,  and  the  multiplication  of  pure 
texts  of  the  Holy  Scriptures  and  other  good  books.  Several  of  Alcuin's  letters  to 
Charlemagne  are  still  extant,  in  which  the  supremacy  of  the  English  schools  and 
libraries  is  distinctly  recognized,  as  well  as  the  direct  influence  exercised  by  them 
on  Frankish  literature,  and,  as  in  those  days  literature  and  illumination  were 
inseparable,  on  illumination  also.  Thus,  in  one  place  he  begs  his  master  to  give 
him  "  those  exquisite  books  of  erudition  which  I  had  in  my  own  country  by 
the  good  and  devout  industry  of  my  master  Egbert,  the  archbishop."  Again, 
referring  to  the  same  "  treasures  of  wisdom,"  he  proposes, — "  If  it  shall  please 
your  wisdom,  I  will  send  some  of  our  boys  v/ho  may  copy  from  thence  whatever  is 
necessary,  and  carry  back  into  France  the  flowers  of  Britain ;  that  the  garden  may 
not*be  shut  up  in  York,  but  the  fruits  of  it  may  be  placed  in  the  paradise  of  Tours." 

One  of  the  evidences  of  the  eagerness  with  which  this  task  of  multiplying  the' 
sources  of  learning  was  carried  on,  is  to  be  found  in  the  attempts  made  to  abridge 
and  expedite  labour.  Thus,  as  M.  Chassant  ^  observes  in  his  useful  little  manual 
of  abbreviations'^  used  during  the  Middle  Ages,  the  texts  of  all  documents 
of  importance  were  comparatively  free  from  contractions  from  the  period  when 
Justinian  the  Great  banished  them,  by  an  imperial  edict,  from  all  legal  instruments, 
until  the  accession  of  Charlemagne,  "  during  whose  reign,  either  to  save  time  or 
veflum,  the  scribes  revived  the  ancient  Roman  practice  of  using  initials,  and 
frequently  arbitrary  signs,  to  represent  whole  words  of  frequent  recurrence." 

It  is,  however,  in  the  quality,  rather  than  the  quantity,  of  Carlovingian  MSS. 

that  the  reader  is  most  likely  to  be  interested  ;  and  I  therefore  hasten  to  note 

two  or  three  of  the  most  imposing  specimens.     The  earliest  of  the  grand  class  is 

beheved  to  be  the  Evangelistiarium,  Jong  preserved  in  the  Abbey  of  St.  Servin, 

'  Librarian  of  the  town  of  Evreux.  '  Cornemillot,  Evreux,  1846. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  25 

at  Toulouse,  and  ultimately  presented  to  Napoleon  I.,  on  the  baptism  of  the  King 
of  Rome,  in  the  name  of  the  city.  From  contemporary  entries,  it  appears  to 
have  been  completed  after  eight  years'  labour,  in  the  year  781,  by  the  scribe 
Godescalc.  Of  whatever  nation  "  Godescalc "  may  have  been,  the  volume  ^ 
exhibits  far  too  many  composite  features  to  justify  the  belief  that  any  one 
indiAddual,  or  even  many  individuals  of  one  nation,  could  have  executed  the 
whole.  The  paintings  are  probably  by  an  Italian  hand,  being  executed  freely 
with  the  brush  in  opaque  colours,  in  the  antique  manner.  Many  of  the  golden 
borders  are  quite  Greek  in  style,  while  the  initial  letters,  and  others  of  the  borders, 
are  thoroughly  Hiberno-Saxon.  A  nearly  similar  dissection  would  apply  to  most 
of  the  manuscripts  executed  for  Charlemagne's  descendants,  to  the  third  gene- 
ration. The  volume  contains  127  leaves,  every  leaf,  not  entirely  filled  with 
illumination,  being  stained  pyrple,  with  a  white  margin,  and  covered  widi  a 
text,  written  in  golden  initials,  in  two  columns,  separated  by  very  graceful  and 
delicately-executed  borders.  Our  plates  8th  Century,  Ps.  11  and  12,  give  a 
good  idea  of  the  nature  of  the  ornament  usually  employed  in  similar  MSS.  to  fill 
up  such  borders  and  initial  letters. 

From  Charlemagne's  "  Scriptorium."  which  was  no  doubt  the  head-quarters 
of  the  best  artists  of  all  nations  in  his  time,  proceeded  many  other  volumes  of 
scarcely  less  interest  and  magnificence.  Among  these  the  most  noteworthy  are, 
the  Gospels  of  St.  Medard  de  Soissons,^  so  called  because  believed  to  have  been 
presented  by  Charlemagne  to  that  Abbey  ;  ^  the  Vienna  Psalter,  written  for  Pope 
Hadrian  ;  the  Gospels  preserved  in  the  library  of  the  arsenal  at  Paris,  and 
formerly  belonging  to  the  Abbaye  of  St.  Martin  des  Champs  ;^  the  Gospels 
found  upon  the  knees  of  the  Emperor  on  opening  his  tomb  at  Aix-la-Chapelle  ; 
the  Harieian  MS.  No.  3788,  known  as  the  "Codex  Aureus;"''  and  last, 
not  least,  the  Bible  known  as  that  of  San  Calisto,  preserved  in  the  Benedictine 
monastery  of  that  saint  at  Rome,  and  formerly  in  the  monastery  of  San 
Paolo  fuori  le  Mura.  The  frontispiece  to  this  volume,  which  is  no  less 
than  one  foot  four  inches  high,  by  one  foot  one  inch  wide,  represents  a 
sitting  emperor  holding  a  globe,  on  which  are  inscribed  various  letters,  arranged  in 
the  peculiar  form  adopted  by  Charlemagne  in  his  signs  manual. 

The  learned  have  disputed  hotly  whether  this  portrait  is  intended  for  that  of 
Charlemagne,  or  of  Charles  the  Bald,  his  grandson.  Whether  this  manuscript, 
which,  in  all  respects,  except  beauty  in  the  figure-subjects,  I  look  upon  as  the 
finest  I  have  ever  seen,  was  executed  in  the  days  of  the  former  or  latter  monarch, 
is  of  no  very  great  moment,  as  its  leading  features  would  harmonize  very  well  with 

'  Du  Sommerard,  in  "  Les  Arts  du  Moyen  Age,"  has  given  copies  of  all  the  illuminations,  and 
Mr.  Westwood  a  page  of  specimens. 

'  Comit  Bastard  gives  no  less  than  six  grand  facsimiles  from  this  volume,  wliich  is  one  of  the 
greatest  lions  of  the  Bibliotheque  Imperiale  at  Paris. 

'  One  of  the  most  curious  illuminations  in  the  book,  the  celebrated  "  fontaine  mystique"  of  the 
church,  is  altogether  antique  in  style  and  execution, 

"*  The  colouring  in  this  MS.  is  very  elegant,  being  mainly  restricted  to  gold,  purple,  white,  and 
a  little  very  brilliant  vermilion  ; — the  forms  are  principally  Saxon. 

*  Described  at  length  by  Dr.  Waagen,  '*  Treasures  of  Art  in  Great  Britain,"  pages  104 — 106. 


26  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

accredited  reliques  of  either.  It  still  contains  no  less  than  339  pages,  and  is  one 
blaze  of  illumination  from  the  first  page  to  the  last.^  The  large  initial  letters  are 
quite  Saxon  in  form  ;  the  borders,  of  which  there  are  endless  and  beautiful 
varieties,  are  more  strictly  classic  in  character  than  is  usual  in  Caroline  manu- 
scripts ;  and  the  pictures  are  in  an  indeterminate  style,  between  Greek,  Latin, 
and  that  original  Frankish,  which  subsequently  absorbed  in  Western  Europe  all 
previous  tradition,  and  grew  into  the  peculiar  type  of  French  12th  century  work 
— the  progenitor  of  the  pure  Gothic  of  the  13th. 

Ample  materials  happily  exist  for  tracing  the  gradual  development  of  this 
Frankish  element ;  at  first  through  the  works  of  the  immediate  descendants  of 
Charlemagne,  and  subsequently  through  various  liturgical  works,  collected  from 
suppressed  abbeys,  and  preserved  for  the  most  part  in  the  Imperial  library  at 
Paris.  Of  these,  some  of  the  most  important  are,  the  Bible  of  Louis  le 
Debonnaire,  executed  in  the  eighth  year  of  his  reign  ;  ^  the  Gospels  of  the  same 
monarch  ;  ^  and  the  Sacrementaire  de  Metz,"* — all  produced  for  sons  of  Charle 
magne.  The  first-named  is  of  the  barbaric  style,  on  which  Alcuin  and  others 
improved ;  the  second  contains  some  very  curious  symbolic  initial  letters  ;  and  the 
third,  a  good  deal  of  originality,  both  in  ornaments  and  figures. 

The  principal  volumes  still  preserved,  once  belonging  to  the  grandsons  of 
Charlemagne,  appear  less  original  in  several  respects,  than  do  those  executed  for 
his  sons.  Thus,  in  the  case  of  Louis  le  Debonnaire's  eldest  son  Lothaire,  whose 
Gospels,^  written  and  decorated  at  the  Abbey  of  St.  Martin,  at  Tours,  exhibit  a 
mixed  Latin  and  Saxon  style,  with  but  little  specifically  Frankish  work, — and  thus 
also  in  the  person  of  Lothaire's  youngest  brother,  Charles  the  Bald,  whose  two 
celebrated  Bibles,  the  one  known  as  the  Bible  of  St.  Denis,  and  the  other  as  that 
presented  to  the  monarch  by  Count  Vivien,  abbot  of  the  same  monastery  at  which 
the  Gospels  of  Lothaire  were  executed, — illustrate  a  similar  composite,  but  scarcely 
original,  style.  The  former  manuscript  is  illuminated  with  intertwined  lacertine 
monsters,  knotwork,  single  (but  not  the  three-whorl)  spirals,  and  rows  of  red  dots 
following  many  of  the  leading  outfines,  all  of  which  may  be  regarded  as  distinc- 
tive features  of  the  Hiberno-Saxon  school ;  while  the  latter,  with  several  of  the 
above  peculiarities  freely  introduced,  combines  an  unmistakable  classicality,  shown 
in  the  various  figure-subjects,  and  especially  in  the  arcading  which  encloses  the 
Eusebian  Canons  at  the  commencement  of  the  volume.*^ 

We  can  feel  but  little  surprise  at  the  production  of  such  works  at  the  Abbey 
of  St.  Martin,  at  Tours,  for  it  was  within  the  walls  of  that  "  Paradise,"  as  Alcuin 
calls  it,  that  the  Saxon  sage  gave  all  the  latter  years  of  his  life  to  the  recension 

*  Many  illustrations,  but  unfortunately  without  colour,  are  given  by  D'Agincourt,  "Pittura," 
plates  40  to  45  inclusive. 

2  See  9th  Century,  PI,  14,  figs,  i,  2,  3,  4,  $,  6. 
^  See  9tli  Century,  PI.  15. 

*  See  9th  Century,  PI.  16,  figs,  i,  2,  3,  5. 

5  See  9th  Century,  PI.  15;    and  9th  Century,  PI.  17,  fig.  7. 

®  The  specimens  engraved  on  PI.  20,  loth  Century,  from  the  fragments  of  a  Bible  illuminated 
for  Charles  the  Bald,  and  presented  in  the  British  Museum  (Harl.  7551),  are  completely  Saxon  in 
general  form  and  style. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  27 

of  the  Holy  Scriptures/  and  to  the  organization  of  a  ''  scriptorium "  worthy  of 
his  affectionate  patron. 

The  impulse  given  to  the  Art  of  Illumination  in  that  celebrated  establishment 
was  speedily  communicated  to  rival  scriptoria  in  other  localities;  thus  from  tlie 
abbeys  of  St.  Martial,  at  Limoges,  from  Metz,  Mans,  St.  Majour  in  Provence, 
Rheims,  St.  Germain  and  St.  Denis  at  Paris,  issued,  from  the  age  of  Charlemagne 
to  the  13th  century,  an  almost  uninterrupted  series  of  highly-illuminated  volumes, 
many  of  which  still  remain  to  attest  the  vigorous  efforts  by  which  the  foreign 
elements  were  gradually  thrown  aside  in  France,  to  make  way  for  that  expressive 
and  original  outline  style,^  which  achieved  its  greatest  power  in  the  early  part  of 
the  13th  century.  The  throes  and  struggles  by  which  this  was  achieved,  are 
singularly  well  shown  by  a  page  engraved  in  Count  Bastard's  splendid  work  from 
the  "Apocalypse  of  St.  Sever,"  written  during  the  first  half  of  the  nth  century. 
The  page  presents  a  curious  emblematical  frontispiece,  the  general  form  of  which 
is  perfectly  Oriental ;  the  border  ornaments  are  founded  on  Cufic  inscriptions  ; 
the  animals  which  decorate  the  Arabian  framework  are  classical ;  and  the  inter- 
lacing fretwork  of  several  portions  of  the  design  is  purely  Saxon. 

Many  Byzantine  features  were  brought  into  French  illumination  through  the 
schools  at  St.  Martial's  and  the  other  abbeys  of  Limoges,  but  it  was  at  Paris 
itself  that  the  greatest  changes  and  improvements  were  effected  ;  thus,  at  St. 
Gemiain  and  St.  Denis  were  produced,  during  the  first  half  and  middle  of  the 
nth  century,  two  volumes,  still  existing  in  the  Imperial  Library  of  France,  which 
distinctly  show  the  germination  of  "  Gothic."  The  St.  Germain  "  Mysteries  of 
the  Life  of  Christ"  is  illustrated  by  many  original  and  very  spirited  outline 
compositions,  some  of  which  are  slightly  coloured  ;  while  the  "  Missal  of  St. 
Denis,"  of  a  few  years  later,  displays  that  peculiar  grace  and  naivete  in  the  action 
and  expression  of  the  figures,  together  with  that  soft  elegance  in  foliated  ornament, 
which  for  several  centuries  remained  a  dominant  excellence  in  the  best  French 
illuminations. 

As  classical  tradition  and  Hiberno-Saxon  intricacies  died  out  in  France  to 
make  way  for  the  true  Mediaeval  styles,  so  did  they,  although  somewhat  more 
slowly,  in  England,  Germany,  Spain,  and  the  Netherlands.     In  Italy,  a  degeneracy 

'  The  folio  Vulgate  (B.  M.  Adcll.  M.SS.  No.  10,546)  purchased  by  the  British  Museum 
authorities  from  M.  Speyer  Passavant,  of  Basle,  in  1836,  for  ^750,  was  considered  by  its  late 
possessor  to  have  been  the  original  transcript  "diligently  emended"  by  Alcuin  himself,  for 
presentation  to  Charlemagne  on  his  coronation  as  Emperor  of  Rome,  in  the  year  800.  It  is  a  very 
fine  and  interesting  volume,  but  has  been  referred  by  more  recent  authorities  to  the  reign  of  Charles 
the  Bald.  Mr,  Westvvood,  however,  considers  that  *Mt  appears  to  have  better  claims  than  any  of 
the  several  Caroline  Bibles  now  in  existence,  to  be  considered  as  the  volume  so  presented. "  Its  chief 
rival  is  the  great  Bible  of  the  Fathers  of  Sta.  Maria,  in  Vallicella,  at  Rome.  Sir  Frederick  Madden 
has  entered  into  a  minute  analysis  of  the  claims  of  the  Speyer  Passavant  volume,  in  a  series  of  most 
leamed  articles  in  the  "Gentleman's  Magazine"  for  1836.  See  also  West  wood's  "  Paloeographia 
Sacra,"  and  the  pamphlet,  by  its  late  possessor,  J.  H.  de  Speyer  Passavant,  "  Description  de  la 
Bible  ecrite  par  Alchuine,  &c."     Par.  1829,  pp.  112. 

'  It  is  singular,  considering  how  generally  Hiberno-Saxon  ornament  was  adopted  by  continental 
illuminators,  that  the  peculiar  ^zxoxv  fiuttering  outline  never  obtained  a  footing. 


28  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATIN'G. 

occurred,  from  which  the  revival  at  length,  under  Cimabue  and  Giotto,  was  as 
rapid  and  brilliant  as  the  previous  collapse  appears  to  have  been  fatal.^ 

Alike  from  any  such  complete  change,  complete  degeneracy,  or  ultimate 
attainment  of  life  and  perfection,  the  genuine  Greek  style  of  the  Byzantine  empire 
was  exempted.  That  Oriental  splendour  of  gold  and  colour  by  which,  so  early  as 
the  days  of  Justinian  the  Great,  it  sought  to  gloss  over  the  feebleness  of  its 
reminiscences  of  classical  beauty,  remained  the  unchanged  leading  characteristic  of 
its  illuminations  down  to  the  final  extinction  of  the  empire  in  1453. 

In  such  an  Essay  as  the  present,  it  is  quite  impossible  to  convey  any  idea  of 
the  minute,  but  extremely  interesting,  varieties  of  type  adopted  in  Byzantine 
manuscripts  ;  it  must  suffice  to  state,  in  general  terms, — that  the  dispersion  of 
many  of  the  most  skilful  Greek  artists,  by  the  iconoclastic  emperors  (commencing 
with  Leo  the  Isaurian,  a.d.  726),  gave  a  great  impetus  to  the  arts  of  design  in  those 
countries  in  which  they  took  refuge,  and  no  doubt  contributed  specially  to  the 
improvements  effected  under  Charlemagne, — that  on  the  abandonment  of  such 
religious  persecutions,  in  the  middle  of  the  9th  century,  a  fresh  start  appears  to 
have  been  taken,'^ — and  that  from  the  date  of  that  revival,  which  may  be  specially 
noted  under  the  reign  of  Basil  the  Macedonian,  until  about  the  year  1200,  many 
very  noble  and  dignified  pictures  ^  were  executed.  From  the  last-named  era,  until 
the  taking  of  Constantinople  by  the  Turks,  although  the  treatment  of  figure-subjects 
became  more  and  more  v/eak  and  mannered,  much  beautiful  ornament  was  painted 

'  The  learned  and  most  eloquent  author  of  the  "  Poesie  Chretienne,"  M,  Rio  (from  whom  it 
was  my  privilege,  while  yet  a  youthful  student,  to  receive  many  a  valuable  lesson),  in  noting  this 
"  total  eclipse,"  remarks  that  "  two  rolls  of  parchment,  one  of  which  is  preserved  in  the  library  of 
the  Barbarini  Palace,  the  other  in  the  sacristy  of  the  Cathedral  of  Pisa,  are  ornamented  with 
miniatures  which  may  serve  to  give  us  an  idea  of  the  state  into  which  the  arts  of  design  had  fallen 
in  Italy  in  the  nth  century.  Those  which  were  executed  rather  later,  in  the  manuscript  of  a  poem 
on  the  Countess  Matilda  (written  by  a  certain  'Donizo,'  in  1125),  which  is  preserved  in  the  YaticaU) 
display  no  ti-ace  either  of  chiaroscuro  or  of  coi'rect  imitation  of  form. 

"The  Romano-Christian  school  ceased  from  this  time  to  exist,  after  having  fulfilled  the  whole 
of  its  mission,  which  had  been  to  form  the  connecting  link  between  the  primitive  inspirations  of 
Cliristian  art  and  the  new  schools  which  were  destined  to  reap  the  harvest  of  this  rich  inheritance, 
and  turn  it  to  good  account. 

*'  As  for  the  Germano-Christian  school,  it  may  be  compared  to  a  vigorous  shoot  severed  from  a 
dying  trunk,  to  revive  and  flourish  in  a  better  soil." 

^  The  *' Menologion "  of  the  Vatican,  a  magnificent  volume,  containing  no  less  than  430 
miniatures  of  remarkable  interest  and  excellence,  is  the  standing  illustration  of  this  assertion.  The 
work  was  engraved  and  published  at  Urbino,  in  three  folio  volumes,  in  1 727,  under  the  auspices  of 
three  pontiffs,  Clement  XI.,  Innocent  XIII.,  and  Benedict  XIII. 

^  It  would  be  difficult  to  find  in  the  production  of  the  best  Roman  age  anything  nobler  than 
several  of  the  compositions  in  the  Paris  "Psalter,"  with  commentaries  (Imperial  Library,  Gr. 
No.  139),  a  Greek  manuscript  of  the  loth  century.  One  of  the  finest  of  the  figures  contained  in  it, 
that  of  "Night,"  I  caused  to  be  enlarged,  and  painted  on  the  exterior  of  the  Byzantine  Court  at 
Sydenham,  as  giving  a  more  favourable  impression  of  Greek  art  than  any  other  pictorial  repre- 
sentation I  could  meet  with.  A  replica  of  this  subject  occurs  in  the  Vatican  "  Prophecies  of 
Isaiah."  The  two  may  be  compared  from  the  works  of  D'Agincourt  and  Sere.  Most  noteworthy 
also  among  the  best  of  this  class  of  Byzantine  manuscripts,  are  the  Paris  "Commentaries  of 
Gregory  Nazianzen,"  the  British  Museum  Psalter  (Egerton,  No.  1,139)  of  early  12th  century  work, 
and  the  Bodleian  "  Codex  Ebnerianus." 


J 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUAflNATIiVG.  29 

upoft  gold  grounds,  and  the  influence  originally  communicated  to  Arabian  art  from 
the  Eastern  Empire,  was  reflected  back  upon  its  later  productions  from  the 
contemporary  schools  of  Saracenic  and  Moorish  decoration.-^  It  is  scarcely 
necessary  to  remark,  that  in  all  these  inflexions  of  style  the  Russian,  Syrian,  and 
Armenian  illuminators  closely  followed  the  example  set  them  by  the  Byzantine 
scribes  and  painters. 

Returning  from  the  East  to  the  extreme  west  of  Europe,  it  is  worthy  of  note 
how  entirely  the  primitive  Saxon  styles,  which  wrought  so  important  an  influence 
upon  the  rest  of  Europe,  were  lost  in  the  country  from  which  they  had  been  mainly 
promulgated.  The  successive  social  and  political  changes  wrought  by  the 
ascendancy  of  the  Danes,  and  ultimately  of  the  Normans,  put  an  almost  total 
stop  to  Saxon  illumination ;  and  so  complete  was  the  abandonment  of  the  Saxon 
character,  that  Ingulphus,  in  describing  the  fire  which  destroyed  the  noble  library 
of  his  abbey  at  Croyland,  in  the  year  109 1,  after  dwelling  on  the  splendour  of  the 
"  chirographs  written  in  the  Roman  character,  adorned  with  golden  crosses  and 
most  beautiful  paintings,"  and  especially  "  the  privileges  of  the  kings  of  Mercia, 
the  most  ancient  and  the  best,  in  like  manner  beautifully  executed  with  golden 
illuminations,  but  written  in  the  Saxon  character,"  goes  on  to  state  :  "  All  our 
documents  of  this  kind,  greater  and  less,  were  about  four  hundred  in  number ;  and 
in  one  moment  of  a  most  dismal  night,  they  were  destroyed  and  lost  to  us  by  this 
lamentable  misfortune.  A  itw  years  before,  I  had  taken  from  our  archives  a  good 
many  chirographs,  written  in  the  Saxon  character,  because  we  had  duplicates,  and 
in  some  cases  triplicates,  of  them  ;  and  had  given  them  to  our  Cantor,  Master 
Fulmar,  to  be  kept  in  the  cloister,  to  help  the  juniors  to  learn  the  Saxon  character, 
because  that  letter  had  for  a  long  while  been  despised  and  neglected  by  reason  of 
the  Normans,^  and  was  now  known  only  to  a  few  of  the  more  aged ;  that  so  the 
younger  ones,  being  instructed  to  read  this  character,  might  be  more  competent 
to  use  the  documents  of  their  monastery  against  their  adversaries  in  their  old 
age." 

The  Normans,  a  warlike  but  unlettered  race,  did  but  little  for  the  first  century 
after  the  Conquest,  to  restore  the  taste  for  learning  which  they  and  the  Danes 
had  displaced.  While  English  progress  in  illumination  was  thus  comparatively 
paralyzed,  in  France  and  Germany  new  styles,  corresponding  with  those  known  in 
architecture  as  Romanesque,  rapidly  sprang  into  popularity.  The  plates  in  this 
work,  nth  Century,  Pis.  25  and  26,^  show  the  combination,  with  reminiscences  of 
Carlovingian  knotted  ends  to  the  initial  letters,  of  foliated  ornament,  such  as  in  th-e 


'  Of  this  ornamental  style  the  most  remarka1)le  specimens  are  the  Vatican  "Acts  of  the 
Apostles,"  and  a  1)eautiful  volume  in  the  library  of  the  Duke  of  Hamilton,  From  the  former,  I 
have  given  some  facsimiles  in  "  The  Geometrical  Mosaics  of  the  Middle  Ages"  (plate  20),  in  order 
to  show  the  similarity  of  design  between  the  gold  ground  mosaics  of  the  Greeks  and  early  Italians, 
and  the  embellishments  of  the  illuminated  manuscripts  of  the  former,   . 

-  Ingulphus  was  at  that  very  time  indel)tcd  directly  to  the  Confpieror,  his  early  patron,  for 
his  alibacy, 

^  From  the  Harleian  MS.  No.  7iS^.       . 


30  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

subsequent  plates,  12th  Century,  Pis.  30,^  31,'^  32,=^  2>Z^  34,  may  be  found  developed, 
in  Germany  especially,  into  a  fresh,  luxuriant,  and  complete  system.  The 
complicated  conventionality  of  foliage  shown  in  these  specimens,  and  greatly 
encouraged  by  the  Emperor  Frederick  Barbarossa,  a.d.  1152  to  1190,  was  never 
entirely  abandoned  by  the  Germans  in  their  ornament ;  and  at  the  end  of  the 
13th  and  early  part  of  the  14th  centuries,  when  France  and  England  were 
successfully  imitating  nature,  the  Teutonic  races  clung  to  a  peculiarly  crabbed 
style  of  crinkled  fohation,  which  they  reluctantly  abandoned  only  in  the 
17  th  century. 

With  the  accession  of  the  Plantagenets,  in  1154,  and  especially  through  the 
marriage  of  Heniy  II.  with  Eleanor  of  Guienne,  French  influence  acquired  a 
marked  predominance  in  English  illumination  ;  and  for  about  one  hundred  years 
from  that  date,  the  progress  of  style  in  England  and  France  was  parallel  and  almost 
identical.  Gradually,  in  each,  the  Romanesque  features  disappeared,  and  by  the 
middle  of  the  13th  century,  the  fulness  of  mediaeval  illumination,  as  reflecting  the 
perfection  of  Gothic  architecture,  was  attained.  The  rapid  growth  of  the  Dominican 
and  Franciscan  orders  during  the  first  half  of  the  centurj^,  and  their  eagerness  to 
dispel  the  drowsiness  into  which  the  old  well-to-do  monastic  establishments  were  fast 
slipping,  gave  a  new  life  to  all  arts,  including,  of  course,  that  of  the  transcrij^tion 
and  illumination  of  the  sources  of  learning,  and,  in  those  days,  consequently,  of 
power. 

The  present  appears  to  be  the  most  fitting  place  for  a  few  notes,  derived  chiefly 
from  the  "  Consuetudines  "  of  the  regulars,"*  on  the  general  mediaeval  practice  in  rela- 
tion to  monastic  libraries,  of  which  England,  France,  Germany,  and  Italy  possessed 
many  during  the  13th,  14th,  and  15th  centuries,  rich,  not  only  in  sacred  and 
patristic,  but  in  profane  literature  as  well. 

The  libraries  of  such  establishments  were  placed  by  the  abbot  under  the  sole 
charge  of  the  "armarian,"  an  ofticer  who  was  made  responsible  for  the  preservation 
of  the  volumes  under  his  care  :  he  was  expected  frequently  to  examine  them,  lest 
damp  or  insects  should  injure  them ;  he  was  to  cover  them  with  wooden  covers  to 
preserve  them,  and  carefully  to  mend  and  restore  any  damage  which  time  or 
accident  might  cause  ;  he  was  to  make  a  note  of  any  book  borrowed  from  the 
library,  with  the  name  of  the  borrower ;  but  this  rule  applied  only  to  the  less 
valuable  portion  of  it,  as  the  "great  and  precious  books"  could  only  be  lent  by  the 
permission  of  the  abbot  himself.  It  was  also  the  duty  of  the  amiarian  to  have  all 
the  books  in  his  charge  marked  with  their  correct  titles,  and  to  keep  a  perfect  list 
of  the  whole.  Some  of  these  catalogues  are  still  in  existence,  and  are  curious  and 
interesting,  as  showing  the  state  of  literature  in  the  Middle  Ages,  as  well  as  giving 
us  the  names  of  many  authors  whose  works  have  never  reached  us.  In  perusing 
these  catalogues,  it  is  impossible  not  to  be  struck  by  the  assiduous  collection  of 

*  PI.  30,  from  Harleian,  2800.     Considered  by  Sir  Frederick  Madden  to  have  been  written  in 
the  diocese  of  Treves,  about  1190. 

^  Pis.  31,  33,  34,  from  Harleian,  3045.     A  German  manuscript,  written  by  Hrabinua  de  Crucli. 

^  PI.  32,  from  the  Royal  Library  B.  M.,  No.  i,  C.  vii.     Also  German. 

''  See  Martene  Const.  Canon.  Reg.  in  "  De  Ant.  Eccl.  Ritibus,"  tom.  iii.  for  full  detailsi 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  31 

classical  authors,  whose  works  sometimes  equal,  and  at  others  actually  preponderate 
over,  the  books  of  scholastic  divinity.  It  was  also  the  duty  of  the  armarian,  under 
the  orders  of  his  superior,  to  provide  the  transcribers  of  manuscripts  with  the  writings 
which  they  were  to  copy,  as  well  as  with  all  the  materials  necessary  for  their  labours ; 
to  make  bargains  as  to  payment,  and  to  superintend  the  works  during  their  progi"ess. 
These  books  were  not  always  destined  for  the  library  of  the  monastery  in  which 
they  were  transcribed,  but  were  often  eagerly  bought  by  others,  or  by  some  generous 
layman,  for  the  purpose  of  presenting  to  a  monastic  library;  and  their  sale, 
particularly  at  an  early  period,  added  largely  to  the  revenues  of  the  establishment 
in  which  they  were  written  or  illuminated. 

The  different  branches  of  the  transcribing  trade  were  occasionally  united  in  the 
same  person,  but  were  more  generally  divided  and  practised  separately,  and  by 
secular  as  well  as  by  religious  copyists.  Of  the  former,  there  were  at  least  three 
distinct  branches — the  illuminators,  the  notarii,  and  the  librarii  antiquarii.  The  last- 
mentioned  were  employed  chiefly  in  restoring  and  repairing  old  and  defaced 
manuscripts  and  their  bindings.  The  public  scribes  were  employed  chiefly  by 
monks  and  lawyers,  sometimes  working  at  their  own  houses ;  and  at  others,  when 
any  valuable  work  was  to  be  copied,  in  that  of  their  employer,  where  they  were 
lodged  and  boarded  during  the  time  of  their  engagement. 

A  large  room,  as  has  been  already  stated,  was  in  most  monasteries  set  apart  for 
such  labours,  and  here  the  general  transcribers  pursued  their  avocation  ;  but  there 
were  also,  in  addition,  small  rooms  or  cells,  known  also  as  scriptoria,  which  were 
occupied  by  such  monks  as  were  considered,  from  their  piety  and  learning,  to  be 
entitled  to  the  indulgence,^  and  used  by  them  for  their  private  devotions,  as  well  as 
for  the  purpose  of  transcribing  works  for  the  use  of  the  church  or  library.  The 
scriptoria  were  frequently  enriched  by  donations  and  bequests  from  those  who  knew 
the  value  of  the  works  carried  on  in  them,  and  large  estates  were  often  devoted  to 
their  support.  The  tithes  of  Wythessy  and  Impitor,  two  shillings  and  twopence, — 
and  some  land  in  Ely,  with  two  parts  of  the  tithes  of  the  lordship  of  Pampesward, 
were  granted  by  Bishop  Nigellus  to  the  scriptorium  of  the  monastery  of  Ely,  the 
charter  of  which  still  exists  in  the  church  there.  A  Norman  named  Robert  gave  to 
the  scriptorium  of  St.  Alban's  the  tithes  of  Redburn,  and  two  parts  of  the  tithes  of 
Hatfield ;  and  that  of  St.  Edmondesbury  was  endowed  with  two  mills,  by  the  same 
person.*  — 

'  This  Indulgence  was,  after  all,  not  very  luxurious,  for  as  Mr.  Maitland  remarks  ("Dark  Ages," 
2nd  edition,  p.  406):^'*  Many  a  scribe  has,  I  dare  say,  felt  what  Lewis,  a  monk  of  Wcssobrun,  in 
Bavaria,  records  as  his  own  experience  during  his  sedentary  and  protracted  labours.  In  an  inscrip- 
tion appended  to  a  copy  of  Jerome's  Commentary  on  Daniel,  among  other  grounds  on  which  he 
claims  the  sympathy  and  the  prayers  of  the  reader,  he  says, — 

' '  '  Dum  scripsit  friguit,  et  quod  cum  lumine  solis 
Scribere  non  potuit,  perfecit  lumine  noctis.'" 
For  whilst  he  wrote  he  froze,  and  that  which  by  daylight  he  could  not 
Bring  to  perfection,  he  worked  at  again  by  the  aid  of  the  moonlight. 
'  Ample  information  as  to  the  libraries  of  the  Middle  Ages  may  be  found  by  the  English 
student  in  Fosbroke's  "Encyclopaedia  of  Antiquities,"  and   "British  Monachism,"  in  Maitland's 
"Dark  Ages,"  and  (most  agreeably  and  learnedly  conveyed)  in  Merry  weather's  "  Bibliomania  in 


32  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

During  the  whole  of  the  12th  and  13th  centuries  the  pen  played  a  more 
distinguished  part  than  the  brush  in  the  art  of  illumination ;  since,  not  only  was  the 
former  almost  exclusively  employed  in  outHning  both  foliage  and  figures,  but  the 
use  of  the  latter  was  generally  limited  to  filling  up,  and  heightening  with  timid 
shadowing,  the  various  parts  defined  by  the  former,  and  which  were  altogether 
dependent  upon  it  for  expression.^  In  fact,  it  appears  as  if  the  principal  patterns 
in  13th  century  illumination  had  been  designed  by  stained-glass  painters,  the  black 
outlines  being  equivalent  in  artistic  result  to  the  lead  lines  which,  in  the  best 
specimens  of  grisaille  and  mosaic  windows,  keep  the  forms  and  colours  distinct  and 
perfect.  This  firm  dark  outlining  was  retained  in  England  later  than  in  France, 
and  was  combined  in  the  former  country  with  a  more  solid  and  somewhat  less  gay 
tone  of  colour  than  ever  prevailed  in  the  latter. 

So  late  as  the  15  th  centuiy,  this  correspondence  between  stained  glass  work 
and  illumination  still  obtained ;  thus,  as  Mr.  Scharf  remarks,  in  a  note  to  his 
interesting  paper  on  the  King's  College,  Cambridge,  windows,  in  the  Transactions 
of  the  Archaeological  Institute  for  1855,  "The  forty  windows  of  the  monasteiy  of 
Horschau  contained  a  series  of  subjects  minutely  corresponding  to  those  of  the 
Biblia  Pauperum,"  &c. 

The  initial  letters  which  in  Romanesque  illumination  had  expanded  into  very 
large  proportions  (12th  Century,  Pis.  32  and  34),  as  a  general  rule,^  diminished  ; 
but,  in  compensation,  effloresced,  as  it  were,  into  floreated  temiinations,  which  were 
at  last  not  only  carried  down  the  side  of  the  page,  but  even  made  to  extend  right 
across  both  the  top  and  bottom  of  it.  During  the  reigns  of  the  three  first  Edwards 
in  England,  the  tail,  as  it  might  be  called,  of  the  initial  letter,  running  down  the 
side  of  the  i)age,  gradually  widened,  until  at  length  it  grew  into  a  band  of  ornament, 
occasionally  panelled,  and  with  small  subjects  introduced  into  the  panels.  In  such 
cases,  the  initial  letter  occupying  the  angle  formed  by  the  side  and  top  ornaments 
of  the  page,  became  subsidiary  to  the  bracket-shaped  bordering,  which,  in  earlier 
examples,  had  been  decidedly  subsidiary  to  the  initial  letter.  Thus  PI.  30,  12th 
Century,  in  figs,  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  show  progressive  and  transitional  examples  of  the 
extension  of  the  initial  letter  into  the  elongated  bracket-shape.  The  succeeding 
plates  13th  Century,  Pis.  40  and  41,  and  the  Frontispiece,  furnish  beautiful 
specimens  of  the  floreated  and  panelled  bracket  ornaments,  combined  with  the 
flourished  and  stretched-out  initial  letters.  PI.  49,  14th  Century,  fig.  i,  shows  the 
gradual  encircling  of  the  page  with  ornament  derived  from  the  initial  letter  ;  while 
PI.  76,  15th  Century,  at  length,  displays  the  bordering  completely  surrounding  the 
text  or  miniature.  In  this  example  the  capital,  although  ovenvhelmed  by  the 
border,  is  still  connected  with  it.  In  the  following,  PI.  77,  15th  Century,  in  one 
instance  the  initial  letter  cuts  on,  but  does  not  connect  with,  the  bordering ;  and  in 
another  it  is  altogether  detached  from  it.     Lastly,  in  Pis.  80  and  81,  15  th  Centur}', 

the  Middle  Ages."  From  these  works  and  from  Martene  the  preceding  notes  on  the  subject  have 
been  mainly  condensed. 

»   Sec  1 2th  Century,  Pis..  30,  31,  32,  33,  34,  and  13th,  Pis.  38,  39,  40,  41,  42. 

^  In  Italy  the  propensity  for  large  letters  was  never  relinquished.  See  14th  Century,  Pis.  50, 
54,  58,  60,  and  15  th,  Pis.  68,  73,  82,  6cc. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  33 

vre  meet  with  the  bordering  surrounding  the  text  or  miniature  completely,  and 
irrespective  of  the  lettering  of  the  manuscript. 

From  the  12th  century  onwards,  important  illuminated  manuscripts  exist  to  the 
present-day  in  such  profusion  as  to  deter  me  from  individualizing  in  this  necessarily 
brief  essay.  I  shall  rather  dwell  upon  general  characteristics  of  style,  and  upon  the 
influence  of  the  leading  patrons  of  the  art,  in  its  palmiest  days  in  England,  France, 
Germany,  and  the  Netherlands.  In  these  countries  the  infinite  activity  of  the 
mendicant  friars  kept  up  a  steady  demand  for  manuscripts  of  all  kinds  :  thus 
Richard  de  Bury,  bishop  of  Durham,  the  greatest  bibliophile  of  his  age,  and  the 
tutor  when  prince,  and  friend  while  sovereign,  of  Edward  III.,  relates,  that  in  all 
his  book-hunting  travels  :  "  Whenever  we  happened  to  turn  aside  to  the  towns  and 
places  where  the  aforesaid  paupers  had  convents,  we  were  not  slack  in  visiting  their 
chests  and  other  repositories  of  books  ;  for  there,  amidst  the  deepest  poverty,  we 
found  the  most  exalted  riches  treasured  up ;  there,  in  their  satchels  and  baskets,  we 
discovered  not  only  the  crumbs  that  fell  from  the  master's  table  for  the  little  dogs, 
but,  indeed,  the  shew-bread  without  leaven, — the  bread  of  angels,  containing  in 
itself  all  that  is  delectable." 

These  mendicant  friars  were  looked  upon  with  great  jealousy  by  the  clergy,  who 
attributed  to  them  the  decrease  in  the  number  of  students  in  the  universities.  Fitz 
Ralph,  archbishop  of  Armagh  and  chaplain  to  Richard  de  Bury,  accuses  them  of 
doing  "  grete  damage  to  learning : "  curiously  enough,  his  accusation,  contained  in 
an  oration  denouncing  them,  bears  testimony  to  their  love  of  books  and  to  their 
industry  in  collecting  them.  "  For  these  orders  of  beggers,  for  endeles  wynnynges 
that  thei  geteth  by  beggyng  of  the  foreside  pryvyleges  of  schriftes  and  sepultures 
and  othere,  thei  beth  now  so  multiplyed  in  conventes  and  in  persons.  That  many 
men  tellith  that  in  general  studies  unnethe,  is  it  founde  to  sillynge  a  pfitable  book 
of  ye  faculte  of  art,  of  dyvynyte,  of  lawe  canon,  of  phisik,  other  of  lawe  civil,  but  alle 
bookes  beth  y  bougt  of  freres,  so  that  en  ech  convent  of  freres  is  a  noble  librarye  and 
a  grete,  and  so  that  ene  sech  frere  that  hath  state  in  schole,  siche  as  thei  beth  nowe, 
hath  an  hughe  librarye.  And  also  y  sent  of  my  sugettes  to  schole  thre  other  foure 
persons,  and  hit  is  said  me  that  some  of  them  beth  come  home  agen  for  thei  myst 
nought  finde  to  selle  ovn  goode  Bible  ;  nother  othere  couenable  books."  Richard 
de  Bury's  example  gave  a  stimulus  to  those  who  succeeded  him,  both  at  Durham 
and  elsewhere. 

That  illumination  was  excessively  popular  in  England  during  the  14th  century 
among  the  leading  families,  is  proved  by  the  numbers  of  coats  of  arms  emblazoned 
in  many  of  the  most  remarkable  English  manuscripts.  Thus  in  the  Salisbury 
Lectionary,  in  the  Douce,  in  Queen  Mary's,  and  in  the  Braybrooke  Psalters,  appear 
the  ancient  coats  of  some  of  the  best  blood  in  the  country.  A  most  interesting 
contemporary  illustration  of  the  precise  terms  upon  which  these  noble  patrons 
employed  the  best  illuminators  of  the  day,  has  been  furnished  me  by  a  kind  and 
learned  antiquarian  friend,^  in  the  shape  of  an  extract  from  the  fabric  rolls  of  "  York 
Minster,"''  of  which  the  following  is  a  translation : — 

'  W.  H.  Blaauw,  Esq. 
- '  Edited  by  James  Raine,  Jun,,  for  the  Surtees  Society.     8vo.  Durham,  1859* 

D 


34  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

"August  26th,  1346. — There  appeared  Robert  Brekeling,  scribe,  and  swore  that 
he  would  observe  the  contract  made  between  him  and  Sir  John  Forbor,  viz.,  that 
he  the  said  Robert  would  write  one  Psalter  with  the  Kalender  for  the  work  of  the 
said  Sir  John  for  ^s.  and  6^. ;  and  in  the  same  Psalter,  in  the  same  character,  a 
Placebo  and  a  Dirige,  with  a  Hymnal  and  Collectary,  for  4s.  and  3^.  And  the  said 
Robert  will  illuminate  ('  luminabit ')  all  the  Psalms  with  great  gilded  letters,  laid  in 
with  colours  ;  and  all  the  large  letters  of  the  Hymnal  and  Collectary  will  he 
illuminate  with  gold  and  vermiHon,  except  the  great  letters  of  double  feasts,  which 
shall  be  as  the  large  gilt  letters  are  in  the  Psalter.  And  all  the  letters  at  the 
commencement  of  the  verses  shall  be  illuminated  with  good  azure  and  vermilion  ; 
and  all  the  letters  at  the  beginning  of  the  Noctunis  shall  be  great  uncial  (unciales) 
letters,  containing  V.  lines,  but  the  Beatus  Vir  and  Dixit  Dominus  shall  contain 
VI.  or  VII.  lines ;  and  for  the  aforesaid  illumination  and  for  colours  he  [John]  will 
give  5^".  6^.,  and  for  gold  he  will  give  18^.,  and  2s,  for  a  cloak  and  fur  trimming. 
Item  in  one  wardrobe — one  coverlet,  one  sheet,  and  one  pillow."^ 

Under  such  contracts,  and  on  much  more  extravagant  terms,  were  no  doubt 
produced  the  finest  of  those  "  specimens  of  English  miniature  painting  "  of  the 
Edwardian  period,  which  Dr.  Waagen  considers  "  excel  those  of  all  other 
nations  of  the  time,  with  the  exception  of  the  Italian,  and  are  not  inferior  even 
to  these."^ 

There  is  probably  no  document  in  existence  which  better  illustrates  the  nature, 
cost,  and  classification  of  illuminated  and  other  manuscripts  during  the  14th  and 
15th  centuries,  than  the  catalogue  of  the  library  founded  by  William  of  Wykeham, 
himself  one  of  the  greatest  English  patrons  of  literature,  at  the  College  of 
St.  Mary,  near  Winchester.  This  catalogue  has  been  printed  in  extmso  in 
the   "  Archaeological    Journal "   (vol.   xv.   pp.    69   to   74),    with    notes    by   the 

*  The  same  series  of  rolls  contain  many  very  interesting  entries;  as  for  instance, — 

"1393  A.D.  Soluti — de  4/.  6j.  %d.  sol.  hoc  anno  fratri  Willelmo  Ellerker  pro  scriptura 
duorum  gradalium  pro  choro.  de  40^-.  solutis  domino  Ricardo  de  Styrton  pro  eluminacione 
dictonim  duorum  gradalium— de  22s,  'j^d.  solutis  dicto  Willelmo  pro  pergameno  empto  per  ipsum 
Willelmum. 

"  A.D,  1395.  Roberto  Bukebinder  pro  ligatura  unius  magni  gradalis  pro  choro  ex  convencione 
facta  loj.  Eidem  pro  IIII.  pellibus  pergameni  pro  eadem  custodiendo  2od.  Eidem  pro  I.  pelle 
cervi  pro  coopertura  dicti  libri  '^s,  2d.  Fratri  Willelmo  Ellerker  pro  pergameno  4$-.  Domino 
Ricardo  de  Styrton  in  plenam  solucionem  alu7)ipnyng  tryum  gradalium,  40^-.  de  3J-.  0^.  solutis 
domino  Johanni  Brignale  pro  VIII,  pellibus  pergameni  emptis  pro  niagno  gradali  predict©, " 

"  Domino  Ricardo  de  Styrton  pro  alumpnacione  magni  gradalis  novi  in  choro,  20s. 

'*  A.D.  1402.  In  expensis  in  ahunpnacione  magni  gradalis  in  choro  per  dominum  Ricardum  de 
Stretton,  20J-." 

Throughout  these  accounts,  and  others  too  lengthy  to  note,  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  value  of 
the  parchment,  gold,  colours,  and  current  expenses,  falls  not  very  far  short  of  the  total  cost  of  the 
labour  of  the  illuminator. 

^  "Treasures  of  Art  in  Great  Britain,"  vol.  i.  p.  160.  The  same  distingitished  critic,  who  has 
made  a  special  study  of  the  ihuminated  MSS,  of  Europe,  and  especially  of  the  French  (see  his 
" Kunstwerken  und  Kiinstlern  in  Paris"),  in  describing  some  of  the  pictures  in  Queen  Mary's 
Psalter  (unquestionably  English),  obsei-ves  (p.  166),  "  Upon  the  whole,  I  am  acquainted  with 
no  miniatures,  either  Netherlandish,  German,  or  French,  of  this  time"  (the  14th  century)  "which 
can  compare  m  artistic  value  with  the  pictures  executed  by  the  best  hand  in  this  manuscript. " 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  35 

Rev.  W.  H.  Gunner.  It  is  essentially  a  catalogue  raiso7ine^  divided  into  the 
following  classes,  which  give  a  good  idea  of  the  staple  commodities  in  mediaeval 
and  monastic  libraries  : — 

"Ordinalia,  Antiphonaria,  Portiphoria,  Legendae,  CoUectaria,  Graduales, 
Manualia,  Processionalia,  Gradales,  Pontificales  et  Epistolares,  Libri  Theologise, 
Doctores  super  Bibliam,  Libri  Sententiarum,  Doctores  super  Sententias,  Libri 
Historiales,  Psalteria  Glossata,  Libri  Augustini,  Libri  Gregorii,  Libri  Morales 
Diversorum  Doctorum  [to  which  in  many  libraries  might,  I  fear,  be  added,  Libri 
Immorales  Diversorum  Auctorum],  Libri  Chronici,  Libri  Philosophise  [strange  to 
say,  a  total  blank  in  the  Winchester  Collection],  Libri  Juris  Canonici,  Decreta  et 
Doctores  super  Decreta,  Decretales,  Libri  Sexti  cum  Doctoribus,  Clementinae, 
Summae  et  alii  Tractatus  Diversorum  Doctorum  Juris  Canonici,  Libri  Juris  Civilis, 
and  Libri  Grammaticales. " 

Most  of  the  volumes  in  this  library  were  donations  from  both  laity  and  clergy, 
but  mainly  from  the  former.  The  price  of  every  volume  is  given.  The  founder 
himself  presented  one  Missal  valued  at  ;;^20,  and  John  Yve,  ''formerly  a  fellow  of 
this  College,  bequeathed  a  great  Portiphoriam  for  laying  before  the  senior  fellow 
standing  on  the  right  hand  of  the  upper  stall,"  valued  at  an  equal  amount.  The 
York  contract,  previously  quoted,  shows  precisely  how  much  illumination  could  be 
obtained  for  much  less  than  one  pound ;  and  we  may  therefore  form  from  it  a 
tolerable  idea  of  the  magnificence  of  volumes  upon  the  production  of  which  such 
large  sums  were  expended.  The  student  will  find  this  catalogue  well  repay  his 
careful  examination. 

During  the  last  half  of  the  14th  century  and  the  beginning  of  the  15th,  the  art 
of  illumination  received  a  great  impulse  in  France,  from  the  magnificent  patronage 
bestowed  upon  it  by  Jean,  Due  de  Berri,  brother  of  Charles  V.  Of  his  unique 
library,  which  excited  the  envy  of  all  the  princes  of  his  time,  and  stimulated 
especially  Philip  the  Bold,  Duke  of  Burgundy,  and  the  great  Duke  of  Bedford,  to 
enter  into  competition  with  him,  many  magnificent  specimens  still  remain — 
such  as  his  Psalter,  his  two  Prayer-books,  and  his  copy  of  the  "Merveilles  du 
Monde."^ 

French  illumination  attained  perfection  in  these  works,  and  in  some  few 
specimens  of  the  more  decidedly  Renaissance  period,  such  as  the  unsurpassed 
"Hours  of  Anne  of  Brittany,"  executed  about  the  year  1500  :  all  of  these  are 
models  for  the  study  of  the  illuminator  of  the  19th  century,  since,  in  them  gaiety 
and  charm  of  ornament  will  be  found  united  to  a  style  of  miniature-painting  of 
real  excellence  in  art.  In  the  MSS.  of  the  period  of  Jean  de  Berri,  we  meet  with 
the  perfection  of  that  lace-like  foliation  known  as  the  Ivy  pattern — one  that 
attained  an  extraordinary  popularity  in  France,  England,  and  the  Netherlands. 
An  early  specimen  of  this  ornament  may  be  found  in  PI.  49,  14th  Century,  and  a 
completely  developed  one  in  Pis.  76  and  77,  15th  Century. 

*  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  Count  Bastard  failed  to  complete  more  than  thirty-two  plates 
of  the  splendid  work  he  announced  under  the  title  of  *'  Librairie  de  Jean  de  France,  Dug 
de  Berri,  frere  de  Charles  V.,  public  en  son  entier  pour  la  premiere  fois."  Paris,  1834.  Fol. 
max.  &c. 

D   2 


36  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATI^fG. 

Ill  the  illuminations  of  both  France  and  England,  during  the  14th  and  first  half 
of  the  15th  centuries,  the  apjilication  of  raised  and  highly-burnished  gold  became  a 
leading  feature,  and  reached  its  highest  pitch  of  perfection.  When  used,  as  it 
frequently  was,  as  a  ground  for  miniature  subjects  and  ornaments,  it  v,-as  frequently 
diapered  in  the  most  brilliant  and  delicate  manner.  This  diapered  background 
gave  way  at  length  to  an  architectural,  and,  ultimately,  under  the  influence  of  the 
Italian  school  and  that  of  the  Van  Eycks,  to  a  landscape  one. 

It  may  be  well  now  to  advert  to  those  styles  of  illumination  which,  through  the 
Flemings  settled  in  this  country,  greatly  affected  English  art ;  and  which,  through 
the  House  of  Burgundy,  equally  powerfully  wrought  upon  the  French  styles,  not  so 
much  of  ornament,  as  of  miniature-painting.  As  M.  Hippolyte  Fortoul  ^  justly 
remarks,  "  The  powerful  school  established  at  Bruges  by  the  Van  Eycks,  at  the 
close  of  the  14th  century,  exercised  an  immense  influence  on  all  the  schools  of 
Europe,  not  excepting  those  of  Italy ; " —  an  influence  which  was,  indeed,  not 
altogether  dissimilar  from  that  brought  to  bear  upon  mannerism  in  Art  by  the  Pre- 
Raflaelitism  of  the  present  day.  The  foundations  of  the  Netherlandish  school  were 
sufficiently  remote,  but  may  be  satisfactorily  traced  through  existing  miniatures  and 
paintings.  Herr  Heinrich  Otte,  in  his  "  Handbuch  der  Kirchlichen  Kunst- 
Archaologie"  (p.  187),  gives  a  chronological  hst  of  the  principal  MSS.  of  Germanic 
production  from  the  Carlovingian  period  to  the  commencement  of  the  13th 
century.  Up  to  that  period  the  Byzantine  manner  prevailed,  mixed  with  a  peculiar 
rudeness,  such  as  may  be  recognized  in  the  works  of  the  great  saint  and  bishop, 
Bernward  of  Hildesheim,  whom  Fiorillo  and  other  writers  look  upon,  with  Willigis  of 
Mainz,  as  the  great  animator  of  German  art  in  the  nth  century.^  The  conversion 
of  this  latter  element  into  Gothic  originality  appears  to  have  taken  place  during 
the  13th  century,  and  a  fine  manuscript  in  the  British  Museum  (B.  R  2,  b.  11), 
ascribed  by  Dr.  Waagen  to  a  period  between  1240  and  1260,  illustrates  the 
transition.^ 

With  the  commencement  of  the  14th  century  appear  the  "  Lay  of  the 
Minnesingers,"  one  of  the  most  peculiar  of  the  Paris  manuscripts,  and  others 
cited  by  Dr.  Kugler,  which  carry  on  the  evidence  of  progressive  development  until 
the  power  of  expression  obtained  in  painting  by  Meisters  Wilhelm  and  Stephen  of 
Cologne,  is  reflected  in  the  contemporary  miniatures. 

Even  did  not  the  celebrated  "  Paris  Breviary,"  and  the  British  Museum 
"  Bedford  Missal,"  both  executed  in  part  by  the  three  Van  Eycks,  Hubert,  Jan, 
and  Margaretha,  for  the  great  Regent  of  France,  exist,  the  style  of  the  panel- 
pictures  painted  by  them  would  be  quite  sufficient  to  show  that  they  must  have 
been  illuminators  before  they  became  world-renowned  oil-painters.     Through  their 

'  "De  I'Art  en  Allemagne,"  tome  ii.  page  153.     Paris,  1842. 

"^  See  casts  from  his  bronze  doors  and  columns  in  the  Crystal  Palace,  and  his  Three  Gospels  in 
the  treasury  of 'the  Cathedral  at  Hildesheim.  In  Dr.  F.  H.  Miiller's  "  Beitrage  zur  tcutschen 
Kunst  und  Geschichtskunde,"  very  careful  engravings  of  the  plastic  art  of  Bei-nward  and  Willigis 
may  be  compared  with  facsimiles  of  contemporary  German  illumination. 

'  The  steps  of  the  transition  are  also  Avell  indicated,  and  illustrated  by  reference  to  special  MSS. 
in  Kugler's  "  Kunstgeschichte, "  in  his  article  on  the  "Nord.,  vornehnil.  Deutsche  Malerei  der 
Roman.  Periode." 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMTNATIKG.  37 

conscientious  study  of  nature,  both  in  landscape  and  in  por:rait  subjects,  a 
complete  change  was  wrought  in  the  miniatures  of  all  manuscripts  produced 
after  their  influence  had  had  time  to  penetrate  into  the  scriptoria  and  atehers  of  the 
contemporary  artist-scribes.  Had  not  the  invention  of  printing  rapidly  supervened, 
there  can  be  no  doubt  that  even  more  extraordinary  results  than  followed  the 
general  appreciation  of  their  graces  as  illuminators  would  have  been  ensured. 
The  later  manuscripts  of  the  German  and  Netherlandish  schools  of  miniature- 
painting  generally  reflect  the  mixed  cleverness  and  angularities  of  such  masters  as 
Rogier  van  der  Weyde  the  elder,  Lucas  van  Leyden,  Martin  Schongauer,  &c.  ; 
where,  however,  the  manner  of  Hemling  prevailed,  spiritual  beauty  and  refine- 
ment followed. 

To  dwell  upon  Spanish  illuminated  manuscripts  would  be  comparatively 
profitless  to  the  practical  student ;  for  all  the  peculiarities  and  excellences  they 
would  appear  to  have  at  any  time  possessed,  may  be  found  more  perfectly 
developed  at  first  in  French,  subsequently  in  Netherlandish,  and  ultimately  in 
Italian  volumes.^  It  remains,  therefore,  only  to  sketch,  with  a  brevity  altogether 
out  of  proportion  to  the  great  interest  of  the  subject,  the  progress  of  the  art 
in  Italy. 

If  the  delineation  of  naive  and  graceful  romantic  incident,  combined  with 
elegant  foliated  ornament,  reached  perfection  in  the  illuminations  of  the  French 
school ;  if  blazoning  on  gilded  grounds  was  carried  to  its  most  gorgeous  pitch  in 
Oriental  and  Byzantine  manuscripts  ;  if  intricate  interlacements  and  minute 
elaboration  may  be  regarded  as  the  special  characteristics  of  Hiberno-Saxon  scribes ; 
and  if  a  noble  tone  of  solid  colour,  combined  with  great  humour  and  intense  energy 
of  expression,  marked  England's  best  productions, — it  may  be  safely  asserted,  that 
it  was  reserved  for  the  Italians  to  introduce  into  the  embellishment  of  manuscripts 
those  higher  qualities  of  art,  their  peculiar  aptitude  for  which  so  long  gave  them  a 
pre-eminence  among  contemporaneous  schools. 

I  therefore  proceed  to  trace  the  names  and  styles  of  some  few  of  the  most 
celebrated  among  their  illuminators  ;  premising  by  a  reminder  to  the  student  of  the 
miserably  low  pitch  to  which  art  had  been  reduced  in  Italy  during  the  12th 
century.  Even  the  most  enthusiastic  and  patriotic  writers  agree  in  the  all  but  total 
dearth  of  native  talent.  Greeks  we're  employed  to.  reproduce  Byzantine  mannerisms 
in  pictures  and  mosaics,  and  to  a  slight  extent  no  doubt  as  scribes.  Illumination 
was  scarcely  known  or  recognized  as  an  indigenous  art ;  for  Dante,  even  writing 
after  the  commencement  of  the  14th  century,  speaks  of  it  as  "quell'  arte,  che 
Alluminar  b  chiamata  a  Parisi." 

Probably  the  earliest  Italian  manuscript  showing  signs  of  real  art,  is  the  "  Ordo 
Ofhciorum  Senensis  Ecclesiae,"  preserved  in  the  library  of  the  academy  at  Sienna, 

'  The  subject  is  one  that  I  am  unable  to  find  has  been  treated  with  any  great  ability.  The 
reader  may,  however,  be  referred  to  the  following  old  Spanish  works  on  the  subject : — Andres 
Merino  de  Jesu-Cristo,  "  Escuela  Palaeographica,  6  de  leer  Letras  universas,  antiguas  y  modernas, 
desde  la  entrada  dtf  los  Godos  en  Espaiia "  (Madrid,  1780,  in  fol.  fig.); — Estev.  de  Terreros, 
**  Palceographia  Espaiiola,  que  conticne  todos  los  modos  conocidos,  que  ha  habido.  de  escribir  en 
Espana,  .desde  su  principio  y  fundacion  "  (Madrid,  Ibarra,  1758,  in  4to.  fig.);  and  Rodriguez- 
Christ.,  "Bibliotheca  Universal  de  h  Polygraphia  Espanola"  (Madrid,  1738,  fol.  fig.), 


38  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

and  illuminated  with  little  subjects  and  friezes  with  animals,  by  a  certain  Oderico,  a 
canon  of  the  cathedral,  in  the  year  12 13. 

The  Padre  della  Valle  ^  expressly  cautions  the  student  against  confounding  this 
Odericus  with  the  Oderigi  of  Dante,^  who  died  about  the  year  1300.  The  latter 
was  unquestionably  an  artist  of  some  merit,  for  Vasari^  speaks  of  him  as  an 
*'  excellente  miniatore,"  whose  works  for  the  Papal  library,  although  ''  in  gran  parte 
consumati  dal  tempo,"  he  had  himself  seen  and  admired.  Some  drawings  by  the 
hand  of  this  "valente  uomo,"  as  he  is  styled,  Vasari  speaks  of  possessing  in 
his  own  collection. 

Baldinucci  makes  out  Oderigi  to  have  been  of  the  Florentine  school  on  no 
other  grounds  than  because  Vasari  describes  him  as  "molto  amico  di  Giotto  in 
Roma;"  and  because  Dante  appears  to  have  known  him  well.  Lanzi,^  however, 
more  correctly  classes  him  with  the  Bolognese  school,  from  his  teaching  Franco 
Bolognese  at  Bologna,  and  on  the  strength  of  the  direct  testimony  of  one  of  the 
earliest  commentators  on  Dante — Benvenuto  da  Imola.  This  same  Franco  worked 
much  for  Benedict  IX.,  and  far  surpassed  his  master.  Vasari  especially  commends 
the  spirit  with  which  he  drew  animals,  and  mentions  a  drawing  in  his  own 
possession  of  a  lion  tearing  a  tree  as  of  great  merit.  Thus  Oderigi,  the  con- 
temporary of  Cimabue,  and  Franco,  the  pupil  of  Oderigi  and  contemporary  of 
Giotto,  appear  to  have  been  to  the  Art  of  Illumination  what  Cimabue  and  his 
pupil  Giotto  were  to  the  Art  of  Painting, — the  pupil  in  both  cases  infinitely  excelling 
the  master.  To  them  succeeded,  about  the  middle  of  the  14th  century,  a  scarcely 
less  celebrated  pair — Don  Jacopo  Fiorentino,  and  Don  Silvestro,  both  monks  in 
the  Camaldolese  monastery,  "  degli  Angeli,"  at  Florence.  The  former,  Baldinucci 
tells  us,  "  improving,  with  infinite  study,  every  moment  not  devoted  to  his  monastic 
duties,  acquired  a  style  of  writing  greatly  sought  after  for  choral  books."  The 
latter,  who  was  rather  an  artist  than  a  scribe,  enriched  the  productions  of  his  friend 
with  miniatures  so  beautiful,  as  to  cause  the  books  thus  jointly  produced  to  excite, 
at  a  later  period,  the  special  admiration  of  Lorenzo  the  Magnificent,  and  iiis  son, 
the  no  less  magnificent  Leo  X.^    So  proud  were  their  brother  monks  of  the  skill  of 

'   "Lettere  Sanese,"  torn.  i.  p.  278. 

^  The  well-known  passage  in  which  Dante  alludes  to  Oderigi  occurs  in  the  eleventh  canto  of  the 
*'  Paradise,"  and  is  as  follows  : — 

'  *  Oh,  dissi  lui,  non  se'  tu  Oderisi, 

L'  onor  d'  Agubbio,  e  1'  onor  di  quell'  arte 

Che  alluminar  e  chiamata  a  Parisi  ? 

Frate,  diss'  egli,  piu  ridon  le  carte 

Che  pennelegia  Franco  Bolognese  : 

L'  onor  e  tutto  or  suo,  e  mio  in  parte. 

Ben  non  sarei  stato  si  cortese 

Mentre  ch'  io  vissi  per  lo  gran  disio 

Deir  excellentia,  ove  mio  cor  intese. 

Di  tal  superbia  qui  si  paga  il  fio. " 
3  Vita  di  Giotto. 

^  •*  Storia  Pittorica,"  vol.  xi.  p.  13,  ed.  Pisa,  1815;  and  vol.  v.  pp.  8,  9,  10. 
^  Lanzi  speaks  of  these  choral  books  as  ''  De'  piu  considerabili  che  abbia  I'ltalia." 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  39 

Frati  Jacopo  and  Silvestro,  that  after  their  death  they  preserved  their  two  right 
hands  as  honoured  reHcs. 

About  a  century  later,  the  leading  illuminators  were  Bartolomeo  and  Gherardo, 
— the  former  abbot  of  San  Clemente,  at  Arrezzo/  and  the  latter  a  Florentine 
painter  and  "  miniatore,"  whom  Vasari  confounds  with  Attavante,  a  painter, 
engraver,  and  mosaicist.  Of  all  the  Italian  artists  who  adopted  the  style  of  the 
illuminators,  if  they  did  not  themselves  illuminate,  the  most  celebrated  certainly 
are  Fra  AngeHco  da  Fiesole^  and  Gentile  da  Fabriano.  The  majority  of  the  works 
of  both  are  little  else  than  magnified  miniatures  of  the  highest  merit. 

The  school  of  Siennese  illumination  was  scarcely  less  distinguished  than  that  of 
Florence.  M.  Rio  dwells  with  enthusiasm  on  the  books  of  the  Kaleffi  and  Leoni, 
still  preserved  in  the  Archivio  delle  Riformazioni,  and  especially  on  those  decorated 
by  Nicolo  di  Sozzo,  in  1334.  The  greatest  master  of  the  school,  Simone  Memmi, 
the  intimate  friend  of  Petrarch,  was  himself  an  illuminator  of  extraordinary 
excellence,  as  may  be  seen  by  the  celebrated  Virgil  of  the  Ambrosian  Library 
at  Milan,  which  contains,  amongst  other  beautiful  miniatures  by  his  hand,  the  fine 
portrait  of  Virgil,  and  a  vtxy  remarkable  allegorical  figure  of  Poetry,  quite  equal 
in  artistic  merit  to  any  of  the  artist's  larger  and  better-known  works  in  fresco 
or  tempera.'' 

It  is,  however,  in  the  library  of  the  cathedral  at  Sienna,  which  retains  many  of 
the  magnificent  choir-books  executed  by  Fra  Benedetto  da  Matera,  a  Benedictine 
of  Monte  Cassino,  and  Fra  Gabriele  Mattel  of  Sienna,  that  the  greatest  triumphs 
of  the  school  are  still  to  be  recognized.  This  series  of  volumes,  although  much 
reduced  from  its  original  extent  by  the  abstractions  made  by  Cardinal  Burgos,  who 
carried  off  a  vast  quantity  to  Spain,  is  still  the  finest  belonging  to  any  capitular 
establishment  in  Italy,  and  worthily  represents  the  grandeur  of  Italian  illumination 
in  "  cinque  cento  "  days. 

In  various  plates  of  this  work,  and  more  particularly  in  Pis.  48,  50,  51,  53,  54, 
58,  59,  60,  14th  Centuiy,  and  Pis.  68,  74,  and  82,  15th  Century,  specimens  are 
engraved,  which,  although  affording  no  illustration  of  the  beauty  of  the  miniatures 
by  which  such  volumes  were  adorned,  may  still  serve  to  convey  a  good  idea  of  the 
scale  of  boldness  and  splendour  upon  which  the  initial  letters  and  ornaments  of 
Italian  choral  books  were  generally  conceived  and  executed. 

The  series  of  similar  volumes  next  in  importance  to  those  of  Sienna,  is  attached 
to  the  choir  of  the  church  and  monastic  establishment  of  the  Benedictines  at 
Perugia,  known  as  ''  San  Tomaso  de'  Casinensi."  Of  these,  nothing  more  need  be 
said  than  that  they  are  worthy  of  the  stalls  of  the  same  choir,  the  design  of  which 
is  attributed  to  RafFaelle,  and  the  execution  to  Stefano  da  Bergamo,  and  Fra 
Damiano,  of  the  same  town,  the  great  "  intarsiatore." 

Formerly,  as  M.  Rio  observes,^  "  Ferrara  could  boast  of  possessing  a  series  of 

•  The  Kensington  Museum  possesses  two  splendid  leaves  from  a  great  "Chorale,"  which 
contain  miniatures  completely  in  the  manner  of  Fra  Angelico. 

'  The  style,  if  not  the  hand,  of  Taddeo  Bartolo,  another  of  the  great  early  masters  of  the 
Siennese  school,  may  be  distinctly  traced  in  several  existing  miniatures. 

'  **  Poetry  of  Christian  Art,"  p.  140. 


40  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATIMC. 

miniatures,  executed  principally  in  the  seclusion  of  its  convents,  from  the  time  of 
the  Benedictine  monk  Serrati,  who  in  1240  ornamented  the  books  of  the  choir 
with  figures  of  a  most  noble  character,^  till  that  of  Fra  Girolamo  Fiorino,  who, 
towards  the  beginning  of  the  15  th  century,  devoted  himself  to  the  same  occupation 
in  the  monastery  of  San  Bartolomeo,  and  formed  in  his  young  disciple  Cosme  a 
successor  who  was  destined  to  surpass  his  master,  and  to  carry  this  branch  of  art 
to  a  degree  of  perfection  till  then  unknown.  Even  at  the  present  day  we  may  see, 
in  the  twenty-three  volumes  presented  by  the  Bishop  Bartolomeo  della  Rovere  to 
the  cathedral,  and  in  the  twenty-eight  enormous  volumes  removed  from  the  Certosa 
to  the  public  library,  how  much  reason  the  Ferrarese  have  to  be  proud  of  the 
possession  of  such  treasures,  and  to  place  them  by  the  side  of  the  manuscripts  of 
Tasso  and  Ariosto. 

The  "  subjects  generally  treated  by  these  mystical  artists  were  marvellously 
adapted  to  their  special  vocation :  they  were  the  life  of  the  holy  Virgin,  the 
principal  festivals  celebrated  by  the  Church,  or  popular  objects  of  devotion  ;  in 
short,  all  the  dogmas  which  were  susceptible  of  this  mode  of  representation,  works 
of  mercy,  the  different  sacraments,  the  imposing  ceremonies  of  religion,  and,  in 
general,  all  that  was  most  poetical  in  liturgy  or  legend.  In  compositions  of  so 
exclusive  a  character,  naturaHsm  could  only  be  introduced  in  subordination  to  the 
religious  element." 

While  this  was  the  case  with  the  majority  of  illuminations  executed  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Church,  in  those  of  a  secular  nature,  undertaken  for  the  great 
princes  and  nobles,  another  set  of  characteristics  prevailed.  For  the  Gonzagas, 
Sforzas,  D'Estes,  Medici,  Strozzi,  Visconti,  and  other  great  families,  the  best  artists 
were  constantly  employed  in  decorating  both  written  and  printed  volumes,  in  which 
portraiture  is  freely  introduced,  and  picturesque  and  historical  subjects  are 
represented  with  great  vivacity  and  attention  to  costume  and  local  truth.  Thus 
in  the  truly  exquisite  "  Grant  of  Lands,"  by  Ludovico  il  Moro  to  his  wife  Beatrice 
D'Este,  dated  January  28th,  1494,  and  preserved  in  the  British  Museum,  speaking 
portraits  of  both  Ludovico  and  Beatrice  are  introduced,  with  their  arms  and 
beautiful  arabesques.^  Again,  in  the  Hanrot  "  Sforziada,"  the  first  page  contains 
exquisite  miniatures  of  three  members  of  the  princely  family  of  the  Sforzas,  by  the 
hand  of  the  all-accomplished  Girolamo  dai  Libri.^  This  artist,  a  truly  celebrated 
Veronese  and  worthy  fellow-townsman,  with  the  almost  equally  able  Fra  Liberale, 
whose  work  in  the  manner  of  Giovanni  Bellini  excited  the  utmost  envy  on  the  part 

•  "  Orno  i  libri  corali  di  figure  nobillissime. " — Cittadella,  "Catalogo  dei  Pittori  e  Scultori 
Ferraresi,"  vol.  i.  pp.  i — 27. 

^  A  small  volume,  which  passed  from  the  hands  of  the  late  Mr.  Dennistoun  into  the  collection  of 
Lord  Ashburnham,  contains  a  series  of  arabesques  and  miniatures  of  the  most  interesting  character, 
recalling  in  different  pages,  and  in  the  highest  perfection,  the  varied  styles  of  Pietro  Perugino,  Pin- 
turicchio,  Lo  Spagna,  and  others.  The  Duke  of  Plamilton's  library  is  extraordinarily  rich  in  Italian 
MSS. ;  his  Grace's  Dante  with  outline  illustrations  being  of  great  importance. 

^  SeeMx.  Shaw's  truly  beautiful  reproduction,  in  that  gentleman's  "Illuminated  Ornaments," 
&c. ,  of  a  portion  of  Arabesque  border  from  this  volume,  containing  a  medallion  portrait,  Plate 
XXXV.  A  very  beautiful  Sforza  MS.  has  lately  been  transferred  from  the  possession  of  Mr.  Henry 
Farrer  to  that  of  the  Marquis  D' Azeglio. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMIiVATING.  41 

of  the  Siennese  illuminators,  was  himself  the  son  of  a  miniature  painter,  known  as 
Francesco  dai  Libri,  and  bequeathed  the  name  and  art  of  his  father  to  his  own 
son, — thus  maintaining  the  traditions  of  good  design  acquired  in  the  great  school 
of  Padua,  under  Andrea  Mantegna  ^  and  Squarcione,  during  three  generations  of 
illuminators.  Girolamo  was  by  far  the  most  celebrated  of  the  three.  As  a  painter, 
his  works  possess  distinguished  merit,  and  there  still  remain  good  samples  of  his 
abilities  in  the  churches  of  San  Zeno  and  Sant'  Anastasia,  at  Verona.  He  also 
derives  some  credit  from  the  transcendent  merits  of  his  pupil  Giulio  Clovio. 
Vasari's  description  of  the  talents  of  Girolamo  ^  gives  so  lively  a  picture  of  the  style 
which  reached  its  highest  vogue  at  the  end  of  the  15  th,  and  during  the  first  half  of 
the  1 6th  centuries  in  Italy,  that  I  am  tempted  to  translate  it.  "  Girolamo,"  he  says, 
"  executed  flowers  so  naturally  and  beautifully,  and  with  so  much  care,  as  to  appear 
real  to  the  beholder.  In  like  manner  he  imitated  little  cameos  and  other  precious 
stones  and  jewels  cut  in  intaglio,  so  that  nothing  like  them,  or  so  minute,  was  ever 
seen.  Among  his  smallest  figures,  such  as  he  represented  on  gems  or  cameos, 
some  might  be  observed  no  larger  than  little  ants,  and  yet  in  all  of  them  might  be 
made  out  every  limb  and  muscle,  in  a  manner  which  to  be  believed  must  needs 
be  seen." 

Mr.  Ottley  supposes  that  GiuHo  Clovio  (born  1498,  died  1578)  worked  previous 
to  his  receipt  of  the  instruction  of  Girolamo  in  a  drier  manner^  in  which  no  evidence 
appears  of  that  imitation  of  Michael  Angelesque  pose  in  his  figures,  which  in  his 
subsequent  manner  became  so  leading  a  characteristic  of  his  style.  It  is  in  his 
earlier  manner  that  Giulio  is  believed  to  have  illuminated  for  Clement  VII.^  (1523 
— 1534),  while  for  his  successor,  Paul  III.  (1534 — 1539),  he  worked  abundantly, 
and  gradually  acquired  that  which  is  best  known  as  his  later  manner,  in  which  he 
continued  to  labour,  according  to  Vasari,  until  1578,  at  the  great  age  of  eighty 
years.  Mr.  Ottley,  however,  recognizes  his  hand  in  MSS.  which  must  have  been 
at  least  five  years  later — during  the  Pontificate  of  Gregory  XIII.'* 

It  is  obviously  impossible,  in  such  an  essay  as  the  present,  to  dwell  in  detail 
upon  the  merits  of  so  accomplished  a  master  of  his  art.  Fortunately  we  possess 
in  this  metropolis  two  fine  specimens  of  his  skill,  both  tolerably  accessible — one  in 
the  Soane,"  and  the  other  in  the  British  Museum."     A  third,  in  the  shape  of  an 

'  That  Andrea  exercised  a  great  influence  upon  miniature-painting  may  be  recognized  in  the 
works  of  Girolamo  :  a  grand  leaf  from  a  folio,  on  which  is  painted  a  seated  allegorical  figure  of 
*•  Rome,"  in  the  possession  of  Mr,  T,  Whitehead,  is  so  noble  in  every  way,  and  so  entirely  in 
Andrea's  manner,  that  it  seems  almost  impossible  to  doubt  its  being  by  his  hand.  It  may, 
however,  possibly  have  been  executed  by  his  contemporary  in  the  Mantuan  school,  ' '  Giovanni 
del  Russi,"  who  in  1455  illuminated  the  great  Bible  of  the  house  of  Este,  for  Borso,  Duke  of 
Modena. 

^  **  Vita  di  Fra  Giocondo  e  di  Liberale,  e  d'  altri  Veronesi," 

^  The  Celotti  sale,  which  took  place  at  Christie's  on  the  26th  of  May,  1825,  and  which  included 
by  far  the  most  important  collection  of  Italian  illuminations  ever  brought  to  the  hammer,  contained 
no  less  than  nineteen  beautiful  specimens  extracted  from  the  choral  books  of  that  pope. 

*  See  Baglioni,  **  Vite  dei  Pittori  ed  Architetti  fioriti  in  Roma,  dal  1572  sino  al  1642," — Vita  di 
Giulio  Clovio. 

*  Facsimiles  of  the  exquisite  pages  of  this  volume  are  given  in  Mr,  Noel  Humphrey's  vv^ork  ;  they 
are  perfect  triumphs  of  chromo-lithographic  skill,  and  their  production  by  Mr.  Owen  Jones  formed 


4Z  THF^  ART  OF  JLLUMJNA  TING, 

altar-card,  attributed  to  him,  is  to  be  found  in  the  Kensington  Museum ;  and  several 
fragments,  formerly  in  Mr.  Rogers's  possession,  have  passed  to  Mr.  Whitehead  and 
to  the  British  Museum.  All  of  these  exhibit  a  refinement  of  execution,  combined 
with  a  brilliancy  of  colour  and  excellence  of  drawing,  which  has  never  been  sur- 
passed by  any  illuminator.  Vasari  gives  a  complete  list  and  description  of  his  prin- 
cipal works,  and  proves  him  to  have  been  not  less  industrious  than  able. 

A  contemporary  of  Giulio's,  whose  name  has  been  overpowered  by  the  greater 
brilliancy  of  that  of  the  Cellini  of  illumination,  was  a  certain  Apollonius  of  Capra- 
nica,  or,  as  he  signs  himself,  "  Apollonius  de  Bonfratellis  de  Capranica,  Capellae  et 
Sacristiae  Apostolicae  Miniator."  Mr.  Ottley  most  justly  states,^  "  that  it  is  impos- 
sible to  speak  in  too  high  terms  of  the  beauty  of  his  borders,  wherein  he  often  in- 
troduces compartments  with  small  figures,  representing  subjects  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment, which  are  touched  with  infinite  delicacy  and  spirit."  His  drawing,  which  is 
of  a  decidedly  Michael-Angelesque  character,  is  of  less  merit  when  the  nude  is  re- 
presented on  a  larger  scale.  His  harmony  of  colour  is  extraordinary,  rather  lower 
in  tone  than  Giuho  Clovio's,  but  equally  glowing,  and  more  powerful.  Some  beau- 
tiful specimens  of  his  handicraft  remain  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  T.  M.  Whitehead. 
The  late  Mr.  Rogers  possessed  many  fragments,  the  most  precious  of  which  have 
found  their  way  into  the  National  Collection.  His  work  is*  usually  dated,  and  the 
dates  appear  to  range  from  1558  to  1572.  Apollonius  having  been  official  illumi- 
nator to  the  very  institution  from  which  Celotti  derived  his  richest  spoils,  it  may 
readily  be  imagined  that  his  collection  included  an  unprecedented  series  of  beau- 
tiful examples  of  Buonfratelli'a  style. 

Long  after  the  invention  of  printing,  the  Apostolic  Chamber  retained  its  official 
illuminators ;  and  among  them  one  of  the  most  noteworthy  is  unquestionably  the 
artist  who  signs  his  works,  "Ant.  Maria  Antonotius  Auximas  " — a  native  of  Osimo, 
and  a  protege  of  the  princely  house  of  the  Barberini  and  its  magnificent  head. 
Urban  VIH.  (1623 — 1644).  He  was  a  pupil  of  Pietro  da  Cortona,  and  an  artist 
of  great  skill  and  refinement.' 

For  still  more  recent  popes  artists  of  great  excellence  continued  to  be  employed, 
including  for  Alexander  VH.  the  celebrated  Magdalena  Corvina,  who  worked  from 
1655  to  1657  ;  and  for  Innocent  XI.  (1676  to  1689)  a  German,  who  signs  his  pro- 
ductions "  Joann,  frid-Heribach."  As  the  popes  retained  their  illuminators  for  the 
decoration  of  precious  documents,  so  did  the  doges  of  Venice ;  and  probably  the 
most  magnificent  of  all  illumination,  executed  after  the  general  spread  of  printed 
books  had  checked,  although  not  extinguished  the  art,  may  be  found  in  the  precious 
"  Ducales,"  wrought  indeed  by  several  of  the  greatest  Venetian  painters.' 

I  need  scarcely  remind  the  reader,  that  the  earliest  woodcut  and  printed  books 

what  Germans  may  hereafter  call  a  **standpunkt"  in  the  history  of  that  art,  of  which  this  volume 
presents  no  unfavourable  sample.  ^  Grenville  Collection. 

*  In  his  catalogue  of  the  sale  of  the  Celotti  collection. 

^  The  Kensington  Museum  possesses  the  beautiful  original  by  this  artist,  formerly  in  Mr.  Ottley's 
collection,  from  a  portion  of  which  Plate  XI.  in  Mr.  Shaw's  ** Illuminated  Ornaments"  has  been 
engraved. 

^  Mr.  Whitehead's  small  but  choice  collection  of  specimens  includes  one  quite  worthy  of  the 
hand  of  Tintoretto. 


THE  ART  01^  ILLUMINATING,  43 

were  made  to  imitate  manuscripts  so  closely  as  to  deceive  the  inexperienced  eye. 
"  Artes  moriendi,"  "  Specula,"  "  Biblise  Pauperum,"  and  ''  Donatuses," — the  prin- 
cipal types  of  block  books/ — represent  illuminated  manuscripts  in  popular  demand 
at  the  date  of  the  introduction  into  Europe  of  Xylographic  Art.     Spaces  were 
frequently  left,  both  in  the  block  books  and  in  the  earliest  books  printed  "svith 
movable  type,  for  the  illumination,  by  hand,  of  initial  letters,  so  as  to  carry  the 
illusion  as  far  as  possible.     This  practice  was  abandoned  as  soon  as  the  learned 
discovered  the  means  by  which  such  wonderfully  cheap  apparent  transcripts  of 
voluminous  works  could  be  brought  into  the  market ;  and  the  old  decorated  initial 
and  ornamental  letters  were  reproduced  from  type  and  wood  blocks.     The  Mainz 
Psalter  of  1457,  and  other  books  printed  by  Fust  and  Schoeffer,  required  only  the 
addition  of  a  little  colour,  here  and  there,  to  delude  any  inexperienced  eye  into 
the  belief  that  they  were  really  hand-worked  throughout.     In  Pis.  89  and  90,  i6th 
Century,  some  pretty  specimens  are  given  from  a  Bible  printed   at  Wittenberg  in 
1584,  and  in  PL  92  of  the  same  century,  from  a  Bible  printed  at  Frankfurt  am 
Mayn  in  1560.    Such  imitations  were  but  poor  substitutes  for  the  originals  in  point  { 
of  beauty,  however  excellent  when  regarded  from  a  utilitarian  point  of  view.    Every    '; 
country  has  more  or  less  cause  to  mourn  the  senseless  destruction  of  many  noble    / 
old  volumes  which  the  printing-press  never  has,  and  now,  alas  !  never  can  replace ; 
but  none  more  than  England,  in  which  cupidity  and  intolerance  destroyed  reck- 
lessly and  ignorantly.     Thus,  after  the  dissolution  of  monastic  establishments,  per- 
sons were  appointed  to  search  out  all  missals,  books  of  legends,  and  such  "  super- 
stitious books,"  and  to  destroy  or  sell  them  for  waste  paper ;  reserving  only  their 
bindings,  when,  as  was  frequently  the  case,  they  were  'ornamented  with  massive 
gold  and  silver,  curiously  chased,  and  often  further  enriched  with  precious  stones ; 
and  so  industriously  had  these  men  done  their  work,  destroying  all  books  in  which 
they  considered  popish  tendencies  to  be  shown  by  the  illumination,  the  use  of  red  \ 
letters,  or  of  the  Cross,  or  even  by  the — to  them — mysterious  diagrams  of  mathe- 
matical works, — that  when,  some  years  after,  Leland  was  appointed  to  examine  the 
monastic  libraries,  with  a  view  to  the  preservation  of  what  was  valuable  in  them, 
he  found  that  those  who  had  preceded  him  had  left  little  to  reward  his  search. 
Bale,  himself  an  advocate  for  the  dissolution  of  monasteries,  says  :  "Never  had  we 
bene  offended  for  the  losse  of  our  lybraryes  beyng  so  many  in  nombre  and  in  so 
desolate  places  for  the  moste  parte,  yf  the  chief  monuments  and  moste  notable 
workes  of  our  excellent  wryters  had  bene  reserved,  yf  there  had  bene  in  every  shyre 
of  Englande  but  "one  solemyne  lybrary  to  the  preservacyon  of  those  noble  workes, 
and  preferrements  of  good  learnynges  in  our  posteryte  it  had  bene  yet  somewhat. 
But  to  destroye  all  without  consyderacyon  is  and  wyll  be  unto  Englande  for  ever 
a  most  horryble  infamy  amonge  the  grave  senyours  of  other  nations.     A  grete  j 
nombre  of  them  wych  purchased  of  those  superstycyose  mansyons  reserved  of  those  " 
lybrarye  bokes,  some  to  serve  their  jaks,  some  to  secure  theyr  candelstyckes,  and 

'Mr.  S.  Leigh  Sotheby,  in  his  admirable  **  Principia  typographica, "  Dr.  Dibdin  in  his 
**  Bibliotheca  Spenceriana,"  and  the  Baron  de  Heinecken  in  his  "Idee  generale  d'une  Collection 
complete  d'Estampes,  &c.,"  give  the  best  literary  and  graphic  ilustrations  of  the  block  books  of  the 
Middle  Ages. 


44  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

some  to  riibbe  theyr  bootes ;  some  they  solde  to  the  gvossers  and  sope  sellers,  and 
some  they  sent  over  see  to  the  bokebynders,  not  in  small  nombre  but  at  tymes 
whole  shippes  ful.  I  know  a  merchant  man,  whyche  shall  at  thys  tyme  be  name- 
lesse,  that  boughte  the  contents  of  two  noble  lybraryes  for  xl  shyllyngs  pryce,  a 
shame  it  is  to  be  spoken.  Thys  stuffe  hathe  he  occupyed  in  the  stide  of  greye 
paper  for  the  space  of  more  than  these  ten  years,  and  yet  hathe  store  ynough  for  as 
manye  years  to  come,  A  prodyguose  example  is  thys,  and  to  be  abhorred  of  all 
men  who  love  theyr  natyon  as  they  shoulde  do."  Wherever  the  Reformation  ex- 
tended throughout  Europe,  a  corresponding  destruction  of  ancient  illuminated 
manuscripts  took  place,  and  in  localities  where  fanaticism  failed  to  do  its  work  of 
devastation,  indifference  proved  a  consuming  agent  of  almost  equal  energy ;  and 
indeed  there  is  no  more  forcible  illustration  of  the  untiring  zeal  and  industry  of  the 
illuminators  of  old,  than  the  fact,  that,  after  all  that  has  been  done  to  stamp  out 
the  sparks  still  lingering  in  their  embers,  their  works  should  still  glow  with  such 
shining  lights  in  all  the  great  public  libraries  of  Europe. 
I  now  turn  to  the  second  portion  of  my  theme. 


PART    II. 

WHAT   THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING  SHOULD  BE  IN 
THE   PRESENT  DA  Y, 

ILLUMINATION,  in  whatever  form  practised,  can  never  be  properly  regarded 
as  any  other  than  one  of  the  genera  into  which  the  art  of  Poly-chromatic 
decoration  may  be  subdivided.  What  was  originally  termed  illumination,  was 
simply  the  application  of  minium  or  red  lead,  as  a  colour  or  ink,  to  decorate,  or 
draw  marked  attention  to,  any  particular  portion  of  a  piece  of  writing,  the  general 
text  of  which  was  in  black  ink.  The  term  was  retained  long  after  the  original  red 
lead  was  almost  entirely  superseded  by  the  more  brilliant  cinnabar,  or  vermilion. 
As  ornaments  of  all  kinds  were  gradually  superadded  to  the  primitive  distinctions, 
marked  in  manuscripts  by  the  use  of  different-coloured  inks,  the  term  acquired 
a  wider  significance,  and,  from  classical  times  to  the  present,  has  always  been 
regarded  as  including  the  practice  of  every  description  of  ornamental  or  orna- 
mented writing. 

Because  such  embellishments  were,  during  the  early  and  Middle  Ages,  and,  in 
fact,  until  long  after  the  invention  of  printing,  almost  invariably  executed  on 
vellum,  there  is  no  reason  whatever  why  illumination  should  be  applied  to  that 
material,  or  to  paper,  which  has  taken  its  place,  only ;  wood,  metal,  slate,  stone, 
canvas,  plaster,  all  may  be  made  to  receive  it.  Again  :  because  ancient  illumina- 
tion was  almost  entirely  executed  in  colours,  in  the  use  of  which  water  and  some 
glutinous  medium  were  the  only  "vehicles,"  there  is  no  reason  why  modern 
illumination  should  not  be  worked  in  oil,  turpentine,  encaustic,  fresco,  tempera, 
varnish,  and  by  every  process  in  which  decorative  painting  is  ever  wrought  in  these 
days.  It  is  in  such  an  extension  that  the  most  valuable  functions  of  the  Art  are 
likely  to  consist  in  all  time  to  come.  That  utilitarian  application  which  it,  originally 
and  for  so  many  centuries,  found  in  the  production  of  beautiful  books,  copies  of 
which  could  be  elaborated  by  no  other  means  than  hand  labour,  has  been,  to  a 
great  extent,  superseded  by  chromolithography  and  chromotypy.  No  doubt  a 
wide  field  for  useful,  and  even  productive  labour,  is  still  left  to  the  practical 
illuminator  on  paper  and  vellum,  in  designing  and  preparing  exquisite  originals  for 
reproduction  by  those  processes,  as  well  as  in  the  rich  and  tasteful  blazoning  of 
pedigrees,  addresses,  family  records  and  memorials,  and  in  the  illustration  for 


46  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

presentation,  or  for  private  libraries,  of  transcripts  from  favourite  authors  ;  but,  at 
the  same  time,  an  equally  elegant  and  useful  application  of  the  Art  would  be  to 
enrich  ceilings,  walls,  cornices,  string-courses,  panels,  labels  round  doors  and 
windows,  friezes,  bands,  chimney-pieces,  and  stained  and  painted  furniture  in 
churches,  school-rooms,  dwellings,  and  public  buildings  of  all  kinds,  with  beautiful 
and  appropriate  inscriptions,  of  graceful  form  and  harmonious  colouring.  Such 
illumination  would  form  not  only  an  agreeable  but  an  eminently  useful  decoration. 
How  many  texts  and  sentences,  worthy,  in  every  sense,  of  being  "  ™tten  in  letters 
of  gold,"  might  not  be  thus  brought  prominently  under  the  eyes  of  youth,  man- 
hood, and  old  age,  for  hope,  admonition,  and  comfort  !  No  more  skill,  energy, 
and  taste  are  requisite  for  the  production  of  this  class  of  illumination  than  are 
essential  for  satisfactory  work  upon  vellum  and  paper ;  and  while  in  the  one  case 
the  result  of  the  labour  may  be  made  an  incessant  enjoyment  for  many,  in  the 
other,  it  is  seldom  more  than  a  nine-days'  wonder,  shut  up  in  a  book  or  portfolio, 
and  seen  so  seldom  as  scarcely  to  repay  the  amateur  for  the  expense  and  trouble 
involved  in  its  execution. 

In  the  few  remarks  I  am  about  to  offer  in  respect  to  what  the  Art  of  Illumina- 
tion really  should  be  now,  I  propose  to  treat  briefly,  but  specifically,  of  its  appli- 
cation to  each  of  the  diiferent  substances  on  which  it  may  be  most  satisfactorily 
worked ;  in  the  following  series  :  vellum,  paper,  tracing-paper,  canvas,  plaster, 
stone,  metal,  wood.  Dealing  with  design  only  in  this  section  of  my  essay,  I 
propose,  in  the  following  and  concluding  one,  to  adhere  to  the  same  order  in 
noticing  the  best  processes  by  which  amateurs  may  carry  out  the  class  of  work  I 
would  recommend  to  their  notice. 

To  commence,  therefore,  with  vellum  :  it  is  obvious  that  good  copies  of  ancient 
illuminated  manuscripts  can  be  made  on  this  material  only,  for  there  is  a  charm 
about  the  colour  and  texture  of  well-prepared  calf-skin,  which  no  paper  can  be 
made  to  possess.  For  the  same  reason,  and  on  account  of  its  extraordinary 
toughness  and  durability,  it  is  especially  suitable  for  pedigrees,  addresses,  and  other 
documents  which  it  may  be  considered  desirable  to  preserve  for  future  generations. 
To  transcribe  on  vellum  and  decorate  the  writings  of  ancient  and  modern  authors 
So  as  to  form  unique  volumes,  appears  to  me — nowadays,  when  God  gives  to  every 
man  and  woman  so  much  good  hard  work  to  do,  if  they  will  but  do  it — little  else 
than  a  waste  of  human  life.  In  days  when  few  could  read,  and  pictures  drawn  by 
hand  were  the  only  means  within  the  reach  of  the  priesthood  of  bringing  home  to 
the  minds  of  the  ignorant  populace  the  realities  of  Biblical  history,  and  of 
stimulating  the  eye  of  faith  by  exhibiting  to  the  material  eye  pictures  of  those 
sufferings  and  triumphs  of  saints  and  martyrs,  on  which  the  Church  of  Rome 
during  the  Middle  Ages  mainly  based  its  assertions  of  supremacy,  it  was  all  very 
well  to  spend  long  lives  of  celibacy  and  monastic  seclusion  in  such  labours ;  but 
the  same  justification  can  never  be  pleaded  again.  I  am  quite  ready  to  admit  that 
the  exceptional  manufacture  of  these  pretty  picture-books  may  be  not  only  agree- 
able, but  even  useful ;  it  is  the  abuse,  and  not  the  occasional  resort  to  the  practice, 
I  would  venture  to  denounce.  For  instance,  a  mother  could  scarcely  do  a  thing 
more  likely  to  benefit  her  children,  and  to  fix  the  lessons  of  love  or  piety  she 


7'HE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  47 

would  desire  to  implant  in  their  memories,  than  to  ilkiminate  for  them  little 
volumes,  which,  from  their  beauty  or  value,  they  might  be  inclined  to  treasure 
through  life.  Interesting  her  children  in  her  work  as  it  grew  under  her  hand,  how 
many  precious  associations  in  after-life  might  hang  about  these  very  books.  Again  : 
for  young  people,  the  mere  act  of  transcription,  independent  of  the  amount  of 
thought  bestowed  upon  good  words  and  pure  thoughts,  and  the  selection  of  orna- 
ment to  appropriately  illustrate  them,  would  tend  to  an  identification  of  the 
individual  with  the  best  and  highest  class  of  sentiments. 

All  that  has  been  said  with  respect  to  illumination  on  vellum,  applies  with  equal 
force  to  illumination  on  paper.  There  has  to  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  the 
essential  difference  that  exists  between  the  relative  durability  of  the  two  substances. 
Elaboration  is  decidedly  a  great  element  of  beauty  in  illumination ;  and  neatly- 
wrought  elaboration  cannot  be  executed  without  care,  patience,  and  a  considerable 
sacrifice  of  time  :  why,  therefore,  bestow  that  care,  patience,  and  time  upon  a  less 
permanent  material,  when  one  only  a  trifle  more  costly,  but  infinitely  more  lasting, 
is  as  easily  procured  %  Work  on  paper,  therefore,  only  as  you  would  write  exercises 
or  do  sums  upon  a  slate ;  learn  and  practise  upon  paper,  but  reserve  all  more 
serious  efforts  for  vellum  only.  No  effect  can  be  got  upon  the  former  material, 
which  cannot,  with  a  little  more  dexterity,  be  attained  upon  the  latter. 

As  none  of  the  other  substances  mentioned  as  those  on  which  illumination  may 
be  executed,  are  available  for  making  up  into  books,  before  proceeding  to  a  con- 
sideration of  the  special  conditions  under  which  the  Art  may  be  applied  to  them,  I 
beg  to  offer  the  following  recommendations  with  respect  to  design,  as  suitable  for 
book-illustration  generally.^ 

Firstly  : — Take  care  that  your  text  be  perfectly  legible  ;  for,  however  cramped 
and  confused  the  contents  of  many  of  those  volumes  we  most  admire  may  now 
appear,  it  is  to  be  remembered  that  they  were  all  written  in  the  handwriting  most 
easily  read  by  the  students  of  the  periods  in  which  they  were  written.  The  old 
scribes  never  committed  the  solecism  of  which  we  are  too  often  guilty,  of  bestow- 

*  Our  good  fortune  in  possessing  at  the  present  time,  and  in  common  use,  a  remarkably  dear 
and  easily  intelligible  set  of  alphabets,  was  thus  admirably  noted  in  an  article  in  the  Times  news- 
paper of  December  28th,  1859  : — 

•'Happily  for  us,  the  written  symbols  employed  by  the  Romans,  which  are  now  the  chief 
medium  of  expression  for  all  the  languages  of  Europe,  America,  Australia,  and  the  greater  part  of 
civilized  Africa,  reflect  exactly  the  rough  and  stalwart  energy  which  made  Rome  to  Europe  what  we 
are  to  the  world.  They  have  bestowed  on  us  an  alphabet  as  practically  efifective,  and  as  suited  to 
the  capabilities  of  human  vision,  as  any  that  could  have  been  devised.  This  alphabet  of  ours  is  like 
an  Englishman's  dress— plain  and  manageable  j  not  very  artistically  arranged,  it  may  be,  nor 
remarkable  for  copiousness  or  flow  of  outline,  but  sufficiently  elastic  and  capable  of  extension.  Its 
symbols  have  certainly  no  graceful  curves  like  the  picturesque  Tersian ;  but,  better  than  all  flourishes, 
each  letter  has  plain,  unmistakable  features  of  its  own.  The  vowels,  which  are  to  the  rest  of  the 
alphabet  what  the  breath,  or  rather  life  itself,  is  to  the  body,  are  assigned  their  legitimate  position, 
and  are  formed  to  be  written  continuously  with  the  consonants.  Lastly,  though  scanty  in  itself,  it 
is  abundantly  equipped  with  capital  letters,  stops,  italics,  and  every  appliance  for  securing  rapid 
legibility,  so  that  the  eye  can  take  in  the  subject  of  a  page  at  a  glance.  Oriental  alphabets  are  the 
very  reverse  of  all  this.  They  are  complex,  cumbersome,  unmanageable."  Much  the  same  might 
have  been  said  of  many  of  the  medieval  ones. 


48  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATIXG. 

ing  infinite  pains  on  writing  that  which,  when  written,  not  one  in  a  hundred  could, 
or  can,  decipher. 

Secondly  :  —Fix  the  scale  of  your  writing  and  ornament  with  reference  to  the 
size  of  your  page,  and  adhere  to  it  throughout  the  volume.  This  rule,  which  was 
rigidly  observed  in  all  the  best  periods  of  the  Art,  is  incessantly  disregarded  in  the 
present  day ;  and  to  such  an  extent,  that  not  only  does  scale  frequently  differ,  as 
we  turn  page  after  page,  but  the  same  page  will  frequently  exhibit  scroll-work, 
derived  from  some  great  choral  folio,  intervvreathed  with  leafage  borrowed  from 
some  pocket  missal  or  book  of  hours. 

Thirdly  : — If  you  adopt  any  historical  style  or  particular  period  as  a  basis  on 
which  your  text,  miniatures,  and  ornamentation  are  to  be  constructed,  maintain  its 
leading  features  consistently,  so  as  to  avoid  letting  your  work  appear  as  though  it 
had  been  begun  in  the  loth  century,  and  only  completed  in  the  i6th ;  or,  as  I  have 
once  or  twice  seen,  vice  versa.  For  however  erratic  changes  of  style  may  appear 
to  be  in  Art,  as  they  run  one  another  down  along  the  course  of  time,  it  will  be 
invariably  found  that  there  exists  a  harmony  between  all  contemporary  features, 
which  cannot  be  successfully  disregarded  ;  and  this  it  is  which  has  ever  rendered 
eclecticism  in  art  a  problem, — not  impossible,  perhaps,  to  solve,  but  one  which,  as 
yet  at  least,  has  never  met  with  a  satisfactory  practical  solution. 

Fourthly : — Sustain  your  energies  evenly  throughout  your  volume  ;  for,  re- 
member, your  critics  will  estimate  your  powers,  not  by  your  best  page,  but  by  a 
mean  struck  between  your  best  and  your  worst.  Book  illumination  is  generally 
looked  upon  as  microscopic  work,  demanding  the  greatest  exactitude  \  and  what- 
ever merits  any  page  may  display,  they  will  go  for  little,  if  that  page  is  disfigured 
by  a  crooked  line,  or  a  single  leaf  insufficiently  or  incorrectly  shadowed  :  and  the 
greater  the  merit,  the  more  notable  the  drawback. 

Fifthly  : — Rigidly  avoid  contrasting  natural  with  conventional  foliage.  Adopt 
which  you  like,  for  by  either  beautiful  effects  may  be  produced ;  but  mix  them, 
and  the  charm  of  both  is  gone.  Natural  foliage  may  be  successfully  combined 
with  any  other  varieties  of  conventional  ornaments,  excepting  those  based  upon 
natural  foliage. 

Sixthly : — Take  care  that  some  at  least  of  your  dominant  lines  and  borders  are 
kept  parallel  to  the  rectangular  sides  of  your  pages ;  for  unless  your  flowing  and 
wayAvard  ornaments  are  corrected  by  this  soberer  contrast,  they  will,  however 
beautiful  in  themselves,  have  a  straggling  and  untidy  appearance  in  the  volume. 
Where  the  lines  of  the  text  are  strongly  marked,  as  in  black  ink  on  a  white  ground, 
and  the  page  is  so  far  filled  with  text  as  to  leave  but  little  space  for  ornament,  this 
rule  may  be,  to  a  great  extent,  disregarded,  for  the  lines  of  the  text  will  themselves 
supply  the  requisite  contrast  to  the  flowing  forms ;  but  where  the  page  is  nearly 
filled  with  ornament,  or  when  the  text  is  faint  only,  as  in  gold  lettering  on  a  white 
ground,  it  becomes  imperative. 

Seventhly  : — Be  decided,  but  temperate,  in  your  contrasts  of  colour.  It  would 
obviously  exceed  the  limits  of  these  notes  to  attempt  in  them  to  enter  upon  the 
principles  of  the  "harmony  of  colour ;"  they  must  be  studied  from  treatises  speci- 
ally devoted  to  the  subject.     Such  study  must,  however,  be  accompanied  by  con- 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  49 

stant  experiment  and  practice ;  for  it  would  be  as  foolish  to  expect  a  man  to  be  a 
good  performer  upon  any  instrument,  because  he  had  learnt  the  theory  of  music, 
as  it  would  be  to  suppose  that  he  must  necessarily  paint  in  harmonious  colouring, 
because  he  had  studied  the  theory  of  balance  in  combination.  To  the  experienced 
eye  and  hand,  functions  become  intuitive,  which,  to  the  mere  theorist,  however  pro- 
found, are  toil  and  weariness  of  spirit. 

Such  are  a  few  of  the  rules,  by  attention  to  which,  the  illuminators  of  old 
achieved  some  of  their  happiest  effects,  and  which  can  never  be  safely  disregarded 
by  those  who  would  emulate  their  efforts. 

In  taking  up  the  class  of  substances  on  which  illumination,  as  applied  to  general 
decoration,  may  be  best  executed,  we  meet,  firstly,  with  one  occupying  a  somewhat 
intermediate  position,  viz.,  tracing-paper.  I  term  its  position  intermediate,  be- 
cause it  may  be  v/rought  upon  in  either  oil  or  water-colour  -,  and  because,  when  so 
wrought  upon,  it  may  be  either  mounted  on  paper  or  card,  and  so  made  to  contri- 
bute to  book  or  picture  enrichment ;  or  attached  to  walls  or  other  surfaces,  brought 
forward  in  oil-colours,  and  be  so  enlisted  in  a  general  system  of  mural  illumination. 
How  this  may  best  be  done  technically  will  be  hereafter  described  ;  here  I  may 
notice  only  the  use  which  may  be  made  of  this  convenient  material,  by  many  not 
sufficiently  advanced  in  design  or  drawing,  to  be  able  to  invent  or  even  copy  cor- 
rectly by  free-hand,  and  yet  desirous  of  embellishing  some  particular  surface  with 
decorative  illumination.  For  instance,  let  it  be  desired  to  fill  a  panel  of  any  given 
dimension  with  an  illuminated  inscription.  Take  a  sheet  of  tracing-paper  the  exact 
size,  double  it  up  in  both  directions,  and  the  creases  will  give  the  vertical  and  hori- 
zontal guide-lines  for  keeping  the  writing  square  and  even  :  then  set  out  the  num- 
ber of  lines  and  spaces  requisite  for  the  inscription,  fixing  upon  certain  initial  letters 
or  alphabets  for  reproduction,  from  this  work,  or  any  other  of  a  similar  kind,  and 
making  the  height  of  the  lines  correspond  therewith.  Then  lay  the  tracing  over, 
and  trace  with  pen,  pencil,  or  brush,  each  letter  in  succession,  taking  care  to  get 
each  letter  into  its  proper  place,  in  reference  to  the  whole  panel,  to  the  letter  last 
traced,  and  to  the  other  letters  remaining  to  be  traced.  When  this  is  completed, . 
trace  on  whatever  ornaments  may  best  fill  up  the  open  spaces  and  harmonize  with 
the  style  of  lettering.  When  the  tracing  is  completed,  with  a  steady  hand  pick  in 
all  the  ground-tint,  keeping  it  as  even  as  possible ;  and  heighten  the  letters  or  orna- 
ments in  any  way  that  may  be  requisite  to  make  them  correspond  with  the  models 
from  which  they  may  have  been  taken.  By  adopting  this  method  of  working,  with 
care  and  neatness  of  hand,  very  agreeable  results  may  be  obtained,  without  its  being 
indispensable  for  the  illuminator  to  be  a  skilful  draughtsman.  The  tracing-paper 
may  be  ultimately  attached  to  its  proper  place,  and  finished  off,  as  will  be  hereafter 
recommended  ;  and,  if  cleverly  managed,  it  will  be  impossible  to  detect  that  that 
material  has  ever  been  employed. 

The  special  convenience  of  illuminating  upon  canvas  is,  that  instead  of  the 
operator  having  to  work  either  from  a  ladder  or  scaffold,  or  on  a  vertical  or  hori- 
zontal surface,  he  may  do  all  that  is  necessary  at  an  easel  or  on  a  table  on  terra 
firma.  His  work  when  completed  may  be  cut  out  of  the  sheet  of  canvas  on  which 
it  has  been  painted,  and  may  be  fastened  to  the  wall,  ceiling,  or  piece  of  furniture 


so  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

for  the  decoration  of  which  it  may  have  been  intended.  All  that  is  essential,  with 
respect  to  the  designs  which  may  be  wrought  upon  it,  is,  to  take  care  that  they 
are  fitted  for  the  situations  they  may  be  ultimately  intended  to  occupy.  Thus  it 
must  be  obvious  that  it  would  be  an  entire  waste  of  time  to  elaborate  designs  des- 
tined to  be  fixed  many  yards  from  the  eye,  as  minutely  as  those  which  would  be  in 
immediate  proximity  to  it.  No  branch  of  designing  illuminated  or  other  ornament 
requires  greater  experience  to  succeed  in  than  the  adjustment  of  the  size  of  parts 
and  patterns  to  the  precise  conditions  of  light,  distance,  foreshortening,  &c.,  under 
which  they  are  most  likely  to  be  viewed. 

Illumination  on  plaster  may  be  executed  either  in  distemper,  if  the  walls  or 
Ceiling  have  been  coloured  only,  or  in  oil,  if  they  have  been  brought  forward  in  oil- 
colours.  The  former  is  the  most  rapid,  but  least  durable  process.  Hence  decora- 
tion is  usually  applied  in  oil  to  walls  which  are  liable  to  be  rubbed  and  brushed 
against,  and  in  distemper  to  ceilings,  which  are,  comparatively  speaking,  out  of 
harm's  way.  Very  pretty  decorations  on  plaster  may  be  executed  by  combining 
haftd-worked  illumination  with  diapered  or  other  paper-hangings.  Thus,  for  in- 
stance, taking  one  side  of  a  room,  say  about  eleven  feet  high,  to  the  under-side  of 
the  plaster  cornice,  niark  off  about  a  foot  in  depth  on  the  wall  from  the  bottom  of 
the  cornice,  set  out  the  width  of  the  wall  into  three  or  more  panels,  dividing  the 
panels  by  upright  pilasters  of  the  same  width  as  the  depth  of  the  top  border.  At 
the  height  of  about  four  feet  from  the  ground  mark  off  the  top  edge  of  another 
horizontal  band,  which  make  also  one  foot  deep  ;  continue  on  the  lines  of  the  pilas- 
ters to  within  six  inches  of  the  top  of  the  skirting,  and  draw  in  a  horizontal  border, 
six  inches  high,  running  all  round  uj:)on  the  top  edge  of  the  skirting ;  then  paint,  in 
a  plain  colour,  a  margin,  three  or  four  inches  wide,  all  round  the  panels  formed  by 
the  bands  and  pilasters,  and  let  the  paperhanger  fill  in  the  panels  with  any  pretty 
diapered  paper  which  may  agree  with  the  style  and  colour  in  which  you  may  desire 
to  work  your  illumination.  The  side  of  your  room  will  then  present  two  horizontal 
lines — one  next  the  cornice,  and  one  at  about  dado-height,  suitable  for  the  recep- 
tion of  illuminated  inscriptions.  In  setting  these  out,  care  must  be  taken  to  bring 
a  capital  letter  into  a  line  with  the  centre  of  each  pilaster,  so  that  a  foliated  orna- 
ment, descending  from  the  upper  inscription,  and  ascending  from  the  lower  one, 
may  meet  and  intertwine  on  the  pilasters,  forming  panelled  compartments  for  the 
introduction  of  subjects,  if  thought  desirable.^ 

It  is  by  no  means  necessary  for  the  sides  of  these  pilasters,  or  the  bounding 
lines  of  the  bands  containing  inscriptions,  to  be  kept  straight ;  they  may  be  varied 
at  pleasure,  so  long  as  they  are  kept  symmetrical  in  corresponding  parts,  and  uni- 
formly filled  up  with  foliation  emanating  from,  or  connected  with,  the  illuminated 
letters.  Agreeable  results  may  be  produced  by  variations  of  such  arrangements 
as  the  one  suggested.  Frequently  round  doors,  windows,  fireplaces,  &c.,  inscrip- 
tions may  be  executed  with  very  good  effect,  either  on  label-scrolls  or  simple  bor- 
ders, and  with  greater  or  less  briUiancy  of  colour,  according  to  the  circumstances 
of  the  case.  Often  simplicity  and  quiet  have  greater  charms  than  glitter  or  brib 
liancy ;  thus  black  and  red,  on  a  light-coloured  ground,  the  most  primitive  combina- 
•  For  excellent  examples,  see  Pis.  40  and  41,  13th  Century;  and  15th  Century,  PI.  81. 


THE  AR7'  OF  ILLUMINATING.  51 

tion  in  the  history  of  writing,  is  ahvays  sure  to  produce  an  agreeable  impression  : 
blue,  crimson,  or  marone  on  gold,  or  vice  versa,  are  no  less  safe  :  black,  white,  and 
gold,  counterchanged,  can  hardly  go  wrong.  But  it  is  scarcely  necessary  to  dwell 
upon  these  details,  as  the  plates  in  this  volume  furnish  admirable  tests  by  which  the 
student  may  at  once  recognize  the  effects  produced  by  almost  any  combination  of 
form  and  colour  he  may  feel  desirous  to  introduce. 

Few  amateurs  will  be  likely  to  attempt  illuminations  upon  plaster  ceilings, 
owing  to  the  great  difficulty  they  will  experience  in  working  overhead  with  a  steady 
hand.  They  will  generally  do  wisely — to  execute  the  principal  portions  on  paper, 
tracing-paper,  or  canvas — to  fasten  them  up,  as  will  be  hereafter  directed,— and  to 
confine  the  decoration  actually  painted  on  the  ceiling,  to  a  few  panels,  lines,  or 
plain  bands  of  colour,  which  may  be  readily  executed  by  any  clever  house-painter 
or  grainer,  even  if  altogether  ignorant  of  drawing  and  the  art  of  design.  The  most 
beautiful  illuminated  ceiling  of  mediaeval  times,  I  believe  to  be  that  of  the  cele- 
brated Jacques  Coeur's  house,  at  Bourges,  in  France.  It  is  vaulted,  and  each  com- 
partment contains  inscribed  labels  held  by  floating  angels.  The  white  draperies  of 
the  angels  are  relieved  on  a  delicate  blue  ground  only,  so  that  the  stronger  contrast 
of  the  black  writing  on  the  white  labels  gives  a  marked  predominance  to  the  in- 
scriptions ;  which,  being  arranged  symmetrically,  produce  in  combination  agreeable 
geometrical  figures. 

Most  of  the  preceding  remarks  apply  equally  to  stone ;  but  in  reference  to  that 
material,  there  is  one  point  to  specially  enforce, — namely,  the  advisability  of  not 
covering  the  whole  of  the  surface  with  paint.  There  is  about  all  stone  a  peculiar 
granulation,  and  in  many  varieties  a  slight  silicious  sparkle,  which  it  is  always 
well  to  preserve  as  far  as  possible.  Illuminate,  by  all  means,  inscriptions,  panels, 
friezes,  &c.,  colour  occasionally  the  hollows  of  mouldings,  and  gild  salient  members 
sufficiently  to  carry  the  colour  about  the  monument,  whether  it  may  be  a  font,  a 
pulpit,  a  tomb,  a  reredos,  a  staircase,  a  screen,  or  a  doorway,  and  prevent  the 
highly-illuminated  portion  from  looking  spotty  and  unsupported  ;  but  by  no  means 
apply  paint  all  over.  It  is  not  necessary  to  produce  a  good  effect ;  it  destroys  the 
surface  and  appearance  of  the  stone,  making  it  of  no  more  worth  than  if  it  were 
plaster,  and  it  clogs  up  all  the  fine  arrises  and  angles  of  the  moulded  work  or 
carving.  Wherever  stained  glass  is  inserted  in  stonework,  the  application  of  illumi- 
nation, or  at  any  rate  of  coloured  diaper-work  of  an  analogous  nature,  is  almost  an 
imperative  necessity,  in  order  to  balance  the  appearance  of  chill  and  poverty  given 
to  the  stonework  by  its  contrast  with  the  brilliant  translucent  tints  of  the  painted 
glass.  In  illuminating  stonework,  it  seldom  answers  to  attempt  to  apply  decora- 
tion executed  on  paper  or  canvas ;  it  should  in  all  cases  (excepting  when  it  is  at  a 
great  distance  from  the  eye)  be  done  upon  the  stone  itself.  The  only  exception  is 
the  one  to  which  I  shall  allude  in  speaking  of  metal. 

Slate,  although  from  its  portability  and  non-liability  to  change  its  shape  under 
variations  of  temperature,  a  convenient  material  for  filling  panels,  and  forming 
slabs  for  attachment  to  walls,  is  not  to  be  recommended  to  the  amateur,  owing  to 
the  difficulty  he  will  experience  in  effecting  a  good  and  safe  adhesion  between  his 
pignlents  and  the  surface  of  the  slate.     In  what  is  called  enamelled  slate,  an  exceP 

E  2 


52  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

lent  attachment  is  secured  by  gradually  and  repeatedly  raising  the  slate  to  a  high 
temperature ;  but  the  process  would  be  far  too  troublesome  and  expensive  for  prac- 
tice by  the  great  majority  of  amateurs. 

Metal  in  thin  sheets  is  liable  only  to  the  objection  from  which  slate  is  free, — 
namely,  that  it  is  difficult  to  keep  its  surface  from  undulation  in  changes  of  temper- 
ature. In  all  other  respects,  both  zinc,  copper,  lead,  and  iron,  bind  well  with  any 
oleaginous  vehicle,  and  offer  the  great  convenience  that  they  may  be  cut  out  to  any 
desired  shape,  and  attached  to  any  other  kind  of  material  by  nails,  screws,  or  even 
by  strong  cements,  such  as  marine  glue.  Zinc  is,  perhaps,  the  best  of  all,  as  it  cuts 
more  readily  than  copper  or  iron,  and  keeps  its  shape  better  than  lead  ;  care  should, 
however,  be  always  taken  to  hang  it  from  such  points  as  shall  allow  it  to  freely 
contract  and  expand.  If  this  is  not  attended  to,  its  surface  will  never  remain  flat. 
It  is  a  material  particularly  well  adapted  for  cutting  out  into  labels  to  surmount 
door  and  window  arches,  or  to  fill  the  arcading  of  churches  and  chapels,  and  to  be 
illuminated  with  texts  or  other  inscriptions.  Very  beautiful  effects  may  be  pro- 
duced by  combining  illumination  with  the  polished  brass-work  which  is  now  so 
admirably  manufactured  by  Messrs.  Hardman,  Hart,  and  others.  Care  should, 
however,  be  taken  not  to  overdo  any  objects  of  this  nature.  Let  the  main  lines  of 
construction  always  remain  unpainted,  so  that  there  may  be  no  question  as  to  the 
substance  in  which  the  article  is  made,  and  restrict  the  application  of  coloured 
ornament  or  lettering  to  panels,  and,  generally  speaking,  to  the  least  salient  forms. 
Of  course,  where  it  can  be  afforded,  enamelling  offers  the  most  legitimate  mode  of 
illuminating  metal-work ;  and  ere  long  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  beautiful  series  of 
processes  by  means  of  which  so  much  durable  beauty  of  colour  was  conferred  on 
mediaeval  metal-work  may  be  restored  to  their  proper  position  in  British  Industry, 
and  popularized  as  they  should,  and,  I  believe,  might  readily  be. 

To  woodwork,  illumination  may  be  made  a  most  fitting  embellishment ;  and 
the  apphcation  of  a  very  little  art  will  speedily  be  found  to  raise  the  varnished  deal 
cabinet  or  bookcase  far  above  the  majority  of  our  standard  "  institutions  "  in  the 
way  of  heavy  and  expensive  mahogany  ones,  in  interest  at  least,  if  not  in  money 
value.  Almost  every  article  of  furniture  may  thus  be  made,  as  it  were,  to  speak 
and  sympathize  \  for  the  return  every  decorated  object  makes  to  the  decorator  is 
always  in  direct  proportion  to  the  amount  of  Hfe  and  thought  he  has  put  into  his 
work. 

It  is  a  common  saying  that  "what  comes  from  the  heart  goes  to  the  heart;" 
and  in  nothing  does  it  hold  good  more  than  in  the  production  of  works  of  art  of 
all  kinds,  including  Illumination,  which,  through  its  specially  dealing  with  written 
characters,  has  so  direct  an  access  to  the  intellect  and  affections. 

In  all  appeals  the  decorative  artist  can  make  to  the  brain  through  the  eye,  he 
has  open  to  him  two  distinct  channels  of  communication  in  making  out  the  scheme 
of  his  ornamentation, — the  one  by  employing  conventional  forms, — and  the  other 
by  introducing  representations  of  natural  objects.  In  the  former,  he  usually  eschews 
light,  shade,  and  accidental  effects  altogether ;  and  in  the  latter,  he  aims  at  repro- 
ducing the  aspect  of  the  object  he  depicts  as  nearly  as  possible  as  it  appears  to 
him.     Both  modes  have  found  favour  in  the  eyes  of  the  great  illuminators  of  old. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  53 

and  by  the  best  they  have  been  frequently  and  successfully  blended.^  Under  the 
"conventional"  series  may  be  classed  all  productions  dependent  on  either  an 
Oriental  or  Hiberno-Saxon  origin  ;  among  the  "  natural,"  the  later,  Netherlandish, 
Italian,  and  French  illuminations  may  be  grouped ;  and  in  a  mixed  style,  the 
majority  of  the  best  book-decorations  of  the  medireval  period. 

To  be  enabled  to  recognize  intuitively  how  to  blend  or  contrast,  to  adopt  or 
avoid,  these  different  modes  of  treatment  of  ornament,  is  given  to  but  few,  and  is 
revealed  to  those  few  only,  after  years  of  study  and  of  practice.  Rules  may 
assist,^  but  can  never  suffice  to  communicate  the  power  \  work  of  the  most  arduous 
kind,  and  persistent  observation,  can  alone  bestow  it.  Still,  with  good  models 
upon  which  to  base  his  variations,  and  goodwill,  the  amateur  may  do  much,  and 
will  probably  best  succeed  by  recurring  incessantly  to  Nature,  and  combining  direct 
or  nearly  direct,  imitation  of  Nature  with  geometrical  lines  and  masses  of  colour 
symmetrically  disposed.  To  aid  his  footsteps  in  this  direction,  I  know  no  more 
convenient  councillor  than  Mr.  Llewellyn  Jewitt,  whose  historical  introduction  to 
his  brother's  "  Manual  of  Illuminated  and  Missal  Painting,"  published  by  Mr. 
Barnard,  of  Oxford  Street,  contains  some  just  remarks  upon  the  subject.^ 

•  For  striking  ilhistrations  of  conventional  ornament,  see  PI.  2,  6th  Century ;  Pis.  4  and  5,  7th 
Century;  Pis.  8,  9,  and  10,  8th  Century;  Pis.  14,  15,  16,  17,  18,  and  19,  9th  Century ;  Pis.  21 
and  22,  loth  Century;  Pis.  25,  26,  and  27,  nth  Century;  PI.  30,  12th  Century,  and  succeeding 
numbers,  frequently  following  the  natural  system  of  growth  in  foliation  pretty  closely.  For  the 
mixed  styles,  most  of  the  plates  of  the  13th,  14th,  and  15th  Centuries  may  be  studied;  while  for 
the  uafum/  style,  the  i6th  Century  affords  capital  models  in  Plates  87,  88,  94,  and  95. 

'  The  best  are  contained  in  the  writings  of  De  Quincy,  Owen  Jones,  Winkellman,  Pugin,  and 
Sir  Charles  Eastlake. 

'  A'^  especially  pp.  24  to  28  inclusive,  from  which  I  transcribe  a  few  elegant  and  suggestive  passages. 

**  The  student  should  keep,"  says  Mr.  Jewitt,  *'  both  in  form  and  colour  as  near  to  Nature  as 
possible.  No  fantastic  design  can  be  so  elegant  as  one  copied  and  studied  from  Nature.  What, 
for  instance,  can  be  more  beautiful  or  more  appropriate  for  intertwining  with  rich  scroll-work  than 
the  convolvulus,  the  maurandia,  the  woodbine,  the  tropeolum,  or  the  passion-flower  ?  These, 
painted  upon  a  rich  groundwork  of  diapered  gold,  or  upon  one  of  the  beautiful  grounds  of  the  15th 
century,  composed  of  gold  and  blue  or  green,  in  fine  waved  or  winding  lines,  crossing  each  other  in 
every  conceivable  direction,  form  truly  elegant  studies  for  almost  all  varieties  of  ornamentation. 
Whenever  birds,  insects,  «S:c.,  are  introduced,  they  should,  as  a  general  rule,  be  drawn  true  to 
nature ;  but  they  may,  nevertheless,  be  turned  and  twisted  into  almost  any  position  or  shape.  For 
instance,  a  lizard,  with  its  beautiful  emerald-green  back,  its  yellow  underparts,  and  rich  brown 
mottlings,  might  be  introduced  with  its  long  tail  wrapped  and  twisted  round  the  stem  of  a  plant, 
and  its  little  head,  with  brilliant  eyes,  shown  just  peeping  out  from  under  one  of  the  beautiful 
flowers.  The  lady-bird,  with  its  bright  red  wings,  covered  with  small  black  spots,  might  also  be 
well  introduced,  creeping  upon  a  leaf  or  stem.  Hairy  caterpillars,  ants,  beetles,  snails,  glow-worms, 
and  even  spiders,  form  also  beautiful  additions  to  a  design,  and  may  be  introduced  in  almost  any 
form  or  shape.  Butterflies  and  moths,  in  their  endless  and  beautiful  variety,  with  their  wings  of 
every  conceivable  colour  and  shade,  and  of  the  most  exquisite  forms,  are  truly  amongst  the  most 
beautiful  and  appropriate  objects  which  the  student  can  have  for  his  mind  to  dwell  upon.  But  not 
only  these, — for  occasionally  a  squirrel  might  be  introduced,  perched  upon  the  scroll-work  ;  a  cat, 
a  goat,  a  dog,  a  monkey  peeping  out  from  behind  a  leaf ;  or  indeed  any  animal,  if  artistically  and 
naturally  treated,  may  be  introduced  with  really  good  effect.  Flowers,  fruits,  shells,  corn,  &c.,  all 
add  their  beauties  to  a  design  ;  and,  indeed,  there  is  nothing  in  nature,  no,  not  one  object,  but 
v/hich  may  well  be  introduced  into  ornamental  designing,  ^nd  may  be  so  translated  and  poeticised 
as  to  become  appropriate  to  any  subject." 


54  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

Having  thus  rapidly  touched  upon  the  series  of  materials  upon  which  the  Art 
may  be  brought  to  bear,  and  the  leading  principles  of  design  suitable  under 
different  circumstances,  I  proceed  to  suggest  the  class  of  *'  legends,"  as  the  mediaeval 
decorators  called  them,  likely  to  prove  most  fitting  for  special  situations.  No 
doubt  many  more  apt  and  piquant  may  suggest  themselves  to  some  practical  illu- 
minators than  the  few  I  have  culled  (with  the  assistance  of  one  or  two  kind  friends), 
principally  from  old  English  writers ;  but  to  others,  those  I  now  present  may  not 
be  without,  at  any  rate,  a  convenient  suggestiveness.  Something  similar  to  the 
following  I  would  recommend  for  the  embellishment  of  ceilings,  friezes,  string- 
courses, or  flat  walls  of  the  different  apartments  indicated.  Of  some  I  have  given 
four  lines — one,  say,  for  each  side  of  a  room  ;  of  others  but  a  line,  such  as  might 
go  over  a  door.  Between  the  two  are  many  suitable  for  panels  or  irregular 
situations ;  and  in  one  or  two  cases  passages  of  many  lines  have  been  chosen,  fit 
for  illumination  on  vellum  or  paper,  and  for  framing  to  hang  up  in  the  apartments 
specified,  or  to  be  inserted  in  panels  of  furniture  or  on  screens. 


FOR  DRAWING-ROOMS. 

For  trouble  in  earth  take  no  melancholy; 

Be  rich  in  patience,  if  thou  in  goods  be  poor. 
Who  lives  merry,   he  lives  mightily ; 

Without  gladness  avails  no  treasiire." 


Since  earthly  joy  abideth  never, 
Work  for  the  joy  that  lestis  ever  j 
For  other  joy  is  all  in  vain ; 
All  earthly  joy  returns  in  pain," 


Who  shuts  his  hand  hath  lost  his  gold 
Who  opens  it,  hath  it  twice  told." 


(Wm.  Dunbar.) 


{Idem.] 


(George  Herbert.) 


•*  No  bliss  so  great  but  cometh  to  an   end; 
No  hap  so  hard  but  may  in  time  amend." 

(Robert  Southwell.) 

"Freedom  all  solace  to  man  gives; 
He  lives  at  ease,  that  freely  lives." 

(John  Barbour.) 

*'  That  which  is  not  good,   is  not  delicious 
To  a  well-governed  and  wise  appetite." 

(Milton.) 


FOR  A   STUDIO. 


Order  is  Nature's  beauty,  and  the  way 
To  order  is  by  rules  that  Art  hath  found." 

(GWILLIM.j 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  55 

FOR   A   FAMILY   PORTRAIT-GALLERY   OR  HALL. 

*'  Boast  not  the  titles  of  your  ancestors, 
Brave  youths  :  they're  their  possessions,  none  of  yours. 
When  your  own  virtues  equall'd  have  their  names, 
'Twill  be  but  fair  to  lean  upon  their  fames. 
For  they  are  strong  supporters  ;    but  till  then 
The  greatest  are  but  growing  gentlemen." 

(Ben  Jonson.) 


FOR  BREAKFAST  OR  DINING-ROOMS. 

"A  good  digestion  tumeth  all  to  health." 

(Wordsworth.) 

"  If  anythmg  be  set  to  a  wrong  taste, 
'Tis  not  the  meat  there,  but  the  mouth's  displeased. 
Remove  but  that  sick  palate,   all  is  well." 

(Ben  Jonson.) 

"Nature's  with  little  pleased,   enough's  a  feast; 
A  sober  life  but  a  small  charge  requires; 
But  man,   the  author  of  his  own  unrest, 
The  more  he  has,   the  more  he  still  requires." 

**  To  bread  or  drink,   to  flesh  or  fish, 

Yet  welcome  is  the  best  dish." 

(John  Heywood.) 

"It  is  the  fair  acceptance.   Sir,   creates 
The  entertainment  perfect,  not  the  cates." 

(Ben  Jonson,  Epigrams,  ci.) 

"  No  simple  word 
That  shall  be  utter'd  at  our  mirthful  board, 

Shall  make  us  sad  next  morning." 

{Ibid.) 

"  To  spur  beyond 
Its  wiser  will  the  jaded  appetite, 
Is  this   for  pleasure  ?     Learn  a  juster  taste, 
And  know  that  temperance  is  true  luxury." 

(Armstrong,  Art  of  Preseiving  Health,  book  ii.) 

"  What  an  excellent  thing  did  God  bestow  on  man, 
When  He  did  give  him  a  good  stomach !  " 

(Beaumont  and  Fletcher.) 

"The  stomach   is   the  mainspring  of  our  system.     If  it  be  not  sufficiently  wound  up  to 
warm  the  heart  and  support  the  circulation,   we  can  neither 

Think  with   precision, 
Sleep  with   tranquillity, 
Walk  with   vigour. 
Or  sit   down  with   comfort." 

(Dr.    Kitchener.) 

"Is't  a  time  to  talk 
When  we  should  be  munching  ? " 
(Justice  Greedy,  in  Massinger's  Nav  Way  to  Pay  Old  Debts.) 


56  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

"  The  destiny  of  Nations  has    often  depended  upon  the  digestion  of  a  Prime  Minister." 

(Dr.    Kitchener.) 

"  No  roofs  of  gold  o'er  riotous  tables  shining, 

Whole  days  and  sums  devoured  with  endless  dining." 

(Crashaw's  Religious  House.) 

"  Now  good  digestion  wait  on  appetite, 
And  health  on  both." 

(Shakspere.) 

"  When  you  doubt,   abstain." 

(Zoroaster.  ) 

"  Where  there  is  no  peace,  there  is  no  feast." 

(Clarendon.) 

**  Not  meat,  but  cheefulness,  makes  the  feast." 

''Who  carves,  is  kind  to  two;   who  talks,   to  all." 

(George  Herbert.) 


FOR  KITCHENS. 

A  feast  must  be  without  a  fault ; 
And  if  'tis  not  all  right,  'tis  nought." 

(King's  Art  of  Cookery.) 

Good-nature  will  some  failings  overlook, 
Forgive  mischance,   not  errors  of  the  cook." 

{Ibid.) 


FOR   SUPPER-ROOMS. 
Oppress   not   nature   sinking  down   to   rest 
With  feasts  too  late,   too  solid,  or  too  full." 

(Armstrong,   Art  of  Preserving  Health.) 

**  As  men 
Do  walk  a  mile,   women  should  talk  an  hour 
After  supper  :   'tis  their  exercise." 

(Ben  Jonson,  Philaster,  act  2,  sc.  4.) 


FOR   STILL-ROOMS. 
'*  The  nature  of  flowers  Dame  Physic  doth  show  ; 
She  teaches  them  all  to  be  known  to  a  few." 

(TussER,   Five  Hundred  Points  of  good  Husbandry.) 
'*  The  knowledge  of  stilling  is  one  pretty  feat, 
The  waters  be  wholesome,  the  charges  not  great." 

[Id  ibid.) 


FOR   A   STOREROOM. 

He  that  keeps  nor  crust  nor  crumb, 
W^ary  of  all,  he  shall  want  some." 

(Shakspere.) 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  57 

FOR  MUSIC-ROOMS. 

'*  Music  removeth  care,   sadness  ejects, 
Declineth  anger,  persuades  clemency ; 
Doth  sweeten  mirth,  and  heighten  piety, 
And  is  to  a  body,  often  ill  inclined, 
No  less  a  sovereign  cure  than  to  the  mind." 

(Ben  JOiNsoN.) 

"  Here  will  we  sit,  and  let  the  sounds  of  music 
Creep  in  our  ears." 

(SiiAKSPERE,  Merchant  0/  Vance.) 
"  Play  on   and   give   me   surfeit." 

{3:d.) 


FOR  SMOKING-ROOMS. 

"Tobacco's  a  physician, 

Good  both  for  sound  and  sickly  ; 
'Tis  a  hot  perfume, 
That  expels  cold  rheum, 
And  makes  it  flow  down  quickly." 

(Rarten  Holliday.) 
*''  Tobacco  hie  !   Tobacco  hie  ! 
If  you  are  well,   'twill  make  you  sick  ; 
Tobacco  hie  !   Tobacco  hie  ! 
'Twill  make  you  well,  if  you  are  sick." 


FOR  DRINKING-ROOMS. 

"  Backe  and  syde  goo  bare  goo  bare, 
Bothe  hande  and  fote  goo  colde  ; 
But  belly,  God  sende  the  gode  ale  inoughe, 
Whether  hyt  be  newe  or  olde." 

(Bp.  Still,  in  Gammer  Gurtoii's  Needle.) 
"  The  first  draught  serveth  for  health, 
The  second  for  pleasure. 
The  third  for  shame. 
The  fourth  for  madness." 

"  The  greatness  that  v/ould  make  us  grave 
Is  but  an  empty  thing  ; 
What  more  than  mirth  would  mortals  have  ; 
The  cheerful  man's  a  king." 

(Isaac  Bickerstaff.) 


FOR  PUBLIC  COFFEE-ROOMS, 
<*  Eveiy  creature  was  decreed 

Tq  aid  each  other's  mutual  need." 

(Gay,) 


S8  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

*'  If  you  your  lips  would  keep  from  slips, 
Five  things  observe  with  care : 
Of  whom  you  speak,  to  whom  you  speak, 
And  how,  and  when,  and  where." 


FOR  BILLIARD-ROOMS. 

"  The  love  of  gaming  is  the  worst  of  ills  ; 
With  ceaseless  storms  the  blacken'd  soul  it  fills. 
Inveighs  at  Heaven,  neglects  the  ties  of  blood. 
Destroys  the  power  and  will  of  doing  good ; 
Kills  health,  poisons  honour,  plunges  in  disgrace." 

(Young,  a^h  Satire.) 

"  Play  not  for  gain,  but  sport  :  who  plays  for  more 
Than  he  can  lose  with  pleasure,  stakes  his  heart. 
Perhaps  his  wife  too,  and  whom  she  hath  bore." 

(Geo.  Herbert,    The  Church  Porch. 


FOR  BEDROOMS. 

Rise  with  the  lark,  and  with  the  lark  to  bed  ; 
The  breath  of  night 's  destnictive  to  the  hue 
Of  every  flower  that  blows. 
*  *  *        Oh,  there  is  a  charm 

Which  morning  has,  that  gives  the  brow  of  age 
A  smack  of  youth,  and  makes  the  life  of  youth 
Shed  perfume  exquisite.     Expect  it  not. 
Ye  who  till  noon  upon  a  down  bed  lie, 
Indulging  feverous  sleep," 

(HURDIS,    Village  Curate.)  ^ 

"Watch  and  ward, 
And  stand  on  your  guard. " 

(IzAAK  Walton.) 

**  Sleep  is  Nature's  second  course." 


UPON  A  LOOKING-GLASS. 

Since  as  you  know,  you  cannot  see  yourself 

So  well  as  by  reflection,  I  your  glass 

Will  modestly  discover  to  yourself 

That  of  yourself  which  you  yet  know  not  of." 

(Shakspere.) 


FOR  LADIES'  BOUDOIRS. 

Birth,  beauty,  -wealth,  are  nothing  worth  alone. 
All  these  I  would  for  good  additions  take  : 
'Tis  the  mind's  beauty  keeps  the  others  sweet." 

(Sir  Thomas  Overbury,   The  Wife. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  59 


"  'Tis  beauty  that  cloth  oft  make  women  proud ; 
'Tis  virtue  that  doth  make  them  most  admired  j 
'Tis  modesty  that  makes  them  seem  divine." 

(Shakspere.) 


FOR  A  DRESSING-ROOM. 
"The  apparel  oft  proclaims  the  man." 


FOR  SCHOOLROOMS, 

"  Extend  generosity,  it  is  profuseness  ; 
Confine  economy,  it  is  avarice ; 
Unbridle  courage,  it  is  rashness  ; 
Indulge  sensibility,  it  is  weakness." 

"  Catch  Time  by  the  forelock  j  he's  bald  behind.'' 

"  Nothing  is  truly  good  that  may  be  excell'd." 

{Motto  of  King  Arthur's  Table.) 

He  may  do  what  he  will  that  will  but  do  what  he  may." 

(Arthur  Warwick.) 

**  God  dwelleth  near  about  us, 
Ever  within, 
Working  the  goodness, 
Consuming  the  sin." 

(FuLKE  Greville,  Lord  Brooke,  born  1554.) 


FOR  LIBRARIES,  STUDIES,  AND  BOOK-ROOMS. 

**  Reading  furnishes  the  mind  only  with  materials  of  knowledge  :  it  is  thinking  makes  what  we 
read  ours.  We  are  of  the  ruminating  kind,  and  it  is  not  enough  to  cram  ourselves  with  a  great 
load  of  collections  :  unless  we  chew  them  over  again,  they  will  not  give  us  strength  or  nourishment." 

(Locke.) 

"  Crafty  men  contemn  studies ;  simple  men  admire  them  j  and  wise  men  use  them." 

(Bacon.  ) 

**  Read  not  to  contradict  and  refute,  nor  to  believe  and  take  for  granted,  nor  to  find  talk  and 
discourse,  but  to  weigh  and  consider."  {Idetn.) 

"Some  books  are  to  be  tasted,  others  to  be  swallowed,  and  some  few  to  be  chewed  and 
digested  :  that  is,  some  books  are  to  be  read  only  in  parts  ;  others  to  be  read,  but  not  curiously  ; 
and  some  few  to  be  read  wholly,  and  with  diligence  and  attention."  {Idem.) 

"In  reading,  we  hold  converse  with  the  wise;  in  the  business  of  life,  generally  with  the 
foolish."  (Idem.) 

"That  place  that  does 
Contain  my  books,  the  best  companions,  is 
To  me  a  glorious  court,  where  hourly  I 
Converse  with  the  old  sages  and  philosophers. " 

(J.  Fletcher.) 


6o  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMTNATING. 

*'  Bookes  are  a  part  of  man's  prerogative, 

In  formal  inke  they  thoughts  and  voyces  hold, 
That  we  to  them  our  solitude  may  give. 

And  make  time  present  travel  that  of  old. 
Our  life  fame  peceth  longer  at  the  end. 
And  bookes  it  farther  backward  doe  extend." 

(Sir  Thomas  Overbury,   The  Wife.) 
"  Books  should  for  one  of  these  four  ends  conduce, — 
For  wisdom,  piety,  delight,  or  use." 

(Sir  John  Denham.) 
"  Cease  not  to  learne  until  thou  cease  to  live  ; 

Think  that   day  lost   wherein   thou   draw'st   no   letter, 
Nor  gain'st  no  lesson,    that   new  grace   may  give 
To   make   thyself  learneder,    wiser,    better." 

{Quadf-ains  of  Pibmc,  translated  by  JosHUA  Sylvester.) 
"  Who   readeth   much   and  never   meditates. 
Is   like   a  greedy  eater  of  much   food, 
Who  so   surcloyes   his   stomach   with  his   cates. 
That  commonly  they  do  him  little  good." 

(Ibid.) 
"Reading  maketh  a  full  man,  conference  a  ready  man,  and  writing  an  exact  man." 

(Bacon's  Essays— Of  Studies.) 

"  Calm  let  me  live,  and  every  cai-e  beguile,' — 
Hold  converse  with  the  great  of  every  time, 
The  leam'd   of  ev'ry  class,  the  good  of  ev'ry   clime." 

(Rev.  Samuel  Bishop.) 

**  Of  things  that  be  strange, 
Who   loveth   to   read, 
In  these  books  let  him  range 
His  fancy  to  feed." 

(Richard  Robinson.) 


FOR  MUSEUMS   OR    LABORATORIES. 

'*  O  mickle   is   the  powerful   grace   that  lies 
In  herbs,   plants,    stones,    and   their  true    qualities  : 
For  nought's   so  vile   that   on   the   earth   doth   live, 
But  to  the   earth   some  special   good   doth  give." 

(Shakspere. 
"  Speak   to  the   earth,    and  it  shall   teach  thee." 

(Solomon.) 


FOR  A  SURGICAL  MUSEUM. 

"There  is  no  theam  more  plentifulljo  scan, 
Than  is  the  glorious,  goodly  frame  of  Man." 

(Joshua  Sylvester's  Dtt  J^arfai,  6th  day.) 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

FOR  JUSTICE-ROOMS. 
•'  'Tis  not  enough  that  thou  do  no  man  wrong, — 
Thou  even  in  others  must  suppress  the  same, 
Righting  the  weake  against  th'  unrighteous  strong, 
Whether  it  touch  his  hfe,  his  goods,  his  name." 

{Quadrains  of  Pibnic,  trans,  by  Joshua  SYLVESTER.) 
•*  Upon  the  Law  thy  Judgments  alwayes  ground, 
And  not  on  man  :  For  that 's  affection-less. 
But  man  in  Passions  strangely  doth  abound  ; 
Th'  one  all  like  God  :  Th'  other  too-like  to  beasts." 

{Id,  eod.) 


FOR  CASINOS  OR  SUMMER-HOUSES. 

"Abused  mortals,  did  you  know 
Where  joy,  heart's  ease,  and  comfort  grow,  | 
You'd  scorn  proud  towers. 
And  seek  them  in  these  bowers  ; 
Where  winds,  perhaps,  sometimes  our  woods  may  shake, 
But  blustering  care  can  never  tempest  make. " 

(Sir  Henry  Wotton.) 

'*  We  trample  grasse,  and  prize  the  flowers  of  May ; 
Yet  grasse  is  greenc  when  flowers  doe  fade  away. " 

(Robert  Southwell.) 

**  Blest  who  no  false  glare  requiring, 
Nature's  rural  sweets  admiring. 
Can,  from  grosser  joys  retiring, 
Seek  the  simple  and  serene. " 

(Isaac  Bickerstaff.  ) 


FOR  A  COUNTING-HOUSE. 
"  Omnia  Somnia." 

Gae,  silly  worm,  drudge,  trudge,  and  travell, 

So  thou  maist  gain 
Some  honour  or  some  golden  gravell : 
But  Death  the  while  to  fill  his  number, 

With  sudden  call 

Takes  thee  from  all. 
To  prove  thy  dales  but  dream  and  slumber. " 

(Joshua  Sylvester,  Mottoes. 


FOR  OFFICES   OR  WORKSHOPS. 

' '  Have  more  than  thou  showcst ; 
Speak  less  than  thou  knowest ; 
Lend  more  than  thou  owest ; 
Learn  more  than  thou  trowest. " 

(Shakspere.) 


62  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

*'  A  spending  hand  that  alway  poureth  out, 
Had  need  to  have  a  bringer-in  as  fast  ; 
And  on  the  stone  that  still  doth  turn  about 

There  groweth  no  moss  :    these  proverbs  yet  do  last." 

(Sir  T.    Wyatt.) 
*'  How  many  might  in  time  have  wise  been  made, 
Before  their  time,   had  they  not  thought  them  so? 
What  artist  e'er  was  master  of  his  trade 
Yer  he  began  his  prenticeship  to  know  ? 

*'  To  some  one  act  apply  thy  whole  affection, 
And  in  the  craft  of  others  seldom  mell  ;      - 
But  in  thine  own  strive  to  attain  perfection, 
For  'tis  no  little  honour  to  excell." 

{Quadra i7is  of  Fibrac,  translated  by  JosHUA   Sylvester.) 

"If  youth  knew  what  age  would  crave, 
Youth  would  then  both  get  and  save.'* 

"  Flee,   flee,   the  idle  brain  ; 

Flee,   flee  from  doing  naught; 
For  never  was  there  idle  brain, 
But  bred  an  idle  thought." 

*'  Get  to  live;   then  live  and  use  it,  else  it  is  not  true  that  thou  hast  gotten." 

(G.   Herbert.) 
*'  To  him  that  is  willing,   ways  are  not  wanting." 


FOR  SHOPS. 
Whoso   tntsteth  ere  he  klloW, 

Doth  hurt  himself  and  please  his  foe.''  \ 

(Sir  Thomas  Wyatt.)  ^ 

"  Think  much  of  a  trifle. 
Though  small  it  appear ; 
Small  sands  make  tlie  mouiitaiH, 
And  moments  the  year." 


FOR  A  BELL-TURRET. 
We  lake  no  note  of  time 
But  from  its  loss  ;   to  give  it  then  a  tongue 


Is  wise  in  man. 


(Young's  Night  Thoughts.) 


FOR  A  BATHtNG-HOUSE. 

Do  not  fear  to  put  thy  feet 

Naked  in  the  tivet  sWeet  j 

Think  nor  leach,  or  newt,   Or  toad 

Will  bite  thy  foot,  where  thou  hast  trod." 

(Beaumont  and  Fletcher,  Faithful  Shepherdess. 


THE  ART  OP  ILLUMmATmC.  63 

With  those  Still  more  admirable  "legends"  which  may  be  selected  from  the 
Bible  I  do  not  meddle.  In  it  golden  words  of  comfort  and  admonition  lie  strewn 
so  thickly,  that  error  cannot  be  made  by  a  selector.  It  may  not  be  amiss,  also, 
for  the  illuminator  to  remember,  that  not  unfrequently  "  a  verse  may  find  him  whom 
a  sermon  flies." 

I  cannot  quit  this  portion  of  my  theme  without  one  word  of  summary,  in  the 
way  of  advice,  to  the  designer  of  illumination,  on  whatever  material  applied. 
Briefly,  then,  let  him  eschew  quaintness,  and  aim  at  beauty ;  let  him  not  shrink 
from  beauty  in  old  times  because  it  was  masked  in  quaintness ;  but  with  a  dis- 
criminating eye  let  him  learn  to  winnow  the  chaff  from  the  wheat,  and,  scattering 
the  one  to  the  winds,  let  him  garner  up  the  other  in  the  storehouse  of  his  memory, 
and  for  the  sustenance  of  his  artistic  life ;  and  let  him  rest  assured  that  the  most 
original  designers,  in  all  ages,  have  been  usually  those  who  have  gathered 
most  widely  and  profoundly  from  the  failures,  successes,  and  experiences  of  their 
predecessors. 


PART    III. 


HOW  THE  ART  OF  HLUMINA  TING  MA  Y  BE  PRACTISED. 

ON  analysis  it  will  be  found  that  this  section  of  my  Essay  resolves  itself  into 
three  divisions,  embracing  respectively,  istly,  the  ancient  processes;  2ndly, 
the  modern  processes  ;  and,  srdly,  the  possible  processes,  not  yet  introduced  into 
common  use.  Of  the  last,  I  do  not  purpose  speaking  in  the  present  work. 
Notices  ef  the  first  of  these  might  of  course  have  been  incorporated  with  the 
historical  section  of  this  Essay ;  but,  upon  reflection,  I  considered  it  would  be  most 
useful  to  the  student  to  introduce  them,  in  a  collected  form,  in  this  place  ;  and  for 
the  following  reasons  : — istly,  in  order  that  they  might  not  interrupt  the  thread  of 
the  narrative ;  and,  2ndly,  because  I  considered  it  desirable  to  put  the  ancient  and 
modem  processes  in  direct  contrast,  so  that  the  amateur  might  be  the  better 
enabled  to  reject  what  is  obsolete  in  the  former,  and  to  revive  any  which  might 
appear  to  promise  greater  technical  excellence  or  facility  than  he  might  be  enabled 
to  obtain  through  the  employment  of  the  latter. 

I  commence,  therefore,  with  the  Aitdent processes. 

Sir  Charles  Eastlake,  who  has  profoundly  studied  the  history  and  theory  of  the 
subject,  has  justly  remarked^  the  intimate  relation  which,  in  the  classical  ages, 
existed  between  the  physician  and  the  painter, — the  former  discovering,  supplying, 
and  frequently  preparing,  the  materials  used  by  the  latter.  This  ancient  connec- 
tion was  not  broken  during  those  ages  when  almost  all  knowledge  and  practice  of 
either  medicine  or  art  were  limited  to  the  walls  of  the  cloister.  The  zealous 
fathers  not  only  worked  themselves  to  the  best  of  their  ability,  but  delighted  in 
training  up  their  younger  brethren  to  perpetuate  the  credit  and  revenue  derived 
from  their  skill,  knowledge,  and  labour,  by  the  monasteries  to  which  they  were 
attached.  "  Nor  was  it  merely  by  oral  instruction  that  technical  secrets  were  com- 
municated :  the  traditional  and  practical  knowledge  of  the  monks  was  condensed 
in  short  manuscript  formulae,  sometimes  on  the  subject  of  the  arts  alone,  but 
oftener  mixed  up  with  chemical  and  medicinal  receipts.  These  collections,  still 
more  heterogeneous  in  their  contents  as  they  received  fresh  additions  from  other 
hands,  were  afterwards  published  by  secular  physicians,  under  the  title  of  *  Secreta.' 

*   **  Materials  for  a  History  of  Oil-painting,"  by  Charles  Lock  Eastlake  :  London,  1847. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  65 

The  earliest  of  such  manuals  serve  to  show  the  nature  of  the  researches  which  were 
undertaken  in  the  convent  for  the  practical  benefit  of  the  arts.  Various  motives 
might  induce  the  monks  to  devote  themselves  with  zeal  to  such  pursuits.  It  has 
been  seen  that  their  chemical  studies  were  analogous  ;  that  their  knowledge  of  the 
materials  fittest  for  technical  purposes,  derived  as  it  was  from  experiments  which 
they  had  abundant  leisure  to  make,  was  likely  to  be  of  the  best  kind.  Painting 
was  holy  in  their  eyes ;  and,  although  the  excellence  of  the  work  depended  on  the 
artist,  it  was  for  them  to  insure  its  durability.  By  a  singular  combination  of  cir- 
cumstances, the  employers  of  the  artist,  the  purchasers  of  pictures  (for  such  the 
fraternities  were  in  the  majority  of  cases),  were  often  the  manufacturers  of  the 
painter's  materials.  Here,  then,  was  another  plain  and  powerful  reason  for  fur- 
nishing the  best-prepared  colours  and  vehicles.  The  cost  of  the  finer  pigments 
was,  in  almost  every  case,  charged  to  the  employer  \  but  economy  could  be 
combined  with  excellence  of  quality,  when  the  manufacture  was  undertaken  by  the 
inmates  of  the  convent." 

All  that  is  asserted  in  this  passage  with  respect  to  painting,  holds  equally  good 
with  regard  to  the  materials  requisite  for  the  practice  of  the  Art  of  Illumination ; 
and  the  same  treatises  which  are  illustrative  of  art  generally,  almost  invariably 
include  specific  instructions  with  regard  to  the  particular  branch  of  it  I  am  now 
endeavouring  to  illustrate. 

Fortunately,  the  series  of  these  "  Secreta "  both  commences  from  a  remote 
date,  and  is  tolerably  complete  from  that  to  a  quite  recent  period.  Scattered 
allusions  to  the  processes  of  art  and  industry  may  be  met  with  in  the  writings  of 
several  authors  of  the  Alexandrian  Neo-Platonic  school  in  the  early  ages  of  the 
Church,  from  whom  the  Byzantine  Greeks,  no  doubt,  learnt  much  ;  but  the  most 
ancient  collection  on  the  subject  is  to  be  met  with  in  the  treatise  of  Heraclius,  or 
Eraclius,  "  de  Artibus  Romanorum."^  It  would  appear  not  to  have  been  written 
earlier  than  the  7  th  or  later  than  the  loth  century,'^  its  art  being,  as  Mr.  Robert 
Hendrie,  the  learned  translator  and  editor  of  the  essay  of  Theophilus,  of  whom 
mention  will  presently  be  made,  observes,  "  of  the  school  of  Pliny,  increased,  it  is 
true,  by  Byzantine  invention,  but  yet  essentially  Roman."  '^  The  next  collection,  in 
point  of  age,  is  that  published  by  Muratori,"*  and  well  known  as  the  "  Lucca 
Manuscript,"  ascribed  by  Mabillon  to  the  age  of  Charlemagne,  and  by  Muratori 
himself  to  a  period  certainly  not  later  than  the  loth  century.  Its  Latinity  is 
barbarous,  but  I  scarcely  think  I  can  go  wrong  in  following  the  translation  of  so 
careful  a  writer  as  Sharon  Turner  in  the  following  extracts,  which  treat  of  illumina- 
tion, and  give  us  a  clear  insight  into  the  practice  of  the  school  founded  under  the 
patronage  of  the  great  Prankish  emperor  of  the  West. 

'  The  most  copious  text  of  Heralicus  is  contained  in  the  Le  Begue  collection  of  writers  on  art,, 
brought  together  by  Master  Jolin  Le  Begue,  of  Paris,  in  the  15th  century. 

^  Sir  Charles  Eastlake  does  not  place  Heraclius  so  early  as  Raspe  and  Mi*.  Hendrie  do, 
I  incline  to  agree  with  the  last-named  critics. 

^  The  text  of  Heraclius  is  given  not  from  the  Le  Begue  manuscript,  but  from  one  less  perfect, 
formerly  at  Cambridge,  but  now  in  the  British  Museum,  Egerton  840  A,  in  Raspe's  work — "A 
Critical  Essay  on  Oil-painting."     London,  1781. 

*  Muratori,   «'  Antiq.  Ital.  Medii  AWx,''  p.  269. 

F 


66  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

The  first  I  select  refers  to  the  preparation  of  the  calf-skin. 

"  Put  it  under  lime  and  let  it  lie  for  three  days  ;  then  stretch  it,  scrape  it  well  on  both  sides,  and 
dry  it ;  then  stain  it  with  the  colours  you  wish. " 

The  second  directs  how  skins  may  be  gilt. 

"  Take  the  red  skin  and  carefully  pumice  and  temper  it  in  tepid  water,  and  pour  the  water  on  it 
till  it  runs  off  limpid  ;  stretch  it  afterwards,  and  smooth  it  diligently  with  clean  wood.  When  it  is 
dry,  take  the  whites  of  eggs  and  smear  it  therewith  thoroughly ;  when  it  is  dry,  sponge  it  with 
water,  press  it,  dry  it  again,  and  polish  it ;  then  rub  it  with  a  clean  skin,  and  polish  it  again  and 
gild  it." 

Such  gilding  was  effected  with  gold  leaf^  beaten  out  between  small  sheets  of 
"  Greek  parchment,  which  is  made  from  linen  cloth  "  {i.e.  paper),  enclosed  in  vellum. 
White  of  Qgg  was  used  as  the  mordant  for  fixing  on  the  gold. 

The  following  two  passages  instruct  the  student  in  preparing  gold  for  writing. 

' '  File  gold  very  finely,  put  it  in  a  mortar,  and  add  the  sharpest  vinegar  ;  rub  it  till  it  becomes 
black,  and  then  pour  it  out.  Put  to  it  some  salt  or  nitre,  and  so  it  will  dissolve.  So  you  may  write 
with  it ;  and  thus  all  the  metals  may  be  dissolved. 

'*  Take  thin  plates  of  gold  and  silver,  rub  them  in  a  mortar  with  Greek  salt  or  nitre  till  it 
disappears.  Pour  on  water  and  repeat  it ;  then  add  salt,  and  so  wash  it.  When  the  gold  remains 
even,  add  a  moderate  portion  of  the  flowers  of  copper  and  bullock's  gall  ;  rub  them  together,  and 
write  and  burnish  the  letters." 

The  next  and  last,  alludes  to  the  amalgam,  which  appears  to  have  been  for 
many  centuries  a  favourite  method  of  applying  gold  to  parchment  and  other 
surfaces. 

**  Melt  some  lead,  and  frequently  immerse  it  in  cold  water.  Melt  gold,  and  pour  that  into  the 
same  water,  and  it  will  become  brittle.  Then,  rub  the  gold  filings  carefully  with  quicksilver,  and 
purge  it  carefully  while  it  is  liquid.  Before  you  write,  dip  the  pen  in  liquid  alum,  which  is  best 
purified  by  salt  and  vinegar. " 

In  these  instructions  the  student  may  distinctly  recognize  the  processes  adopted 
in  the  production  of  those  gilt  texts  on  stained  vellum  grounds  which  were  so- 
highly  prized  in  the  Carlovingian  age. 

In  the  writings  of  an  ecclesiastic,  probably  nearly   contemporary  with   the 

Norman  conquest,  the  monk  Rugenis,  or  "  Theophilus,"  we   arrive  at  a  really 

perfect  picture^  of  the  arts  of  the  nth  century.      The  first  of  the  three  books  into 

which  his  "  Schedule  of  different  Arts  "  is  divided,  is  dedicated  entirely  to  painting. 

It  contains  forty  chapters,  of  which  thirty  refer  to  the  preparation  and  application 

of  pigments  generally,  both  for  oil,  tempera,  and  fresco  painting,  and  ten  to  the 

various  processes  connected  with  illumination.     Of  these,  the  following  are  the 

most  important. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

OF  GRINDING  GOLD   FOR  BOOKS,    AND  OF  CASTING  THE  MILL. 

When  you  have  traced  out  figures  or  letters  in  books,  take  pure  gold  and  file  it  very  finely  in  a 
clean  cup  or  small  basin,  and  wash  it  with  a  pencil  in  the  shell  of  a  tortoise,  or  a  shell  which  is 

*  The  title  he  himself  gives  to  his  work  illustrates  its  comprehensive  character — **  Theophili  qui 
et  Rugerus,  Presbyteri  et  Monachi  Libri  III.  de  diversis  Artibus,  seu  diversarum  Artium  Schedula." 
Translations,  with  excellent  critical  comments,  liaA^e  been  made  by  the  Count  de  I'Escalopier  into 
French,  and  by  Mr.  Robert  Hendrie  into  English.  In  the  extracts  here  given  I  have  followed  the 
accurate  text  of  the  last-named  gentleman. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINAIING.  dl 

taken  out  of  the  water.  Have  then  a  mill  with  its  pestle,  both  cast  from  metal  of  copper  and  tin 
mixed  together,  so  that  three  parts  may  be  of  pure  copper,  and  the  fourth  of  pure  tin,  free  from 
lead.  With  this  composition  the  mill  is  cast  in  the  form  of  a  small  mortar,  and  its  pestle  round 
about  an  iron  in  the  form  of  a  knot,  so  that  the  iron  may  protrude  of  the  thickness  of  a  finger,  and 
in  length  a  little  more  than  half  a  foot,  the  third  part  of  which  iron  is  fixed  in  wood  carefully  turned, 
in  length  about  one  yard,  and  pierced  very  straightly  ;  in  the  lower  part  of  which,  however,  of  the 
length  of  four  fingers  from  the  end,  must  be  a  revolving  wheel,  either  of  wood  or  of  lead,  and  in 
the  middle  of  the  upper  part  is  fixed  a  leather  strap,  by  which  it  can  be  pulled,  and,  in  revolving, 
be  drawn  back.  Then  this  mill  is  placed  in  a  hollow,  upon  a  bench  fitted  for  it,  between  two  small 
wooden  pillars  firmly  fixed  into  the  same  bench,  upon  which  another  piece  of  wood  is  to  be  inserted, 
which  can  be  taken  out  and  replaced,  in  the  middle  of  which,  at  the  lower  part,  is  a  hole  in  which 
the  pestle  of  the  mill  will  revolve.  These  things  thus  disposed,  the  gold,  carefully  cleansed,  is  put 
into  the  mill,  a  little  water  added,  and  the  pestle  placed,  and  the  upper  piece  of  wood  fitted,  the 
strap  is  drawn  and  is  permitted  to  revolve,  again  pulled,  and  again  it  revolves,  and  this  must  so  be 
done  for  two  or  three  hours.  Then  the  upper  wood  is  taken  off,  and  the  pestle  washed  in  the  same 
water  with  a  pencil.  Afterwards  the  mill  is  taken  up,  and  the  gold,  with  the  water,  is  stirred  to 
the  bottom  with  the  pencil,  and  is  left  a  little,  until  the  grosser  part  subsides ;  the  water  is  presently 
poured  into  a  very  clean  basin,  and  whatever  gold  comes  away  with  the  water  is  ground. 
Replacing  the  water  and  the  pestle,  and  wood  above  being  placed,  again  it  is  milled  in  the  same 
way  as  before,  until  it  altogether  comes  away  with  the  water.  In  the  like  manner^re  ground  silver, 
brass,  and  copper.  But  gold  is  ground  most  carefully,  and  must  be  lightly  milled ;  and  you  must 
often  inspect  it,  because  it  is  softer  than  the  other  metals,  that  it  may  not  adhere  to  the  mill  or  the 
pestle,  and  become  heaped  together.  If  through  negligence  this  should  happen,  that  which  is 
conglomerate  is  scraped  together  and  taken  out,  and  wha.t  is  left  is  milled  until  finished.  Which 
being  done,  pouring  out  the  upper  water  with  the  impurities  from  the  basin,  wash  the  gold  carefully 
in  a  clean  shell ;  then  pouring  the  water  from  it,  agitate  it  with  the  pencil,  and  when  you  have  had 
♦it  in  your  hand  for  one  hour,  pour  it  into  another  shell,  and  keep  that  very  fine  part  which  has  come 
away  with  the  waters.  Then  again,  water  being  placed  with  it,  warm  it  and  stir  it  over  the  fire, 
and,  as  before,  pour  away  the  fine  particles  with  the  water,  and  you  may  act  thus  until  you  shall 
have  purified  it  entirely.  After  this  wash  with  water  the  same  refined  part,  and  in  the  same  manner 
a  second  a.nd  a  third  time,  and  whatever  gold  you  gather  mix  with  the  former.  In  the  same  way 
you  will  wash  silver,  brass,  and  copper.  Afterwards  take  the  bladder  of  a  fish  which  is  called  huso 
(sturgeon),  and  washing  it  three  times  in  tepid  water,  leave  it  to  soften  a  night,  and  on  the  morrow 
warm  it  on  the  fire,  so  that  it  does  not  boil  up  until  you  prove  with  your  finger  if  it  adhere,  and 
when  it  does  adhere  strongly,  the  glue  is  good. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 

HOW   GOLD  AND   SILVER  ARE  LAID  IN   BOOKS. 

Afterwards  take  pure  minium  (red  lead),  and  add  to  it  a  third  part  of  cinnabar  (vermilion), 
grinding  it  upon  a  stone  with  water.  Which  being  carefully  ground,  beat  up  the  clear  of  the  white 
of  an  egg,  in  summer  with  water,  in  winter  without  water ;  and  when  it  is  clear,  put  the  minium 
into  a  horn  and  pour  the  clear  upon  it,  and  stir  it  a  little  with  a  piece  of  wood  put  into  it,  and  with 
a  pencil  fill  up  all  places  with  it  upon  which  you  wish  to  lay  gold.  Then  place  a  little  pot  with 
glue  over  the  fire,  and  when  it  is  liquefied,  pour  it  into  the  shell  of  gold  and  wash  it  with  it.  When 
you  have  poured  which  into  another  shell,  in  which  the  purifying  is  kept,  again  pour  in  warm  glue, 
and  holding  it  in  the  palm  of  your  left  hand,  stir  it  carefully  with  the  pencil,  and  lay  it  on  where 
you  wish,  thick  or  thin,  so,  however,  that  there  be  little  glue,  because,  should  it  exceed,  it  blackens 
the  gold  and  does  not  receive  a  polish  ;  but  after  it  has  dried,  polish  it  with  a  tooth  or  bloodstone 
carefully  filed  and  polished,  upon  a  smooth  and  shining  horn  tablet.  But  should  it  happen,  through 
negligence  of  the  glue  not  being  well  cooked,  that  the  gold  pulverizes  in  rubbing,  or  rises  on 
account  of  too  great  thickness,  have  near  you  some  old  clear  of  tgg^  beat  up  without  water,  and 
directly  with  a  pencil  paint  slightly  and  quickly  over  the  gold ;  when  it  is  dry,  again  rub  it  with  the 
tooth  or  stone.     Lay  hi  this  manner  silver,  brass,  and  copper  in  their  place  and  polish  them. 

F   2 


68  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

The  raised  gold  was  not  always  produced  by  the  mixture  of  red  lead  and  white 
of  Qgg  recommended  by  Theophilus.  It  was,  especially  in  Italy,  frequently  made 
of  a  composition  of  "gesso,"  or  plaster,  and  in  the  15th  century  was  often 
punctured  all  over  by  way  of  ornament.  It  may  be  occasionally  met  with  stamped 
over  in  patterns,  with  intaglio  punches.  This  "gesso  raising,"  though  very  brilliant, 
possessed  little  tenacity,  and  in  many  examples  it  has  scaled  off,  while  the  more 
ancient  "  raising  "  prescribed  by  Theophilus  has  adhered  perfectly. 

CHAPTER   XXXII. 

HOW   A    PICTURE    IS    ORNAMENTED    IN    BOOKS    WITH    TIN    AND   SAFFRON. 

But  if  you  have  neither  of  these  (gold,  silver,  brass,  or  copper),  and  yet  wish  to  decorate  your 
work  in  some  manner,  take  tin  pure  and  finely  scraped,  mill  .it  and  wash  it  like  gold,  and  aj^ply  it 
with  the  same  glue,  upon  letters  or  other  places  which  you  wish  to  ornament  with  gold  or  silver  ; 
and  when  you  have  polished  it  with  a  tooth,  take  saffi-on,  with  which  silk  is  coloured,  moistening  it 
with  clear  of  egg  without  water,  and  when  it  has  stood  a  night,  on  the  following  day  cover  with  a 
pencil  the  places  which  you  wish  to  gild,  the  rest  holding  the  place  of  silver.  Then  make  fine  traits 
round  letters  and  leaves,  and  flourishes  from  minium,  with  a  j^en,  also  the  stuffs  of  dresses  and  other 
ornaments.  • 

CHAPTER   XXXIII. 

OF    EVERY    SORT   OF   GLUE    FOR   A    PICTURE    OF    GOLD. 

If  you  have  not  a  bladder  (of  the  sturgeon),  cut  up  thick  parchment  or  vellum  in  the  same 
manner, — wash  and  cook  it.  Prepare  also  the  skin  of  an  eel  carefully  scraped,  cut  up  and  washed 
in  the  same  manner.  Prepare  thus  also  the  bones  of  the  head  of  the  wolf-fish  washed  and  dried, 
carefully  washed  in  water  three  times.  To  whichever  of  these  you  have  prepared,  add  a  third  part 
of  very  transparent  gum,  simmer  it  a  little,  and  you  can  keep  it  as  long  as  you  wish. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 

How   COLOURS    ARE   TEMPERED    FOR    BOOKS. 

These  things  thus  accomplished,  make  a  mixture  of  the  clearest  gum  and  water  as  above,  and 
temper  all  colours  except  green,  and  ceruse,  and  minium,  and  carmine.  Salt  green  is  worth  nothing 
for  j^ooks.  ^ou  will  temper  Spanish  green  with  pure  wine,  and  if  you  wish  to  make  shadows,  add 
a  little  sap  of'  iris,  or  cabbage,  or  leek.  You  will  temper  minium,  and  ceruse,  and  carmine,  with 
clear  of  egg.  Compose  all  preparations  of  colours  for  a  book  as  above,  if  you  want  them  for 
painting  figiires.  All  colours  are  laid  on  twice  in  books,  at  first  very  thinly,  then  more  thickly ;  but 
twice  for  letters. 

The  next  extract  I  give  is  of  great  interest  in  the  technical  history  of  illumina- 
tion, on  three  accounts ;  firstly,  because  it  guides  the  student  to  recognize  in 
madder  the  purple  stain  and  colour,  so  highly  prized  in  the  early  periods  of  the 
art ;  secondly,  because  it  shows  him  the  manner  in  which  fugitive  vegetable  tints 
Were  protected  from  the  decomposing  influence  of  the  atmosphere  by  an  albuminous 
varnish  ;  and  third]y,  because  it  illustrates  the  ordinary  modern  processes  of  under 
painting,  and  glazing  with  transparent  colour.  The  "  folium  "  of  the  Greek  illu- 
minators was  procured  from  plants  growing  abundantly  near  Athens,  while  that  of 
the  Hiberno-Saxon  Scribes  was  obtained  from  the  "norma"  or  "gorma"  of  the 
Celts.     Mr.  Hendrie,  in  his  learned  notes  to  Theophilus,  has  traced  successive 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  69 

recipes  for  the  preparation  of  "  folium,"  in  which  the  identity  of  the  base  giving  the 
colouring  matter  is  clearly  established.  It  is  curious  that  the  collections  of 
"  Secreta "  should  give  as  the  only  countries  supplying  the  materials  for  making 
"  folium,"  those  two  in  which  the  use  of  the  bright  purple  stain  ascends  to  the  very 
earliest  of  their  decorated  manuscripts.  The  following  is  the  description  given  by 
Theophilus  : — - 

CHAPTER    XXXV. 

OF   THE    KINDS    AND   THE   TEMPERING   OF    FOLIUM. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  folium,  one  red,  another  purple,  a  third  blue,  which  you  will  thus 
temper.  Take  ashes,  and  sift  them  through  a  cloth,  and  sprinkling  them  with  cold  water,  make 
rolls  of  them  in  form  of  loaves,  and  placing  them  in  the  fire,  leave  them  until  they  quite  glow. 
After  they  have  first  burnt  for  a  very  long  time,  and  have  afterwards  cooled,  place  a  portion  of  them 
in  a  vessel  of  clay,  pouring  urine  upon  them  and  stirring  with  wood.  When  it  has  deposed  in  a 
clear  manner,  pour  it  upon  the  red  foliiuii,  and,  grinding  it  slightly  upon  a  stone,  add  to  it  a  fourth 
part  of  quick  lime,  and  when  it  shall  be  ground  and  sufficiently  moistened,  strain  it  through  a  cloth, 
and  paint  with  a  pencil  where  you  wish,  thinly ;  afterwards  more  thickly.  And  if  you  wish  to 
imitate  a  robe  in  a  page  of  a  book,  with  purple  folium  ;  with  the  same  tempering,  without  the 
mixture  of  lime,  paint  first  with  a  pen,  in  the  same  page,  flourishes  or  circles,  and  in  them  birds  or 
beasts,  or  leaves  ;  and  when  it  is  dry,  paint  red  folium  over  all,  thinly,  then  more  thickly,  and  a 
third  time  if  necessary ;  and  afterwards  paint  over  it  some  old  clear  of  egg.  Paint  over  also  with  glaire 
of  egg,  draj^eries,  and  all  things  which  you  have  painted  with  folium  and  carmine.  Vou  can 
likewise  preserve  the  burned  ashes  which  remain  for  a  long  time,  dry. 

I  conclude*  the  series  of  receipts  extracted  from  Theophilus  by  one  not 
further  bearing  upon  the  Art  of  Illumination,  than  as  proving  the  nature  of 
the  ink  which  has  generally  retained  its  colour  so  wonderfully  in  the  ancient 
manuscripts. 

CHAPTER    XL. 

OF   INK. 

To  make  ink,  cut  for  yourself  wood  of  the  thorn-trees  in  April  or  May,  before  they  produce 
flowers  or  leaves,  and  collecting  them  in  small  bundles,  allow  them  to  lie  in  the  shade  for  two, 
three,  or  four  weeks,  until  they  are  somewhat  dry.  Then  have  wooden  mallets,  with  which  you 
beat  these  thorns  upon  another  piece  of  hard  wood,  until  you  peel  off  the  bark  everywhere,  put 
which  immediately  into  a  barrelful  of  water.     When  you  have  filled  two,  or  three,  or  four,  or  five 


*  I  cannot  take  leave  of  this  good  old  monk,  the  influence  exercised  by  whose  writings  during 
the  whole  of  the  Middle  Ages,  is  proved  by  the  numerous  transcripts  of  them  executed  at  different 
periods,  still  preserved  in  most  of  the  chief  European  libraries,  without  giving  him  credit  for  a  pure 
and  liberal  philanthropy  worthy  of  imitation  in  all  ages.  Nothing  can  be  more  dignified  and  noble 
than  the  words  in  which  he  concludes  the  introduction  to  his  work.  After  reciting  the  various  arts 
he  has  endeavoured  to  illustrate,  and  the  sufferings  and  labour  through  which  the  knowledge  he 
desires  to  convey  to  others  had  been  acquired  by  himself,  he  winds  up  by  saying  : — 

"When  you  shall  have  re-read  this  often,  and  have  committed  it  to  your  tenacious  memory,  you 
shall  thus  recompense  me  for  this  care  of  instruction,  that,  as  often  as  you  shall  successfully  have 
made  use  of  my  work,  you  pray  for  me  for  the  pity  of  omnipotent  God,  who  knows  that  I  have 
written  these  things  which  are  here  arranged,  neither  through  love  of  human  approbation,  nor 
through  desire  of  temporal  reward,  nor  have  I  stolen  anything  precious  or  rare  through  envious 
jealousy,  nor  have  I  kept  back  anything  reserved  for  myself  alone  ;  but,  in  augmentation  of  the 
honour  and  glory  of  His  name,  I  h^ve  consulted  the  progress  and  hastened  to  aid  the  necessities  of 
jnany  men." 


TO  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

barrels  with  bark  and  water,  allow  them  so  to  stand  for  eight  days,  until  the  waters  imbibe  all  the 
sap  of  the  bark.  Afterwards  put  this  water  into  a  very  clean  pan,  or  into  a  cauldron,  and  fire  being 
placed  under  it,  boil  it ;  from  time  to  time,  also,  throw  into  the  pan  some  of  this  bark,  so  that 
,  whatever  sap  may  remain  in  it  may  be  boiled  out.  When  you  have  cooked  it  a  little,  throw  it 
out,  and  again  put  in  more ;  which  done,  boil  down  the  remaining  water  unto  a  third  part,  and  then, 
pouring  it  out  of  this  pan,  put  it  into  one  smaller,  and  cook  it  until  it  grows  black  and  begins  to 
thicken ;  add  one  third  part  of  pure  wine,  and  putting  it  into  two  or  three  new  pots,  cook  it  until 
you  see  a  sort  of  skin  show  itself  on  the  surface ;  then  taking  these  pots  from  the  fire,  place  them  in 
the  sun  until  the  black  ink  purifies  itself  from  the  red  dregs.  Afterwards  take  small  bags  of  parch- 
ment, carefully  sewn,  and  bladders,  and  pouring  in  the  pure  ink,  suspend  them  in  the  sun  until  all 
is  quite  dry ;  and  when  dry,  take  from  it  as  much  as  you  wish,  and  temper  it  with  wine  over  the 
fire,  and,  adding  a  little  vitriol,  write.  But,  if  it  should  happen  through  negligence  that  your  ink 
be  not  black  enough,  take  a  fragment  of  the  thickness  of  a  finger,  and  putting  it  into  the  fire,  allow 
it  to  glow,  and  throw  it  directly  into  the  ink. 

The  next  collection  of  Secreta,  in  point  of  importance  and  probable  antiquity, 
is  the  "  Mappae  Clavicula,"  or  "  little  key  to  drawing,"  a  manuscript  treatise  on  the 
preparation  of  pigments,  and  on  various  processes  of  the  decorative  arts  practised 
during  the  Middle  Ages,  in  the  possession  of  Sir  Thomas  Phillipps,  of  Middle 
Hill.^  The  proprietor  of  the  volume,  Mr.  Hendrie,  Sir  Charles  Eastlake,  and  (last, 
not  least)  Mr.  Albert  Way,  agree  in  considering  it  highly  probable  that  it  may 
be  an  English  collection,  probably  of  about  the  reign  of  Henry  II.  Like  the 
''Schedula"  of  Theophilus,  it  presents  a  very  miscellaneous  series  of  recipes,  and 
tends  to  prove,  what  is  very  generally  believed  by  the  learned,  that  the  "  Masters 
of  Arts  "  of  old  were  frequently  skilled,  not  in  special  departments  of  production, 
such  as  the  modern  division-of-labour  system  has  created,  but  in  multifarious  avoca- 
tions, such  as  we  should  not  now  readily  recognize  as  likely  to  be  practised  by  any 
single  individual. 

These  collections  remarkably  illustrate  the  class  of  knowledge  likely  to  have 
been  possessed  by  such  apparently  versatile  geniuses  as  St.  Dunstan,  St.  Eloi, 
Bemward  of .  Hildesheim,  Tutilo  the  monk  of  St.  Gall,  and  many  others.  The 
author  of  the  "  Mappae  Clavicula,"  in  a  few  lines  of  poetical  introduction  to  his 
teachings,  defines  the  first  necessity  for  painters  to  be,  a  knowledge  of  the  manufac- 
ture of  colours,  then  a  command  over  the  various  modes  of  mixing  them,  then 
dexterity  in  using  and  heightening  them  in  different  kinds  of  work  j  and,  ultimately, 
he  commends  to  their  attention  a  variety  of  information  for  the  advancement  of 
art  generally,  derived  from  the  writings  of  many  learned  men, — "  Sicut  liber  iste 
docebit."  Thus  under  two  hundred  and  nine  heads,  but  with  some  tautology,  he 
proceeds  to  treat,  as  Sir  Thomas  Phillipps  observes,  not  only  of  the  composition 
of  colours,  but  "  of  a  variety  of  other  subjects,  in  a  concise  and  simple  manner, 
and  generally  very  intelligibly ;  as  for  instance,  architecture,  mensuration  of 
altitudes,  the  art  of  war,"  &c.  Among  the  recipes,  in  addition  to  those  referring 
to  pigments,  are  many  relating  to  illuminating.  The  following,  for  instance,  is 
curious  as  defiining  clearly  what  were  the  best  and  most  important  tints  for 
illumination : — 

• 

•  It  will  be  foimd  given  in  extenso  in  the  32nd  vol.  of  "  The  Archceologia,"  pp.  183—244,  with 
an  elaborate  Jetter  from  its  possessor. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 


Of  different  Colours. 

**  These  colours  are  cleai- and  full-bodied  for  parchment: — Azorium  (azure),  Vermiculum  (ver- 
milion), wSanguis  Draconis  (dragon's  blood),  Carum  (yellow  ochre),  Minium  (red  lead),  Folium 
(madder  purple),  Auripigmentum  (orpiment),  Viride  Grsecum  (acetate  of  copper),  Gravetum  Indi- 
cum  (indigo),  Bnuium  (brown).  Crocus  (yellow),  Minium  Rubeum  vel  Album  (red  or  white  lead), 
Nigrum  Optimum  ex  carbone  vitis  (th^  best  black  made  from  carbonized  vine  twigs) ;  all  these 
colours  are  mixed  with  white  of  egg." 

The  mixture  of  colours  appears  to  have  been  reduced  to  a  perfect  system,  each 
hue  having  others  specially  adapted  and  used,  for  heightening  and  lowering  the 
pure  tint ;  thus  the  author  gives  directions  which  are  likely  to  be  scarcely  less 
useful  to  the  illuminator  of  the  present  day  than  they  were  to  those  of  old. 

Of  Mixtures, 

"If,  therefore,  you  should  desire  to  know  the  natures  and  mixtures  of  these  [the  above-given] 
colours,  and  which  are  antagonistic  to  each  other,  lend  your  ear  diligently. 

**  Mix  azure  with  white  lead,  lower  with  indigo,  heighten  with  white  lead.  Pure  vermilion  you 
may  lower  with  brown  or  with  dragon's  blood,  and  hdghten  with  orpiment.  Mix  vermiUon  with 
white  lead,  and  make  the  colour  which  is  Called  Rosa^  lower  it  with  vermilion,  heighten  it  with 
white  lead.  Item,  you  may  make  a  colour  with  dragon's  blood  and  orpiment,  which  you  may 
lower  with  brown,  and  heighten  with  orpiment.  Yellow  ochre  you  may  lower  with  brown,  and 
heighten  with  red  lead  (query,  with  white).  Item,  you  may  make  Rosam'  of  yellow  ochre  and 
white  lead,  deepen  with  yellow  ochre,  heighten  with  white  lead.  Reddish  purple  (folium)  may  be 
lowered  with  brown  and  heightened  with  white  lead.  Item,  mix  folium  with  white  lead,  lower 
with  folium,  and  heighten  with  white  lead.  Orpiment  may  be  lowered  with  vermilion,  but  cannot 
be  heightened,  because  it  stains  all  other  colours." 

Of  Teniperitig. 

**  Greek  green  you  will  temper  with  acid,  deepen  with  black,  and  heighten  with  white,  made 
from  stag's  horn  (ivory  black).  Mix  green  with  white  lead,  deepen  with  pure  green,  and  heighten 
with  white  lead.  Greenish  blue,  deepen  with  green,  heighten  with  white  lead.  Yellow,  deepen 
with  vennilion,  heighten  with  white  lead.  Indigo,  deepen  with  black,  heighten  with  azure.  Item, 
mix  indigo  with  white,  deepen  with  azure,  heighten  with  white  lead.  Brown,  deepen  with  black, 
heighten  with  red  lead.  Item,  make  of  brown  and  white  lead  a  dral)  (Rosam),  lower  with  brown, 
heighten  with  white  lead.  Item,  mix  yellow  with  white  lead,  lower  with  yellow,  heighten  with 
white  lead.  Lower  red  lead  with  brown,  heighten  with  white  lead.  Item,  red  lead  with  brown, 
deepen  with  black,  heighten  with  red  lead.  Item,  you  may  make  flesh-colour  of  red  lead  and  white, 
lower  with  vermilion,  heighten  with  white  lead." 

Which  Colours  are  Antagonistic. 

**If  you  wish  to  know  in  what  manner  colours  are  antagonistic,  this  is  it.  Orpiment  (sulphuret 
of  arsenic)  does  not  agree  with  purple  (folio),  nor  with  green  (acetate  of  copper),  nor  with  red 
lead,  nor  white  lead.     Green  does  not  agree  with  purple.'* 

"If  you  wish  to  make  grounds,  make  a  fine  rose-colour  of  vermilion  and  white.  Item,  make 
a  ground  of  pui-ple  mixed  with  chalk.  Item,  make  a  ground  of  green,  mixed  with  vinegar. 
Item,  make  a  ground  of  the  same  green,  and  when  it  shall  have  become  dry,  cover  it  with  size 
(*  caule  '). 

'  There  is  some  confusion  about  this  word,  for  it  is   used  to  denote  mixtures  which  would 
produce  real  rose-colour,  light  Avarm  yellow,  and  a  perfect  drab. 
^  That  is,  the  mineral  green  with  the  vegetable  madder. 


72  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

"  If  you  wish  to  write  in  gold,  take  powder  of  gold  and  moisten  it  with  size,  made  from  the 
very  same  parchment  on  which  you  have  to  write ;  and  with  the  gold  and  size  near  to  the  fire ; 
and,  when  the  writing  shall  be  dry,  burnish  with  a  very  smooth  stone,  or  with  the  tooth  of  a  wild 
boar.  Item,  if  then  you  should  wish  to  make  a  robe  or  a  picture,  you  may  apply  gold  to  the 
parchment,  as  I  have  above  directed,  and  shade  with  ink  or  with  indigo,  and  heighten  with 
orpiment. " 

# 

The  above  are  the  principal  passages  in  the  "  Mappse  Clavicula,"  which  supply- 
deficiencies  in  most  other  books  of  Secreta  ;  and  I  have  translated  them  at  length, 
both  on  account  of  the  accuracy  with  which  I  have  found  the  directions  followed 
in  ancient  illuminated  manuscripts;  and  because  I  believed  that  a  knowledge  of 
this  ancient  scale  of  colours  might  greatly  facilitate  accurate  copying  from  old 
examples.  I  need  scarcely  say,  that  as  the  art  of  painting  improved  in  Italy  and 
the  Netherlands,  the  illuminator's  palette  became  enriched  with  several  new  and 
very  brilliant  colours  ; — such  as  the  ultramarines  and  carmines  (exceedingly  scarce 
in  early  manuscripts),  which  make  the  books  produced  at  Rome  and  in  Northern 
Italy,  during  the  i6th  and  17th  centuries,  glow  with  a  vivacity  never  previously 
attained.  Every  improvement  made  in  one  country  was,  however,  speedily  com- 
municated through  these  very  art-treatises  to  other  countries,  and  thus  we  find  lakes 
and  carmines  freely  used  in  England  during  the  15  th  century.^  Ultramarine,  in- 
deed, forms  the  special  subject  of  an  essay  by  a  Norman,  comprised  among  the  Le 
Begue  MSS.  (already  referred  to),  under  the  following  title,  which  proves  its  novelty 
in  Western  Europe,  at  the  beginning  of  the  15  th  century: — 

"Anno    141 1,   Johannes   de [illegible]   Normannus   de 

Azurro  novo,  lapidis  lazuUi  ultramarini." 

The  next  collection  of  Secreta  in  importance,  and  probably  in  date  to  the 
"  Mappse  Clavicula,"  is  that  of  a  Frenchman,  Peter  de  St.  Audemar.  "  With  this 
treatise,"  observes  Sir  Charles  Eastlake,  "  may  be  classed  a  similar  one  in  the 
British  Museum,  written  in  the  14th  century,"  but  treating  of  a  somewhat  earlier 
practice  in  art.  The  identity  of  the  colours  for,  and  practice  of,  painters  on  wall 
and  panel,  and  illuminators  on  vellum,  is  proved  by  the  instructions  to  both  being 
almost  invariably  given  in  the  same  books.  Thus,  the  volume  last  mentioned  com 
mences — "  Incipit  tractatus  de  coloribus  lUuminatorum  sen  Pictorum  " — as  though 
there  existed  no  practical  distinction  between  them.  Another  manuscript,  of  later 
date,  also  in  the  Le  Begue  collection,  exhibits,  in  its  title  even,  a  curious  picture  of 
the  industry  with  which  the  Art  of  Illumination  was  studied  in  the  principal  coun- 
tries of  Europe, — introducing  the  student  to  a  scribe,  actually  keeping  a  school  at 
Milan.  Thus,  "  Liber  Johannis  Archerius,  a.d.  1398.  Ut  accessit  a  JacoboCona, 
Flamingo  pictore : — Capitula  de  coloribus  ad  illuminandum  libros  ab  eodem 
Archerio  sive  Alcherio,  ut  accessit  ab  Antonio  de  compendio  illuminatore  librorum 
in  Parisiis  et  a  Magistro  Alberto  Pozotto  perfectissimo  in  omnibus  modis  scribendi, 
Mediolani  scholas  tenente." 

Here  we  have,  in  a  few  lines,  evidence  of  the  concurrence  of  no  less,  probably, 
than  four  distinct  nationalities  to  make  up  one  set  of  instructions.     Hov/ever  illumi- 

'  A  beautiful  example  may  be  found  in  Dan  Lydgate's  legends  of  St.  Edmund  and  St.  Fremund, 
MS.  Harleian,  2278. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  J^ 

nated  manuscripts  may  differ  in  style  from  each  other,  according  to  the  countries 
in  which  they  may  have  been  produced,  the  technical  processes,  from  the  com- 
mencement of  the  15th  century,  scarcely  differed  at  all,  probably  through  the 
general  spread  of  these  "  handbooks  of  the  Middle  Ages." 

From  the  14th  century  onwards,  the  treatises,  or  rather  probably  composite 
transcripts  from  earlier  treatises,  multiply  greatly  ;  so  far,  however,  as  I  have  been 
able  to  make  out  from  the  able  analyses  made  by  Sir  C.  Eastlake,  Mr.  Hendrie, 
and  Mrs.  Merrifield,  of  many,  they  contain  little  more  information  than  is  conveyed 
in  the  extracts  already  given.  Some  curious  details,  however,  may  be  gathered  as 
to  the  London  practice  in  the  15  th  century,  which  may  interest  the  reader.  A 
manuscript,  written  in  German,  as  is  believed  at  that  date,  is  preserved  in  the 
public  library  at  Strasburg,  which  distinctly  proves  that  the  colours  for  illuminating 
were  commonly  preserved  by  steeping  small  pieces  of  linen  in  the  tinted  extracts, 
sometimes  mixed  with  alkaline  solutions.  The  process  is  minutely  described  in 
this  MS. ;  the  dyes  so  prepared  are  there  called  "  tiichlein  varvven,"  literally  "  cloth- 
let  colours."  The  following  passage  from  another  compendium,  a  Venetian  MS., 
gives  the  result  in  few  words  : — '*  When  the  aforesaid  pieces  of  cloth  are  dry,  put 
them  in  a  book  of  cotton  paper,  and  keep  the  book  under  your  pillow,  that  it  may 
take  no  damp ;  and  when  you  wish  to  use  the  colours,  cut  off  a  small  portion  [of 
the  cloth],  and  place  it  in  a  shell  with 'a  little  water,  the  evening  before.  In  the 
morning  the  tint  will  be  ready,  the  colour  being  extracted  from  the  linen."  This 
practice  is  alluded  to  by  Cennini,  when  he  says  : — "  You  can  shade  with  colours,» 
^and  by  means  of  small  pieces  of  cloth,  according  to  the  process  of  the  illumi- 
nators." 

The  German  compiler,  speaking  of  the  preparation  of  a  blue  colour  in  this 
mode,  says,  "  If  you  wish  to  make  a  beautiful  clothlet  blue  colour  according  to  the 
London  practice,"  &c.  After  describing  the  method  of  preparing  it,  he  adds  : — 
"  These  [pieces  of  cloth]  may  be  preserved  fresh  and  brilliant,  without  any  change 
in  their  tints,  for  twenty  years  ;  and  this  colour,  in  Paris  and  in  London,  is  called 
[blue]  for  missals,  and  here  in  this  country  clothlet  blue ;  it  is  a  beautiful  and  valu- 
able colour." 

"  The  place  denominated  Lampten^  mentioned  together  with  Paris^  can  be  no 
other  than  London."  ^ 

As  pursuing  the  subject  of  ancient  processes  further  than  I  have  now  done 
would  scarcely  be  profitable  to  the  student,  I  proceed  to  the  second  division  of 
this  part  of  my  subject,  and  accordingly  take  up  the  modem  processes.  In  offering 
the  following  details  on  this  subject,  however,  to  the  amateur's  attention,  I  would 
'not  for  one  moment  let  it  be  supposed  that  a  knowledge  of  them  alone  will  be 
sufficient  to  make  him  an  efficient  illuminator.  Fortunately  many  very  excellent 
artists  have  of  late  devoted  themselves  to  giving  instruction  in  the  practical  mani- 
pulation of  the  art,  and  amateurs  cannot  do  better  than  place  themselves  at  once  in 
communication  with  masters,  whose  addresses  may  be  obtained  at  the  shops  of  the 
principal  artists'  colourmen.  There  will  still  be,  no  doubt,  in  different  parts  of  the 
1  "  Materials  for  a  History  of  Oil-painting,"  by  Charles  Lock  Eastlake  (Lond.  1847),  pp. 
127,   128. 


74  THE  ART  OF  JLLUMINA7ING, 

country,  many  desirous  of  illuminating,  and  yet  unable  to  obtain  the  benefit  of 
seeing  a  practised  hand  work  before  them,  or  even  to  pick  up  information  as  to 
the  7nodtis  operandi.  To  such,  at  least,  the  following  observations  may  prove 
useful.^ 

The  two  great  sections,  into  which  all  the  processes  by  which  illumination  of 
any  kind  may  be  executed,  divide  themselves,  are — ist,  those  in  which  water  and 
glutinous  substances  soluble  in  water  form  the  vehicles  for  applying  the  pigments, 
and  causing  them  to  adhere  to  the  surfaces  on  which  they  may  be  applied  ;  and, 
andly,  those  in  which  oil  or  spirit,  and  resins,  or  other  substances  which  combine 
readily  with  such  fluids,  are  made  to  perform  corresponding  functions.  The  pig- 
ments, reduced  to  an  impalpable  powder,  are  the  same  in  both  classes  of  processes, 
which  are  commonly  known  as  watercolour-painting  and  oil-painting.  That  which 
was  of  old  the  artist's  greatest  stumbling-block — the  manufacture  and  preparation 
of  his  pigments,  need  now  no  longer  occasion  him  the  slightest  embarrassment ;  for 
every  colour  with  which  his  palette  could  be  enriched  is  to  be  bought,  ready 
prepared,  of  the  principal  artists'  colourmen.  In  like  manner  every  other  essential 
for  his  use  is  now  freely  at  his  command  ;  and  all  that  is  required  on  his  part  is 
knowledge  how  to  employ  the  materials  which  others  most  dexterously  and  carefully 
place  at  his  disposal. 

In  commencing  the  collection  of  that  information  which  I  am  now  endeavouring 
to  communicate,  I  felt  it  my  duty  to  enter  jnto  correspondence  with  all  those 
manufacturers  whose  products  I  had  at  different  times  personally  tested ;  and  I 
accordingly  addressed  myself  to  the  following,  whose  materials,  with  insignificant 
exceptions,  I  have  invariably  found  satisfactory,  both  in  nature  and  quality. 

R.  AcKERMAN,   191,  Regent-street,  W. 

L.  Barbe,  60,  Quadrant,  Regent-street,  W. 

J.  Barnard,  339,  Oxford-street,  W. 

Messrs.  Brodie  &  Middleton,  79,  Long-acre,  W.C. 

H.  Miller,  56,  Long-acre,  W.C. 

J.  Newman,  24,  Soho-square,  W. 

Messrs.  Reeves  &  Sons,  113,  Cheapside,  E.C. 

Messrs.  Roberson,  99,  Long-acre,  W.C. 

Messrs.  Rowney  &  Co.,  51,  Rathbone-place,  W. 

Messrs.   Sherborne  &  Tillyer,  321,  Oxford-street,  W. 

Messrs.  Winsor  &  Newton,  38,  Rathbone-place,  W. 

From  each  of  the  above-mentioned  firms  I  have  obtained  valuable  information, 
and  from  several,  excellent  samples  of  their  products.  I  am  glad,  therefore,  to  take 
the  present  opportunity  of  expressing  my  obligations  to  them.  From  Messrs. 
Winsor  &  Newton,  especially,  I  have  received  the  kindest  and  most  intelligent  co- 
operation ;  and  I  am  happy  to  be  the  channel  of  making  public  the  results  of  a 
series  of  experiments,  on  the  combinations  of  colours  and  the  use  of  various  mate- 
rials for  illuminating  purposes,  suggested  by  me,  and  made  with  great  tact  and 

'  Mr.  Edwin  Jewitt's  little  **  Manual  of  Illuminated  and  Missal  Painting,"  published  by 
Messrs.  Barnard,  of  Oxford-street,  and  Mr.  Noel  Humphrey's  hand-book  on  the  same  subject,  have 
no  doubt  proved  useful  to  many,  and  helped  to  produce  the  quantity  of  good  illumination  now 
executed, 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 


75 


judgment  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Winsor.  Messrs.  Winsor  &  Newton  and  Mr.  Barnard  have, 
up  to  the  present  time,  done  most  to  smooth  away  the  difficulties  which  beset  the 
illuminator.  Messrs.  Newman,  Messrs.  Rowney  &  Co.,  Messrs.  Reeves  &  Sons, 
and  Mr.  Barbe,  have  also  recently  contributed  valuable  improvements  or  special 
adaptations.^ 

The  colours  best  suited  for  illuminating  I  believe  to  be  as  follows  : 


B 

Lemon  Yellow    "^ 

A 

Gamboge 

A 

Cadmium  Yellow  

Mars  Yellow  

Yellow. 

B 

Rose  Madder I 

A 

Crimson  Lake 

C 
C 
A 

Carmine  

Orange  Vermilion  

Vermilion    

^      Red. 

A 

Cobalt ] 

A 

French  Blue 

i)i.i<a 

D 
D 
B 
C 
D 
A 
C 

Smalt   

Mars  Orange  -^ 

Burnt  Sienna  /      Orange. 

Burnt  Carmine   'j 

Indian  Purple /      Purple. 

Emerald  Green  -n 

Green  Oxide  of  Chromium   /      Green. 

B 
A 
A 

Vandyke  Brown 

Lampblack 

Chinese  White    

Brown. 

Black. 

White. 

These  colours  are  selected  from  the  list  of  water-colours  made  at  the  present 
day  (upwards  of  eighty),  and  will,  I  think,  be  found  to  be  all  that  can  well  be 
required  for  illuminating.  The  whole  number  is  by  no  means  indispensable,  and  I 
have  therefore  marked  by  different  letters  of  the  alphabet, — ist,  A,  those  without 
which  it  would  be  useless  to  commence  work  ;  2ndly,  B,  those  which  should  first 
be  added ;  3rdly,  C,  those  which  are  required  for  very  great  brilliancy  in  certain 
effects ;  and,  4thly,  D,  those  which  may  be  regarded  as  luxuries  in  the  art.  The 
C  are  really  important ;  the  D  are  much  less  so.  Messrs.  Winsor  &  Newton 
have  arranged  them  into  four  different  lists,  which  are  placed  in  boxes  (complete 
with  colours  and  materials  for  working  in  water-colours),  of  the  respective  retail 
values  of  £,\.  is.,  jQ\.  iis.  6d.,  jQz.  2S.,  and  jQ^i-  3^-  Boxes  corresponding 
with,  or  slightly  varying  from  these,  in  selection  .  of  colours  and  materials,  may  be 
obtained  from  other  artists'  colourmen. 


'  For  illumination  in  water-colour  on  paper,  cardboard,  or  vellum,  Messrs.  Winsor  &  Newton, 
Rowney,  Barnard,  Newman,  and  others,  fit  up  boxes  with  special  selections  of  all  requisite 
materials ;  including  all  that  can  be  wanted  for  the  application  and  burnishing  of  gold  and  other 
metals.  Messrs.  Miller's  "Glass  Mediums,  Nos.  i  and  2,"  and  Newman's  *'  Preparation  for  sizing 
albumenized  papers,"  are  exceedingly  useful  for  mixing  with  illuminating  colours  ;  giving  great 
hardness  and  body  to  them,  and  preventing  them  from  "  washing  up,"  in  working  over  with  glazing 
and  other  lints.  T  have  found  Mr,  Barbe's  powder  body-colours  give  remarkably  solid  tints,  with 
great  freedom  in  working. 


76  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMmATING. 

I  now  proceed  to  notice  these  colours  seriatim,  in  reference  to  tlieir  tints,  both 
when  used  alone  and  when  mixed  with  other  colours. 

YELLOWS. 

Lemon  YellcniK — A  vivid  high-toned  yellow,  semi-opaque,  is  extremely  telling  upon  gold. 
Mixed  with  cadmium  yellow  it  furnishes  a  range  of  brilliant  warm  yellows.  It  mixes  well  with 
gamboge,  orange  vermilion,  cobalt,  emerald  green,  and  oxide  of  chromium,  and  with  any  of  these 
produces  clean  and  useful  tints. 

Gamboge. — A  bright  transparent  yellow  of  light  tone  ;  works  freely,  and  is  very  useful  for 
glazing  purposes.  In  combination  witli  lemon-yellow  it  affords  a  range  of  clean  tints.  When 
mixed  with  a  little  Mars  yellow  it  produces  a  clear,  warm,  transparent  tone  of  colour. 

Cadmintn  Yellow.  — A  rich  glowing  yellow,  powerful  in  tint,  and  semi-transparent.  This  is  a 
most  effective  colour  for  illuminating.  When  judiciously  toned  with  white,  it  furnishes  a  series  of 
useful  shades.  Mixed  with  lemon-yellow  it  produces  a  range  of  clean  vivid  tints.  It  does  not, 
however,  make  good  greens — they  are  dingy.  Mixed  with  carmine,  or  glazed  with  it,  it  gives  a 
series  of  strong  luminous  shades. 

Mars  Yellotu. — A  semi-transparent  warm  yellow,  of  slightly  russet  tone,  but  clean  and  bright 
in  tint.  Useful  where  a  quiet  yellow  is  required  ;  mixes  well  with  gamboge;  does  not  make  good 
greens. 

REDS. 

Rose  Madder. — A  light  transparent  pink  colour  of  extremely  pure  tone.  It  is  delicate  in  tint, 
but  very  effective,  on  account  of  its  purity.  Mixed  with  cobalt,  it  affords  clean,  warm,  and  cold 
purples.  The  addition  of  a  little  carmine  materially  heightens  the  tone  of  this  colour,  though  at  the 
same  time  it  somewhat  impairs  its  purity. 

Crimson  Lake. — A  rich  crimson  colour,  clean  and  transparent;  washes  and  mixes  well. 
More  generally  useful  than  carmine,  though  wanting  the  intense  depth  and  brilliancy  of  the  latter 
coloux*. 

Carmine. — A  deep-toned  luminous  crimson,  much  stronger  than  crimson  lake.  Is  clean  and 
transparent.  The  brilliancy  of  this  powerful  colour  can  be  increased,  by  using  it  over  a  ground  of 
gamboge. 

Orange  Vermilion.  A  high-toned  opaque  red,  of  pure  and  brilliant  hue,  standing  in  relation  to 
ordinary  vermilion  as  carmine  to  crimson  lake.  It  is  extremely  eflFective,  and  answers  admirably 
where  vivid  opaque  red  is  required ;  it  works,  washes,  and  mixes  well.  Its  admixture  with  cad- 
mium results  in  a  fine  range  of  warm  luminous  tints.  When  mixed  with  lemon  yellow,  it  furnishes  a 
series  of  extremely  clean  and  pure  tints ;  when  toned  with  white,  the  shades  are  clear  and  effective. 
This  is  a  most  useful  colour. 

Vermilion. — A  dense  deep-toned  red,  powerful  in  colour,  and  opaque.  It  is  not  so  pure  in  tone 
as  orange  vermilion,  and  is  of  most  service  when  used  alone  ;  it  can,  however,  be  thinned  with 
white  and  with  yellows. 

BLUES. 

Cobalt  Blue. — A  light-toned  blue,  clean  and  pure  in  tint,  and  semi-transparent.  This  is  the 
lightest  blue  used  in  illuminating,  and  by  the  addition  of  white  can  be  "  paled"  to  any  extent,  the 
tints  keeping  clear  and  good.  Mixed  with  lemon  yellow,  it  makes  a  clean  useful  green.  Its 
admixture  with  gamboge  is  not  so  satisfactory,  and  the  green  produced  by  its  combination  with 
Mars  yellow  is  dirty  and  useless.  With  rose  madder  it  produces  middling  warm  and  cold  pui-ples 
(i.e.  marones,  and  lilacs  or  violets)  ;  with  crimson  lake,  strong  and  effective  ones;  with  cannine, 
ditto.  A  series  of  quiet  neutral  tints  can  be  produced  by  its  admixture  with  orange  vermilion.  The 
tints  in  question  are  clean  and  good,  and  might  occasionally  be  useful. 

French  Bhte. — A  deep  rich  blue,  nearly  transparent ;  is  the  best  substitute  for  genuine  ultra- 
marine. The  greens  it  makes  with  lemon  yellow,  gamboge,  cadmium,  and  Mars  yellow,  are  not 
veiy  effective  or  useful.     The  violets  and  marones  it  forms  with  rose  madder  are  granulous  and 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMLVA  TING.  77 

unsatisfactory ;  with  carmine  they  arc  somewhat  better ;  but  those  formed  with  crimson  lake  are 
very  good. 

Smalt. — A  brilliant,  full-toned  blue  ;  deep  in  tone,  and  nearly  transparent ;  luminous  and  very 
effective  when  used  alone.  It  is  granulous,  and  does  not  wash  or  mix  well.  The  greens  it  makes 
are  not  particularly  useful. 

ORANGES. 

Mars  Orange.— K  brilliant  orange  of  very  pure  tone,  transparent  and  ligliter  in  colour  than 
burnt  sienna ;  and  is  not  so  coarse  or  staring.     An  effective  and  useful  colour. 

Burnt  Sienna. — A  deep,  rich  orange,  transparent  and  effective  ;  works  well  and  mixes  freely. 

PURPLES. 

Indian  Purple— Kx\d\  deep-toned  violet,  or  cold  purple  colour;  most  effective  when  used 
alone.     Can  be  lightened  with  French  blue  or  cobalt,  and  the  tints  will  be  found  useful. 

Burnt  Carmine.— K  rich  deep-toned  marone  or  warm  purple  colour;  transparent  and  brilliant ; 
luminous  and  effective  when  used  alone ;  mixed  with  orange  vermilion,  it  produces  a  strong  rich 
colour,  and  a  quiet  fleshy  one  when  mixed  with  cadmium  yellow. 

GREENS. 

Emerald  Green. — An  extremely  vivid  and  high-toned  green,  opaque.  No  combination  of  blue 
and  yellow  will  match  this  colour,  which  is  indispensable  in  illuminating.  It  can  be  "paled  "  with 
white,  and  the  tints  thus  produced  are  pure  and  clean.  The  tints  afforded  by  its  admixture  with 
lemon-yellow  are  also  clear  and  effective. 

Green  Oxide  of  Chromium. — A  very  rich  deep  green,  opaque,  but  effective.  The  tone  of 
this  green  renders  it  extremely  useful  in  illuminating ;  mixed  with  emerald  green,  it  furnishes  a 
series  of  rich  semi-transparent  tints.  Mixed  with  lemon-yellow,  it  gives  quiet,  useful  shades  of 
green  ;  and  when  this  combination  is  brightened  with  emerald  green,  the  shades  are  luminous  and 
effective- 

BROWN. 

Vandyke  Bro7on. — A  deep,  rich,  transparent  brown,  luminous  and  clear  in  tint;  works,  washes, 
and  nlixes  well.     The  best  of  all  the  browns  for  illuminating. 

BLACK.' 

Lampblack. — The  most  dense  and  deep  of  all  the  blacks,  free  from  any  shade  of  brown  or 
grey. 

WHITE. 

Chinese  White. — A  preparation  of  oxide  of  zinc,  permanent,  and  the  white  best  adapted  for 
illuminating.  It  is  not  only  useful  per  se,  but  is  indispensable  for  toning  or  reducing  other 
colours. 

In  making  the  list  of  the  colours  just  described,  I  have  assumed  as  a 
sine  qua  /ion  that  the  colours  used  in  illuminating  should  be  permanent.  All 
those  enumerated  are  so  (in  water-colours),  with  the  exception  of  carmine  and 
crimson  lake  ;  and  these,  though  theoretically  not  permanent,  are  yet  found  in 
practice  to  be  7'ery  lasting,  especially  when  not  too  much  exposed  to  the  light.  It 
is  a  curious  fact,  that  crimson  lake,  though  a  weaker  colour  than  carmine,  is  yet 
more  permanent,  in  consequence  of  its  different  base,  and  that  it  will  better  stand 
exposure  to  light. 

I  here  take  the  opportunity  of  warmng  amateurs,  allured  by  their  evident 
brilliancy,  against  the  use,  in  illumination,  of  the  following  five  colours,  viz. — pure 


78  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

scarlet,  red  lead,  chrome  yellow,  deep  chrome,  and  orange  chrome.  None  of  these 
are  permanent ;  the  first-named  being  fugitive,  and  the  others  in  time  turning 
black  j  but  this  is  the  less  to  be  regretted,  as  there  are  permanent  colours  answer- 
ing equally  well  for  illumination.  Of  course,  these  are  less  fugitive  in  books,  which 
are  generally  protected  from  the  action  of  light  and  air,  than  they  would  be  in 
pictures. 

The  preceding  remarks  on  pigments  apply,  with  no  difference  worth  noting,  to 
colours  prepared  either  for  oil  or  for  water-colour ;  which  may  therefore  be  laid  on, 
by  varying  the  vehicle  for  their  proper  application,  to  the  surfaces  of  any  of  those 
materials  which  have  been  specified,  in  the  Second  Part  of  this  Essay,  as  available 
for  different  kinds  of  illumination.  I  now  proceed  to  notice  the  special  j^rocesses 
requisite  in  each  case,  commencing  with  those  which  may  be  best  employed  for 
vellum.  This  substance  consists  of  sheep-skin,  carefully  cleansed  and  scraped,  and 
repeatedly  washed  in  diluted  sulphuric  acid.  The  surface  is  rubbed  down  with 
fine  pumice-stone  to  a  smooth  face,  and  in  that  condition  it  is  fit  for  working  upon. 
It  is  sold,  prepared  for  use,  at  all  the  principal  shops.  If  it  has  not  been  pre- 
viously strained,  or  if  many  tints  are  likely  to  be  floated  over  the  surface,  it  will  be 
well  to  strain  it  down  upon  a  strainer  or  board  before  attempting  to  draw  upon  it. 
This  may  be  done  by  damping  the  vellum,  and  then  either  gluing  or  nailing  its 
edges  down.  When  dry,  it  will  be  found  to  lie  perfectly  flat  and  smooth.  It  may 
be  well,  then,  to  wash  it  over  with  a  dilute  preparation  of  ox-gall,  to  overcome  any 
possible  greasiness,  and  prepare  it  to  receive  colour  freely.  Mr.  Barnard,  and,  I 
beheve,  other  artists'  colourmen,  supply  vellum  mounted  in  block-books,  similar  to 
those  made  up  of  drawing-paper  for  sketching  on  ;  and  by  providing  himself  with 
one  of  those,  the  amateur  may  avoid  the  trouble  of  having  to  mount  his  own 
vellum. 

As  it  is  by  no  means  easy  to  remove  pencil-marks  from  vellum  (and  indeed 
it  is  never  wise  to  attempt  it,  for  the  black-lead  unites  with  the  animal  fat, 
which  can  never  be  entirely  got  out  of  the  material,  and  rubs  under  the  action  of 
India-rubber  or  bread  into  a  greasy  smudge),  it  is  always  well  to  set  out  the  design 
in  the  first  instance  upon  drawing-paper.  The  best  mode  for  good  work  is  to  com- 
plete the  outline  on  drawing-paper,  and  then  to  trace  it  carefully  with  a  hard  j^encil 
on  a  piece  of  tracing-paper,  about  one  inch  larger  each  way  than  the  entire  surface 
of  the  vellum  ;  then  cut  out,  the  exact  size  of  the  vellum,  a  piece  of  tracing  or 
tissue  paper,  rubbed  evenly  over  with  powdered  red  chalk.^  Lay  the  tracing  down 
(pencilled  side  upwards)  in  its  right  place  upon  the  vellum,  and  fasten  down  one 
edge  with  pins,  gum,  or  mouth-glue.  Then  slip  the  transfer-paper,  with  the  chalked 
side  downwards,  between  the  vellum  and  the  tracing  until  it  exactly  covers  the 
former — touching  the  back  of  the  transfer-paper  with  two  or  three  drops  of  gum  on 
its  margin.  Then  lay  the  tracing  over,  and  fasten  down  another  of  its  edges.  The 
gum  drops  will  prevent  the  transfer-paper  slipping  away  from  the  tracing-paper, 
when  the  drawing-board  or  strainer  is  placed  upon  a  sloping  desk  or  easel.  Taking 

*  This  had  better  be  bought  ready  pj-epared,  since  some  experience  is  requisite  in  so  applying 
the  red  chalk  as  to  prevent  its  depositing  under  the  weight  of  the  hand,  and  yet  coming  off 
sufficiently  in  the  line  traced  by  the  point. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  79 

care  to  keep  a  piece  of  stout  card  or  pasteboard  under  the  hand,  go  over  all  the  lines 
of  the  tracing  with  a  blunted  etching-point,  or  a  very  hard  pencil  cut  sharp.  This 
having  been  done,  on  removing  both  the  tracing  and  the  transfer-paper,  it  will  be 
found  that  a  clear  red  outline  has  been  conveyed  to  the  surface  of  the  vellum. 
At  this  stage  of  the  work,  as  nothing  dirties  more  readily  than  this  material,  it  will 
be  well  to  fasten  over  the  surface  a  clean  sheet  of  paper  with  a  flap  cut  in  it,  by 
raising  up  and  folding  back  portions  of  which,  the  artist  may  get  to  the  part  of 
the  surface  upon  which  he  may  desire  to  work  without  exposing  any  of  the  rest. 
As  the  effect  of  the  writing  on  the  page  gives  as  it  were  the  key-note  for  the  general 
effect  of  the  illuminated  ornaments,  it  will  be  well  to  complete  the  former  before 
proceeding  to  the  latter.^ 

If  the  lines  of  the  writing  fixed  upon  are  fine  and  delicate,  they  will  look  best, 
and  work  most  freely  with  Indian  ink ;  but  if  they  are  bold  and  solid,  involving 
some  extent  of  black  surface,  they  will  present  a  better  appearance  if  wrought  in 
lampblack  ;  the  principal  difference  between  the  two  being  that  Indian  ink  is  finer, 
and,  if  good,  always  retains  a  slight  gloss,  while  lampblack  gives  a  fuller  tint,  and 
dries  off  quite  mat,  or  with  a  dead  surface,  corresponding  with  that  of  most  other 
body-colour  tints  used  in  illuminating.  Great  care  must  be  taken  to  keep  the 
writing  evenly  spaced,  upright,  and  perfectly  neat,  as  it  is  almost  impossible  to  erase 
without  spoiling  the  vellum,  and  as  no  beauty  of  ornament  will  redeem  an  untidy 
text.  If  a  portion  of  the  writing  is  to  be  in  red,  it  should  be  in  pure  vermilion ;  and 
if  in  gold,  it  should  be  highly  burnished,  as  will  be  hereafter  directed.  The  writing 
being  satisfactorily  completed,  the  artist  may  proceed  to  lay  in  his  ground  tints, 
generally  mixing  them  with  more  or  less  white  to  give  them  body  and  solidity. 
Colours  prepared  with  water  are  best  adapted  for  illumination  on  vellum ;  and  those 
known  as  moist  colours  are  to  be  preferred  for  this  work,  as  they  give  out  a  greater 
volume  of  colour,  and  possess  more  tenacity  or  power  of  adhering  to  the  surface  of 
the  material  on  \vhich  they  are  used  than  the  dry  colours.  Of  moist  colours  there 
are  two  descriptions,  viz.,  solid  and  liquid  ;  and  of  these  I  give  the  preference  to  the 
former,  as  some  colours,  such  as  lemon-yellow  and  smalt,  will  not  keep  well  in  tubes; 
added  to  which,  there  is  waste  in  using  them  in  this  form  where  only  small  quan- 
tities are  required,  as  the  colour  cannot  be  replaced  in  the  tube  when  once  squeezed 
out.  The  tube  colours  possess,  however,  the  valuable  property  of  being  always 
clean  when  a  bit  of  pure  colour  is  required.  The  solid  moist  colours  are  apt  to  get 
dirtied  in  rapid  working,  and  occasionally  mislead  the  eye  which  is  not  quick  at 
detecting  a  lowered  tint.  Mr.  Barbe's  body-colours,  which  are  of  very  good  quality, 
are  prepared  in  powder,  combined  with  a  glutinous  substance,  on  moistening  which 
with  water,  the  tints  are  fit  for  application.  Messrs.  Winsor  &  Newton's  body- 
colours  are  also  very  excellent.  Flatness  of  tint  is  best  secured  by  using  the  first 
colour  well  mixed  with  body,  and  put  on  boldly  j  this  forms  the  brightest  tint ;  then 
shade  with  pure  transparent  colour,  and  finish  off  with  the  high  lights. 

Very  useful  models  have  been  prepared  by  Mr.  Barnard,  for  teaching  amateurs 

*  The  experienced  niumlnator  will  generally  do  his  writing  before  he  gets  in  the  outline  of  his 
ornament,  and  he  will  frequently  dispense  with  the  transferring  process  altogether;  but  it  would  be 
by  no  means  safe  for  a  beginnel-  to  do  so. 


So  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 

the  different  modes  of  shading,  &c.  They  consist  of  outline  plates  (the  first  series 
containing  the  Beatitudes  from  the  Gospel  of  St.  Matthew)  partially  coloured  by 
hand.  The  beginner  will  find  it  a  very  useful  exercise  to  complete  a  few  of  these 
before  trying  his  hand  upon  more  original  works  upon  vellum.  The  greatest  care 
must  be  taken  to  have  every  implement  perfectly  clean.  Experience  alone  can 
teach  the  artist  the  value  of  what  are  called  glazing  or  transparent  colours,  such 
as  the  lakes,  caraiine,  madders,  gamboge,  &c.  Some  tints  may  be  used  either  as 
glazing  colours  or  as  body-tints,  according  to  their  preparation^  and  according  to  the 
degree  of  thickness  with  which  they  are  applied.  As  a  general  principle,  all  shades 
should  be  painted  in  transparent  colour,  all  lights  in  opaque.  Reflected  lights  may 
often  be  best  given  by  scumbling  thin  body-colour  over  transparent  shade.  In  order 
to  prepare  the  tints  for  these  operations,  it  may  be  well  to  use  a  little  of  Newman's 
or  Miller's  preparations  with  them.  The  less  tints  are  retouched  after  the  first 
appHcation,  the  more  clear  and  brilliant  they  are  likely  to  remain.  Above  all  things 
never  let  the  paint-brush  go  near  the  mouth,  and  never  attempt  to  correct  or  retouch 
a  tint  while  it  is  in  process  of  drying,  as  doing  so  will  infaUibly  make  it  look  streaky 
and  muddy.  In  all  these  processes  of  manipulation,  however,  practice,  good 
example,  and  good  tuition,  must  teach  what  the  minutest  directions  would  fail  to 
satisfactorily  convey.  The  principal  colours  having  been  applied,  the  next  difficulty . 
will  be  to  heighten  them  with  gold  and  silver. 

The  principal  metallic  preparations  used  in  illumination  may  be  enumerated  as 
follows  : — gold  leaf,  gold  paper,  shell  gold,  saucer  gold,  gold  paint,  silver  leaf,  shell 
silver,  and  shell  aluminium.  Of  these,  the  leaves,  paper,  and  paint,  are  of  English, 
and  the  shells  and  saucers  of  French  manufacture.  Occasionally  gold  and  silver 
powder  and  German-metal  leaf  are  employed,  though  too  rarely  to  make  them  im- 
portant enough  to  claim  general  notice. 

The  first-mentioned  preparation  of  gold — gold  leaf — is  the  pure  metal  beaten 
into  very  thin  leaves,  generally  3I  inches,  3^  inches,  or  3!  inches  square ;  but  for 
illuminating  purposes  it  should  be  still  smaller — say  2  J  inches  square,  as  it  is  easier 
to  handle  than  a  larger  size.  For  the  same  reason  it  is  better  to  have  the  leaf 
doubly  as  thick  as  it  is  usually  beaten.  Gold  leaf  is  sold  in  "  books,"  each  of  which 
contains  twenty-five  gold  "  leaves,"  and,  for  ordinary  and  general  purposes,  it  is  by 
far  the  best  and  most  useful  metallic  preparation  ;  but  the  difficulty  of  handling  and 
laying  it  on  deters  amateurs  from  employing  it,  and  it  is  difficult  in  writing  to  furnish 
a  practical  description  of  the  modus  operandi.     The  following  is  the  usual  mode  : — 

"  Carefully  open  the  book  of  gold,  and  if  in  so  doing  you  disturb  the  leaf,  gently 
blow  it  down  flat  again.  If  a  whole  leaf  be  required,  take  a  rounded  '  tip,'  and 
quietly  so  place  it  on  the  leaf  that  the  top  of  the  tip  be  close  to  the  edge  of  the  leaf. 
In  so  doing,  the  sides  of  the  tip  will  be  brought  down  upon  the  side  edges  of  the 
leaf,  which  then  can  be  securely  taken  up  and  placed  where  required.  If  a  small 
piece  of  gold  leaf  only  be  wanted,  cautiously  take  up  a  leaf  from  the  book  by  passing 
a  '  gilder's  knife '  underneath,  and  place  it  on  a  '  gilder's  cushion; '  ^  lay  it  flat  with 
the  knife,  with  which  then  cut  the  piece  of  the  size  required.  If  when  you  have 
laid  gold  leaf  down  with  the  tip,  it  be  wrinkly,  blow  it  down  flat." 

'  Both  the  cushion  and  tip  will  be  described  in  detail  inider  the  head  of  Oil-gilding. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  '  8i. 

The  "  gilder's  tip  "  spoken  of  in  the  above  extract  is  a  very  thin  camel-hair  brush, 
and  for  unskilled  hands  a  semicircular  tip  is  to  be  preferred  to  one  of  the  ordinary 
form ;  as  with  it  a  leaf  of  gold  may  be  firmly  laid  hold  of,  balanced,  adjusted,  and 
placed,  without  needing  any  particular  knack.  For  long  narrow  pieces  of  gold,  the 
ordinary  gilder's  tip  is  probably  the  best. 

Gold  paper  consists  of  leaves  of  gold  placed  upon  thin  paper,  a  sheet  of  which, 
measuring  about  19  inches  by  i2|  inches,  requires  one  book  of  gold.  The  mat  or 
dead  gold  is  most  frequently  used  in  illumination ;  but,  when  required,  the  bright  or 
burnished  gold  can  be  procured.  Gold  paper  is  usually  plain  at  the  back,  and 
when  used,  is  required  to  be  gummed  on  to  the  work ;  but  it  is  far  better  to  have  it 
prepared  on  the  back  with  a  mixture  of  clear  glue,  sugar,  &c.,  which  can  be  laid  on 
evenly  and  thinly,  and  yet  is  very  strong.  Paper  thus  prepared  needs  only  to  have 
a  wet  flat  camel-hair  brush  passed  over  the  back ;  it  can  then  be  laid  down,  and  will 
adhere  very  firmly.  In  laying  down  gold  paper,  it  is  well  to  place  a  piece  of  white 
glazed  paper  on  its  face,  then  firmly  to  pass  over  it  the  edge  of  a  flat  rule,  in  order 
to  press  down  all  inequalities  and  render  the  surface  perfectly  smooth. 

Shell  gold  is^gold  powder  mixed  up  and  placed  in  mussel-shells  for  use.  It  is 
removed  from  the  shell  by  the  application  of  water,  like  moist  colours,  and  is 
adapted  for  small  work  and  fine  lines,  in  which  latter  case  a  quill  or  reed  pen  will  be 
found  useful.  When  the  work  is  dry,  the  gold  can  be  brightened  with  a  burnisher. 
Saucer  gold  only  differs  from  shell  gold  in  being  placed  in  china  saucers  instead 
of  shells. 

(jold  paint  is  a  preparation  of  bronze,  in  imitation  of  gold,  and  is  usually  sold 
in  two  bottles,  one  of  powder  and  the  other  of  liquid ;  which  two  ingredients,  when 
mixed  together,  form  the  "  paint,"  the  use  of  which  I  do  not  recommend,  as  in 
course  of  time  it  turns  black.  The  same  objection  unfortunately  applies  more  or 
less,  also,  to  the  preparations  of  silver,  which,  however,  are  still  occasionally  used 
in  illumination. 

Silver  leaf  is  made  in  the  same  manner  as  gold  leaf,  and  the  remarks  made  in 
reference  to  that  are  generally  applicable  to  silver  leaf. 

Shell  silver  is  not  really  silver,  but  an  amalgam  of  tin  and  mercury  prepared  and 
placed  in  mussel-shells,  and  used  with  water  in  the  same  way  as  gold  shells. 

Shell  aluminium  is  a  preparation  of  aluminium  placed  in  mussel-shells  for  use, 
and  is  warranted  to  keep  its  colour  without  tarnishing.  If  this  be  the  case,  it  will 
form  a  valuable  addition  to  the  list  of  materials  for  illumination,  as  it  will  be  the 
only  white  metal  known  that  can  be  depended  upon  for  not  tarnishing.  The  pre- 
paration is  at  present  a  new  one,  but  bids  fair  to  be  very  serviceable. 

Water-mat  gold  size  is  a  preparation  for  laying  down  gold  leaf,  /.  ^.,  causing  it 
to  adhere  to  a  given  surface.  The  mode  of  using  it  is  as  follows  : — Take  a  small 
brush  saturated  with  water,  and  thoroughly  charge  it  with  the  size.  With  the  brush 
so  charged,  trace  out  the  required  form  or  pattern,  and  upon  this  lay  the  gold  leaf, 
pressing  it  lightly  down  with  cotton-wool.  When  all  is  dry,  gently  rub  off"  the  super- 
fluous gold  with  cotton-wool. 

"  Burnish  gold  size  "  is  a  preparation  for  laying  down  the  gold  leaf  that  is  in- 
tended afterwards  to  be  Ijurnished  (/.  c,  polished  with  a  tooth  or  agate  burnisher). 


82  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

That  prepared  by  Messrs.  Winsor  and  Newton  niay  be  used  as  follows  : — Place  the 
bottle  in  warm  water  to  dissolve  its  contents,  which,  however,  must  not  be  allowed 
to  get  hot,  but  merely  be  made  liquid.  Stir  up  the  preparation  with  a  hogs-hair 
brushj  which  then  thoroughly  charge  with  the  mixture  \  with  it  trace  out  the  pattern 
required  to  be  burnished,  then  let  the  work  dry.  When  quite  dry,  let  the  surface 
of  the  pattern  be  wetted  with  clean  cold  water,  and  on  it  (while  damp)  place  the 
gold  leaf.  Let  all  get  perfectly  dry,  and  then  burnish  as  required.  When  a  very 
bright  surface  is  wanted,  two  coats  of  the  size  should  be  used  ;  the  second  being 
put  on  after  the  first  is  dry. 

The  "  raising  preparation  "  made  by  the  same  firm,  is  adapted  for  raising  the 
surface  of  the  work,  so  as  to  obtain  relief,  and  is  particularly  required  for  imitating 
rich  MSS.  of  the  14th  and  15th  centuries.  It  is  used  as  follows  : — Place  the  bottle 
in  hot  water,  and  when  its  contents  are  dissolved,  stir  it  well  up  with  a  small  hogs- 
hair  brush,  then  fully  charge  it,  draw  out  the  form  intended  to  be  raised,  and  de- 
posit the  "  raising "  on  the  surface.  If  the  height  thus  attained  be  not  sufficient, 
wait  till  the  preparation  is  dry,  and  go  over  it  again,  and  so  on  until  you  gain  the 
height  you  require,  when  it  must  be  allowed  to  become  quite  hard  ;  then  go  over  it 
with  the  v/ater-mat  gold  size,  and  while  this  is  wet  put  on  the .  gold  ;  press  gently 
down  with  cotton-wool,  and  when  dry  brush  off  the  superfluous  gold  with  cotton- 
wool ;  when  putting  on  the  "  raising,"  take  care  to  keep  the  surface  level,  unless  it 
may  be  required  to  be  holloAved  or  indented. 

Mr.  Barnard  has  also  prepared  a  gold  size  and  raising  preparation,  adapted  for 
laying  gold  on  vellum  or  paper,  which  answers  well  both  for  mat  and  burnish 
gilding.  The  mode  of  using  it  is  as  follows  : — Wash  a  little  of  the  gold  size  off  with  a 
brush  dipped  in  water,  using  it  thinly  for  the  flat  parts  of  your  design,  and  in  greater 
body  for  that  portion  of  the  drawing  which  you  wish  to  appear  raised  ;  after  allowing 
it  to  remain  for  a  few  minutes,  till  nearly  dry,  apply  the  gold,  and  press  it  down  with 
a  i^iece  of  cotton-wool.  It  must  now  remain  untouched  for  about  an  hour,  when 
the  superfluous  gold  may  be  removed  by  means  of  the  wool,  and  in  case  of  defect, 
the  gold  size  and  gold  must  be  again  applied. '  Preparations  of  a  somewhat  similar 
nature  are  sold  by  Messrs.  Rowney,  Newman,  and  other  artists'  colourmen.^ 

Very  pretty  effects  maybe  obtained  by  partial  burnishing  of  the  gold  in  patterns, 
and  dotting  it  over  with  the  point  of  the  sharp  burnisher  in  indentations,  arranged 
in  geometrical  fonns.  The  best  manuscripts  of  the  Edwardian  period  were  often 
highly  wrought  after  thi?  fashion. 

When  finished,  it  is  scarcely  necessary  to  recommend  that  the  vellum  sheet 
should  be  either  put  carefully  away  until  enough  of  others  corresponding  with  it 
are  done  to  make  up  a  volume,  or  should  be  glazed  so  as  to  protect  its  surface. 
One  dirty  or  greasy  finger  laid  upon  it,  and  the  effect  of  much  beautiful  work,  which 
may  have  taken  weeks  to  elaborate,  is  fatally  marred. 

*  The  amateur  may,  of  course,  prepare  mordants  of  different  degrees  of  tenacity  and  body  for 
his  own  use,  by  the  employment,  and  various  combinations,  of  leather  and  parchment  size,  isinglass, 
red  lead,  gum  arabic,  sugar,  honey,  glycerine,  borax,  bol  ammoniac,  glaire,  and  similar  substances ; 
but  his  time  will  be  more  profitably  spent  in  improving  himself  in  design  than  it  could  be  (nowadays) 
in  experimenting  on  the  "materia  technica  "  of  art. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING.  83 

All  the  above  instructions  apply  as  well  for  working  on  paper  or  cardboard  as 
on  vellum.  The  amateur  Avho  has  once  succeeded  on  vellum,  is  not  likely  to  take 
again  to  the  humbler  practice  of  working  on  the  less  noble  materials,  which,  how- 
ever, will  always  be  exceedingly  useful  for  practising  and  sketching  upon.  I  have 
occasionally  seen  printed  volumes  gracefully  illustrated  by  hand  with  borders,  and 
with  elegant  inventions,  in  the  form  of  head  and  tail  pieces,  insertions,  &c.,  appli- 
cable to  the  subject  of  the  volume.  Many  of  the  works  of  old  English  authors  are 
peculiarly  suited  for  this  class  of  embellishment.  How  beautiful  might  not  a 
Walton's  *' Angler"  or  a  Bunyan's  ''Pilgrim's  Progress"  be  made  if  appropriately 
enriched  in  this  style  ! 

Tracing-paper,  and  the  facilities  it  offers  to  those  little  gifted  with  talents  for 
drawing,  I  have  already  noticed.  It  remains,  however,  to  observe,  that  it  possesses 
an  additional  practical  convenience  in  being  ready  for  taking  colour,  either  with  oil, 
water,  or  varnish,  as  vehicles,  without  the  previous  application  of  any  special 
preparation.  Hence  it  may  be  fastened  up  when  completed,  either  by  pasting  as 
ordinary  paper,  by  gluing,  if  for  attachment  to  wood,  or  by  paying  over  the  back 
with  boiled  oil  and  copal  varnish,  or  with  white  lead  ground  in  oil  with  some 
litharge,  and  then  pressing  do^vn  until  it  may  be  made  to  lie  perfectly  flat  and 
adhere  to  any  surface  previously  painted  in  oil-colour.  Being  very  thin,  its  edges 
will  scarcely  show  at  all,  even  if  applied  to  the  middle  of  a  flat  panel  \  but,  to  make 
sure,  it  is  always  well  to  run  a  line  with  a  full  brush  of  thick  colour,  either  in 
oil  or  distemper,  over  the  edge,  extending  for  one  half  of  its  width  upon  the  tracing- 
paper,  and  for  the  other  half  upon  the  surface  to  which  it  may  have  been  applied. 

Of  the  remaining  materials  on  which  illumination  for  the  decoration,  not  of 
books  but  of  apartments,  may  be  readily  executed,  canvas,  stone,  metal,  and  wood, 
are  generally  wrought  upon  by  the  ordinary  processes  of  oil-painting  \  while  plaster, 
especially  in  the  form  of  ceilings,  is  more  frequently  treated  by  means  of  distemper- 
painting.  I  propose,  therefore,  to  give,  firstly,  some  general  directions  as  to  setting 
out  work,  &c.,  applicable  to  both  methods ;  secondly,  a  notice  of  the  processes 
generally  required  for  oil-colour  illumination ;  thirdly,  a  brief  description  of  the 
mode  of  working  in  distemper;  and  fourthly,  to  wind  up  with  some  instructions 
as  to  the  application  of  varnish  which  may  be  employed  to  heighten  and  preserve 
illumination  executed  by  either  of  the  above  methods. 

The  operation  of  setting  out  lines  upon  walls  or  other  surfaces  is  by  no 
means  easy.  It  involves  care  and  judgment,  a  quick  eye,  and  a  very  steady 
hand.  It  is  the  indispensable  preliminary  before  ornamental-work  or  illumina- 
tion can  be  executed,  as  it  can  alone  correctly  give  the  forms  of  panels,  bor- 
ders, &c.,  for  which  cartoons  may  have  to  be  prepared.  Lines  may  be  either 
drawn  with  pencil,  or  prepared  charcoal  or  chalk,  or  else  struck  by  means  of  a  ^ 
chalked  string.  For  lines  which  are  vertical,  a  weight  called  a  plumb-bob  must  be 
attached  to  one  end  of  the  string.  The  best  shape  for  this  is  that  of  half  an  ^gg., 
as  the  flat  side  will  then  lie  close  to  the  wall.  Two  persons  are  required  in  setting 
out  these  lines, — one  working  above  and  the  other  below.  The  one  at  the  top 
matks  the  points  at  the  distance  each  line  is  required  to  be  from  others.  The  string 
being  chalked  either  black  or  white, — according  as  the  line  has  to  show  upon  a 

G  2 


84  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

light  or  dark  ground, — he  holds  it  to  one  of  the  points,  and  lets  fall  the  weighted 
end,  which,  when  quite  steady,  the  person  who  is  below  strains  tight,  and  raising 
the  string  between  his  finger  and  thumb  in  the  middle,  lets  it  fall  back  sharply  on 
the  wall.  The  result,  if  carefully  executed,  is  a  perfectly  straight  and  vertical  line. 
The  horizontal  lines  require  to  be  drawn  with  a  straight-edge  or  ruler,  and  may  be 
either  set  out  at  a  true  right  angle  to  the  vertical  lines  geometrically  by  the  inter- 
section of  arcs  of  circles,  or  by  a  large  square,  or  may  be  defined,  irrespectively  of 
mathematical  correctness,  by  measuring  up  or  down  from  a  ceiling  or  floor  line. 
The  distances  apart  are  as  before  measured  out,  but  in  long  lines  must  be  marked 
as  many  times  as  the  length  of  the  straight-edge  may  require.  This  being  set  at 
each  end  to  the  points  marked,  the  line  is  drawn  along  it.  Circles  and  curved  lines 
may  be  struck  from  their  proper  centres  with  large  wooden  compasses,  one  leg 
carrying  a  pencil.  Drawing  lines  with  the  brush  requires  great  practice.  A  straight- 
edge is  placed  upon  the  chalk  lines,  with  the  edge  next  the  line  slightly  raised,  and 
the  brush,  well  filled  with  colour,  drawn  along  it,  just  touching  the  wall,  the  pressure 
being  never  increased,  and  the  bmsh  refilled  whenever  it  is  near  failing ;  but  great 
care  must  be  taken  that  it  be  not  too  full,  as  in  that  case  it  will  be  apt  to  blotch 
the  line,  or  drop  the  colour  upon  the  lower  portions  of  the  wall.  Drawing  lines  in 
colour  overhead  upon  a  ceiling  is  even  more  difiicult,  and  is  beyond  the  capabilities 
of  most  amateurs. 

The  patterns  of  ornament  are  executed  either  by  means  of  stencils  cut  in  oiled 
paper,  according  to  the  method  which  will  be  next  described,  or  else  by  pounces, 
which  are  the  full-sized  drawings  pricked  along  all  the  lines  with  a  needle  upon  a 
flat  cushion  ;  powdered  charcoal,  tied  up  in  a  cotton  bag,  is  then  dabbed  upon  the 
paper  which  has  been  set  up  on  the  wall,  or  else  the  back  is  rubbed  over  with 
drawing-charcoal  and  brushed  well  with  a  flat  brush,  like  a  stone  brush.  In  both 
cases  the  result  is  that  the  dust  passes  on  to  the  walls  through  the  pricked  holes, 
and  forms  are  thus  sufficiently  indicated  to  the  painter. 

StenciUing  is  a  process  by  which  colour  is  applied  through  interstices  cut  in  a 
prepared  paper,  by  dabbing  with  a  brush.  The  design  to  be  stencilled  is  drawn 
upon  paper  which  has  been  soaked  with  linseed  oil  and  well  dried.  The  pattern 
is  then  cut  out  with  a  sharp  knife  upon  a  sheet  of  glass,  care  being  taken  to  leave 
such  connections  as  will  keep  the  stencil  together.  The  next  tint  is  then  to  be 
laid  on  in  the  same  manner,  and  so  on  till  the  darkest  tint  is  done,  each  tint  being 
allowed  to  dry  before  a  second  is  applied. 

I  do  not  purpose  dwelling  in  detail  on  the  preparation,  or  "bringing  forward," 
as  it  is  called,  of  surfaces  to  receive  oil-colour  j  since,  for  such  mechanical  work,  it 
will  be  always  well  to  employ  a  good  house-painter.  I  may  observe,  however,  that 
the  first  operation,  where  the  surface  is  absorbent,  is  to  stop  the  suction,  either  by 
a  plentiful  application  of  boiled  oil  alone,  boiled  oil  and  red  lead,  or  size.  Several* 
successive  coats  of  paint  should  then  be  applied,  and  in  order  to  obtain  smooth- 
ness, the  surface  of  each  should  be  well  rubbed  down.  The  last  coat  should  be 
mixed  with  turpentine,  and  no  oil,  in  order  to  kill  the  gloss,  or,  as  it  is  termed, 
to  "  flat "  the  surface.  For  most  decoration  and  illumination  the  work  should  be 
brought  forward   in  white,  as,  by  shining  partially  through  most  of  the  pigments 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING,  8$ 

ultimately  applied,  it  will  greatly  add  to  their  brilliancy.  Zinc  white  will  stand 
much  better  than  white  lead.  Messrs.  Roberson,  of  Long  Acre,  prepare  an 
excellent  wax  medium,  which  dries  with  a  perfectly  dead  encaustic  surface,  and 
answers  admirably  for  mural-painting  of  all  kinds.  I  caused  it  to  be  employed  for 
all  the  decoration  executed  under  my  direction  at  the  Sydenham  Crystal  Palace. 
Miller's  glass  medium  will  also  be  found  very  useful  to  artists  and  amateurs.  In 
laying  on  all  ground  tints,  great  care  should  be  taken  to  keep  them  flat ;  and  the 
less,  as  a  general  rule,  tints  are  mixed,  worked  over  and  over,  and  messed  about, 
the  brighter  they  will  be.  The  principal  colours  having  dried,  the  setting  out  of 
the  lettering,  (Sec,  may  be  proceeded  with  ;  the  following  directions  being  duly 
attended  to. 

The  Setting-out  of  Letters} 

In  regard  to  the  proportion  of  Roman  capital  letters,  it  may  be  taken  as  a 
general  rule,  that  the  whole  of  the  letters,  with  the  exception  of  S,  J,  I,  F,  M,  and 
N,  are  formed  in  squares.  The  top  and  bottom  of  the  letters  should  project  tlie 
width  of  the  thick  line.  The  letters  I  and  J  are  formed  in  a  vertical  parallelogram, 
half  the  width  of  the  square  ;  the  letters  M  and  N  in  a  horizontal  parallelogram, 
one-third  larger  than  the  square.  The  letters  A,  B,  E,  F,  H,  X,  and  Y,  are  either 
divided,  or  have  projections  from  the  middle.  This  rule  may  be  varied,  and  the 
division  placed  nearer  the  top  than  the  base  of  the  square.  Capitals  in  the  same 
word  should  have  a  space  equal  to  half  a  square  between  them  ;  at  the  beginning 
of  a  word,  a  whole  square,  and  between  the  divisions  of  a  sentence  two  squares 
should  be  left. 

This  is  the  general  rule  for  the  proportions  of  the  letters  ;  but  they  may  be 
made  longer  or  wider,  as  may  be  deemed  expedient. 

The  small  letters  are  half  the  size  of  the  capitals ;  the  long  lines  of  the  letters 
b,  d,  f,  h,  k,  and  I,  are  the  same  height  as  the  capitals ;  the  tails  of  j,  p,  q,  and  y, 
descending  in  like  proportion.  The  letter  s  is  founded  on  the  form  of  two  circles, 
at  a  tangent  to  each  other.  These  rules  are  applicable  to  sloping  as  well  as  to 
upright  letters.  In  italic  letters  it  is  usual  to  make  the  capitals  three  times  the 
height  of  the  smaller  letters,  and  the  long  strokes  of  the  small  letters  nearly  equal 
to  the  capitals. 

The  letters  having  been  duly  set  out,  and  painted  on  the  walls,  the  amateur 
must  next  either  himself  encounter,  or  employ  some  experienced  hand  to  overcome, 
the  technical  difficulties  of  successfully  gilding  those  portions  of  his  work  he  may 
desire  to  remain  in  gold.  The  following  directions  may  assist  him  ;  but  he  is  not 
likely  to  succeed  until  practice  shall  have  given  him  considerable  dexterity  and 
confidence : — 

Gilding  for  Walls,  6^^. 

The  implements  with  which  the  gilder  should  provide  himself  are  not  numerous, 
nor  are  they  expensive,  as  they  consist  merely  of  a  cushion  of  particular  form,  a 
knife  for  cutting  the  gold  leaf,  a  tip  for  transferring  it,  and  a  cotton  ball  or  pad  for 

*  This  information  is  principally  derived  from  Nathaniel  WhittoQk's  "Decorative  Painter's  and 
Glazier's  Guide," 


86  THE   ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

pressing  it  down  ;  these  and  a  few  brushes  are  all  the  requisites,  with  the  addition 
of  an  agate  burnisher  when  burnish  gilding  is  desired. 

The  cushion  is  a  species  of  palette  made  of  wood,  about  nine  by  six  inches, 
having  on  the  upper  surface  a  covering  of  leather  stuifed  with  wool,  and  on  the 
under  side  a  loose  band,  through  which  the  thumb  being  passed,  the  cushion  is 
kept  firmly  resting  on  the  left  hand.  To  prevent  the  gold  flying  off  (for,  being 
extremely  light,  this  veiy  readily  takes  place),  a  margin  of  parchment  is  fixed  on 
the  edge  of  the  cushion,  rising  about  three  inches,  and  enclosing  it  on  three  sides. 
The  knife  very  much  resembles  a  palette-knife,  the  blade  is  about  four  inches  long 
and  half  an  inch  wide,  perfectly  straight,  and  cutting  on  one  edge  only. 

The  "tip"  is  the  brush  with  which  the  gold  leaf  is  applied.  It  is  formed  by 
placing  a  Hne  of  badger-hair  between  two  thin  pieces  of  cardboard,  and  is  generally 
about  three  inches  wide.  The  "  dabber  "  is  merely  a  pinch  of  cotton-wool,  lightly 
tied  up  in  a  piece  of  very  soft  rag,  or,  what  is  better,  the  thin  silk  called  Persian. 
It  is  often  used  without  covering,  but  is  then  very  apt  to  take  up  the  uncovered 
gold-size,  and  %o  to  soil  the  leaf  already  laid  down.  Camel-hair  brushes  are  useful 
for  intricate  parts,  and  for  cleaning  off  the  superfluous  gold  a  long-haired  brush, 
called  a  "  softener,"  is  requisite. 

There  should  be  also  at  hand  a  small  stone  and  muUer  (these  are  also  made  in 
glass,  which  are  cleaner)  for  grinding  up  the  oil  and  gold-size. 

The  operator,  having  stocked  himself  with  the  above  tools,  may  now  proceed 
to  lay  the  gold  leaf  upon  the  work  he  desires  to  gild.  There  are  tvv^o  methods  of 
doing  this,  known  in  the  trade  as  "  Oil-gilding "  and  "  Water-gilding ; "  .and  so 
called  from  the  composition  of  the  size  which  serves  as  a  vehicle  for  making 
the  gold  leaf  adhere  to  the  work. 

The  following  is  the  usual  process  in  oil-gilding  :— This  method  costs  less  and  will  wear  much 
lietter  than  water-gilding,  which  will  be  presently  described ;  but  has  not  its  delicate  appearance 
and  finish,  nor  can  it  be  burnished  or  brightened  up.  Though  the  oil  gold-size  can  always 
be  purchased  of  good  quality,  it  may  be  well  to  describe  the  fat  oil  of  which  it  is  principally 
composed. 

Linseed  oil,  in  any  quantity,  is  exposed  during  the  summer  in  the  open  air,  but  as  much  away 
from  dust  as  possible,  for  about  two  months,  during  which  time  it  must  be  often  stirred,  and  it  will 
become  as  thick  as  treacle.  It  is  a  good  practice  to  pour  into  the  pot  a  quantity  of  water,  so  that 
the  oil  may  be  lifted  from  the  bottom  of  it,  as  all  the  impurities  of  the  oil  sink  into  the  water,  and 
do  not  again  mix  when  it  is  stirred.  When  of  the  consistency  above  mentioned,  the  oil  is  separated 
from  the  water,  and  being  put  into  a  bottle,  is  subjected  to  heat  till  it  becomes  fluid  again,  when 
all  remaining  impurities  will  sink,  and  the  oil,  being  carefully  poured  off  from  the  sediment,  forms 
what  is  termed  * '  fat  oil. "  The  gilder  commences  by  priming  the  work,  should  it  not  have  been 
painted,  using  for  the  purpose  a  small  portion  of  yellow  ochre  and  vennilion,  mixed  with  drying 
oil.  When  this  is  quite  dry,  a  coat  of  the  oil  gold-size,  compounded  with  the  fat  oil  just  described, 
japanners'  gold-size,  and  yellow  ochre,  is  laid  on,  and  when  this  is  perfectly  dr>',  a  second  should  be 
given,  or  even  a  third.  A  superior  finish  is  produced  by  going  over  the  work,  before  using  the  size, 
with  Dutch  rushes  or  fish-skin,  which  gives  a  finer  surface  to  it.  After  the  last  coat  of  size  is 
applied,  the  work  must  lie  left  for  about  a  day,  to  set,  taking  care  to  keep  it  from  dust  ;  and  the 
proper  state  for  receiving  the  gold  leaf  is  known  by  touching  the  size  with  the  finger,  when  it  should 
be  just  "tacky,"  that  is  adhesive,  without  leaving  the  ground  on  which  it  has  been  laid. 

The  gilder  then,  taking  on  his  left  hand  his  cushion,  transfers  to  it  the  gold  leaves  from  the 
books  in  which  they  are  purchased.     This  is  not  very  easy  to  a  beginner,   as  the  gold  cannot  be 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 


'-1 


touched  except  by  the  knife.  Gilders  manage  it  by  breathing  under  the  leaf  in  the  direction  it  is 
desired  to  send  it,  and  flatten  it  on  the  cushion  by  the  same  gentle  blowing  or  breathing.  It  is  now 
cut  to  the  required  shape,  and  applied  to  the  sized  surfaces  by  means  of  the  tip,  which,  if  drawn 
across  the  hair  or  face  each  time  it  is  used,  will  slightly  adhere  to  the  gold.  The  whole  leaves  are 
sometimes  transferred  from  the  books  to  the  work  at  once ;  and  when  there  is  much  flat  space  it 
facilitates  the  process.  As  the  leaves  are  laid  on  the  size,  they  are  pressed  gently  down  with  the 
cotton  ball,  or  in  sunken  parts  with  camel-hair  brushes  j  and  when  perfectly  dry,  the  loose  leaf  is 
removed  by  gently  brushing  over  the  woi-k  with  the  softener,  when,  if  there  should  be  found  any 
places  ungilt,  such  spots  are  touched  with  japanners'  gold-size,  and  the  leaf  applied  as  before.  The 
process  of  oil-gilding  is  then  complete. 

Water  or  buniish-gilding  differs  from  the  former  in  the  use  of  parchment  instead  of  oil  size,  and 
has  received  its  name  from  being  moistened  with  water  in  rendering  the  size  adhesive,  and  also  from 
•  its  fitness  for  burnishing.  Its  superior  beauty,  however,  is  balanced  by  its  being  less  durable  than 
oil-gilding,  and,  unlike  the  latter,  unfit  to  be  exposed  to  damp  air ;  it  is  therefore  only  used  for 
indoor  work  or  ornamentation.  The  parchment  size  is  made  by  boiling  down  slips  of  parchment  or 
cuttings  of  glovers'  leather,  till  a  strong  jelly  be  formed,  the  proportions  being  one  pound  of  cuttings 
to  six  quarts  of  water,  which  must  be  boiled  till  it  shrinks  to  two  quarts.  While  hot,  the  liquid 
should  be  strained  through  flannel ;  and  when  cold,  the  jelly  required  will  be  fit  for  use. 

The  work  to  be  gilded  will  require  several  coats  of  composition  :  the  first,  or  priming  coat,  is 
made  of  size  thinned  with  water,  and  a  little  whiting ;  with  this  the  work  is  brushed  over,  using  a 
thicker  mixture  when  there  are  defects  which  need  to  be  stopped.  Successive  coats  are  then  laid  on, 
to  the  number  of  seven  or  eight,  and  the  last,  being  moistened  with  water,  is  worked  over  and 
smoothed  on  the  plain  parts  with  Dutch  rushes.  After  this  is  completed,  a  coating  is  laid  on,  com- 
posed of  bol  ammoniac  I  pound,  black  lead  2  ounces,  ground  up  on  the  stone  witli  2  ounces  of 
olive  oil.  This  is  one  out  of  many  receipts  ;  all,  however,  are  diluted  for  use  with  parchment  size, 
warmed  up  with  two-thirds  water,  and  forming  what  is  called  water  gold-size.  Two  coats  of  this 
should  be  laid  on ;  the  part  about  to  be  burnished  should  then  be  again  rubbed  with  a  soft  cloth 
till  quite  even,  and  care  taken  that  each  coat  be  perfectly  dry  before  the  subsequent  one  be  laid  on. 
The  work  is  now  moistened  in  successive  portions  with  a  camel-hair  brush  and  water,  and  while 
moist  covered  with  gold  leaf  in  precisely  the  same  manner  as  described  in  the  directions  for  oil- 
gilding,  great  caution  being  observed  in  order  to  avoid  wetting  the  leaf  already  laid  down,  as  a 
discoloration  would  be  the  result.  The  work  is  now  left  for  about  four-and-twenty  hours,  when 
the  parts  which  are  to  be  burnished  may  be  tried  in  two  or  three  places.  Care  should  be  taken  not 
to  let  the  work  get  too  dry,  as  in  that  case  it  would  require  more  burnishing,  and  yet  not  give  a  good 
result.  This  state  is  known  by  its  polishing  slowly,  and  if  it  be  too  wet  it  will  peel  off;  but  should 
the  places  where  the  trials  are  made  all  polish  quickly  and  evenly,  the  work  may  then  be 
finished ;  for  which  purpose  agates  cut  in  proper  forms  and  set  into  handles,  are  sold  at  the  artists' 
colour-shops.  • 


*  Japanners'  gilding  is  a  branch  of  oil-gilding, 
the  size  or  ground  being  made  with  i  pound  of 
linseed  oil,  to  which,  while  boiling,  is  added 
gradually  4  ounces  of  gum  animi  in  powder, 
the  whole  being  stirred  until  the  gum  is  com- 
pletely dissolved,  and  kept  boiling  till  the 
mixture  is  of  a  thick  consistence,  in  which 
state  it  should  be  strained  through  a  thick 
flannel,  and  stored  in  a  wide-mouthed  stop- 
pered bottle.  Vermilion  is  ground  up  with  the 
size  before  it  is  applied,  to  render  it  opaque  ; 
and  if  it  does  not  leave  the  brush  freely,  it 
should  be  thinned  with  oil  of  turpentine. 

The  gold  powder  may  be  either  real  gold,  or 
what  is  called  Dutch  metal,  or  imitation  gold. 


Gold  powder  is  produced  by  grinding  the  leaf 
gold  with  pure  honey  on  the  stone  till  it  is 
perfectly  reduced  to  powder,  and  afterwards 
dissolving  the  mixture  in  water  till  the  honey 
is  completely  removed,  and  for  this  several 
waters  are  necessary ;  the  water  is  then  poured 
off,  and  the  powder  dried.  If  this  gold  be 
mixed  up  with  weak  gimi-water  and  spread 
upon  cockle-shells,  it  is  then  called  shell-gold, 
which  is  used  in  drawings  only. 

The  Dutch  gold  powder  is  made  by  reducing 
the  Dutch  leaf  gold  by  exactly  the  same  pro- 
cess ;  and  if  well  protected  by  varnishing,  its 
appearance  is  little  inferior  to  the  genuine 
metal.     There  is  another  method  of  procuring 


88 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 


The  gilding  satisfactorily  accomplished,  the  artist  or  amateur  has  only  to  add 
the  finishing  tints  and  touches  to  his  work,  and  then  either  to  leave  it  alone  or  to 
varnish  it,  in  accordance  with  the  directions  which  will  be  given  presently.  If  the 
work  has  been  executed  on  canvas,  it  will  remain  only  to  apply  it  to  the  surface  for 
which  it  may  have  been  destined.  This  may  be  done  by  painting  that  surface 
with  thick  white  lead,  in  two  or  three  coats,  and  by  also  similarly  painting  the  back 
of  the  canvas.  The  latter  being  then  pressed  evenly  down  upon  the  former,  while 
the  white  lead  upon  both  is  still  tacky,  and  left  for  a  few  days,  will  be  found  to 
have  attached  itself  with  the  greatest  tenacity.  Scrolls  and  panels  cut  out  of  zinc 
sheets  may  be  painted  upon  just  as  though  they  were  cut  out  of  canvas,  and  may 
be  fixed  in  their  places  by  nails  or  screws.  In  illuminating  on  wood,  pretty  effects 
may  be  obtained  by  varnishing  partially  with  transparent  colours,  such  as  the  lakes, 
umber,  Prussian  blue,  burnt  sienna,  &c.,  so  as  to  allow  the  grain  of  the  wood  to 
show  through, — restricting  the  use  of  opaque  colour  and  gilding  to  a  few  brilliant 
points. 

Distempering  is  a  method  of  colouring  walls  and  ceilings,  in  which  powder 
colour,  ground  up  in  water,  and  mixed  with  sufficient  size  to  fix  the  colour,  is  used 
instead  of  paint  made  with  oil.  The  most  simple  employment  of  distemper  is  in 
whitening  ceilings,  but  it  is  also  very  much  used  in  theatrical  decoration  and 
scene-painting  ;  the  rooms  are  sometimes  so  ornamented,  the  process  being  much 
less  expensive  than  oil-painting.  The  foundation  of  all  the  colours  is  whiting, 
which,  having  been  set  to  soak  in  water,  and  break  up  of  itself,  is  (when  the  top 
water  is  poured  off)  in  a  fit  state  for  use ;  common  double  size  is  then  added,  with 
as  much  of  the  colour  as  will  make  the  desired  tint ;  but  as  this,  when  dry,  will  be 


gokl  powder,  which  is  by  precipitating  grain 
gold  into  powder  by  means  of  aqua  regia, 
which  is  made  by  dissolving  four  parts  of  pure 
spirit  of  nitre  and  one  part  of  sal  ammoniac  in 
powder.  This  process  was  (as  has  been  already 
stated)  well  known  to  the  medireval  illumi- 
nators. In  4  ounces  of  this  compound,  \  an 
ounce  of  grain  gold  is  dissolved  under  the 
action  of  a  slight  heat ;  a  solution  of  green 
vitriol,  consisting  of  copperas  i  dram,  water  i 
ounce,  being  gradually  added.  When  the  pre- 
cipitation has  ceased,  the  gold  powder  must 
be  carefully  washed  and  dried,  and  will  be 
found  to  be  more  brilliant  than  that  made  from 
leaf  gold.  The  use  of  japanners'  gold-size 
is  very  similar  to  oil-gilding,  and  is  equally 
simple.  If  the  material  to  be  gilded  is  brought 
to  a  smooth  and  clean  face,  the  size  may  be 
laid  on  at  once  without  other  preparation  ; 
using  great  care,  however,  not  to  touch  any 
part  but  what  you  wish  to  gild,  as  the  gold  will 
adhere  wherever  there  is  size.  Priming  with  a 
mixture  of  chalk  and  size  is  sometimes  used  for 
a  first  coat,  but  not  by  the  best  japanners,  as 


the  work  is  liable  to  chip  off;  no  material 
should  therefore  be  japanned  which  cannot  be 
made  smooth.  For  hard  or  close-grained  wood, 
metal,  leather,  or  paper,  one  or  two  coats  of 
varnish  will  answer  all  requirements ;  very 
great  care  being  observed  that  each  coat  of 
varnish  be  perfectly  dry  and  hard  before  it 
is  again  touched.  It  is  a  good  practice  to  allow 
the  work  to  stand  a  day  or  two  between  the 
applications  ;  then  the  japanners'  gold-size  may 
be  added,  and  touching  with  the  finger  as 
before  described  will  indicate  the  proper  state 
for  applying  the  gold,  whether  in  leaf  or 
powder.  Either  may  be  employed ;  but  in  the 
case  of  colours  being  intermixed  and  sub- 
sequently vaniished,  the  powder  is  usually 
adopted ;  it  is  easily  laid  on  by  means  of  a 
camel-hair  brush,  the  work  being  set  aside  to 
get  thoroughly  dry,  when  the  superfluous  metal 
is  removed  with  a  soft  brush.  In  case  more 
size  should  have  been  prepared  than  is  needed, 
the  remainder,  if  water  be  poured  over  it,  will 
keep  for  future  use. 


THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING, 


89 


many  shades  lighter  than  it  appears  when  wet,  trials  should  be  made  on  paper,  and 
dried  by  the  fire  till  the  colour  required  be  attained.  A  gentle  heat  is  required  for 
melting  the  size..  Old  walls  are  prepared  for  distemper  by  being  scraped  and 
cleaned,  and  a  coat  of  '•'  clearcole  "  given  to  them.  This  is  merely  thin  size  and 
water  with  a  little  whiting  :  it  serves  to  wash  and  smooth  the  walls  and  stop 
suction.  Should  there  be  any  cracks  or  holes,  a  thick  paste  of  size-water  and 
whiting  is  laid  in  them  with  a  palette-knife,  and,  when  dry,  smoothed  down  with 
pumice-stone,  and  another  coat  of  clearcole  given,  when  the  wall  is  in  a  proper 
state  to  receive  the  ground  tint :  for  new  walls  one  coat  of  clearcole  is  sufficient. 
If  it  is  intended  to  lay  on  lines  of  various  colours,  the  wall  is,  previous  to  the 
laying-on  of  the  ground  tint,  set  out  as  previously  described  ;  and  the  appropriate 
colours  put  on  in  succession,  according  to  the  design  to  be  followed.  All  the 
colours  required  should  be  ground  up,  and  kept  ready  prepared  in  galley-pots  well 
covered  over,  so  as  to  be  at  hand  at  once.  The  colour  should  be  of  the  consistency 
of  thick  cream,  and  should  run  from  the  brush  on  being  raised  from  the  pot  in  one 
thread ;  if  it  run  in  several,  it  is  too  thin.  If  too  thick,  add  more  size  and  water  ;  if 
too  thin,  more  whiting.     The  pots  used  are  the  common  red  paint-pots. 

VARNISHING. 

Varnish  is  a  solution  of  resin  in  oil  or  spirits  of  wine, ' 

Surfaces  which  are  to  be  varnished  should  be  of  the  greatest  smoothness  and  polish  which  it  is 
possible  to  attain.  Dark  colours  are  best  calculated  for  varnishing ;  the  lighter  colours,  such  as 
sky-blue,  apple-green,  rose-colour,  delicate  yellow,  &c.,  will  not  bear  varnishing  so  well,  and  in 
spite  of  the  greatest  care  are  liable  to  get  dirty. 

The  best  preparation  for  stopping  suction  in  absorbent  surfaces,  and  so  rendering  them  fit  to 
take  varnish,  is  made  of  isinglass  or  parchment  size ;  for  the  darker  colours  it  may  be  made  of 
common  clear  glue.  Four  or  five  coats  will  be  necessary  for  the  brighter  colours ;  two  or  three  will 
be  sufficient  for  the  darker  ones.  Great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  wash  up  water  or  distemper 
colours  in  laying  on  the  first  coat,  nor  to  lay  on  a  second  coat  before  the  first  is  perfectly  dry ;  nor 
must  the  varnishing  be  proceeded  with  before  the  last  coat  of  size  is  thoroughly  dry.  Varnish  may 
be  applied  on  surfaces  brought  forward  in  oil  without  any  special  preparation,  provided  the  oil  has 
become  thoroughly  dry  and  hard. 

This  process  sei-ves  both  to  enhance  and  preserve  the  beauty  of  the  colours,  and  in  some  degree 
to  counteract  the  destructive  influence  of  the  atmosphere  and  of  insects. 

Varnishes  suitable  for  the  work  in  hand,  such  as  clear  copal  spirit  varnish,  oil  copal  varnish, 
white  hard  varnish,  &c.,  may  be  procured  from  any  one  who  supplies  drawing  materials.  The  var- 
nishing itself  requires  some  little  care.  It  should  be  performed  in  a  place  perfectly  free  from  dust, 
in  a  bold  manner  with  large  brushes,  steadily,  rapidly,  and  uniformly,  not  returning  too  frequently 
to  the  same  spot,  more  especially  when  using  spirit  varnish,  which  loses  its  fluidity  much  sooner 
than  oil  varnish.  Whichever  varnish  is  used,  it  should  be  very  thin  :  if  spirit  varnish,  the  room 
must  be  of  a  moderate  temperature ;  for  if  too  cold,  the  varnishing  is  apt  to  be  rough,  white,  and 
unequal ;  if  too  hot,  it  is  liable  to  have  air-bladders,  and  to  crumble  and  spoil.  Oil  varnishing  may 
be  done  in  a  room  of  warmer  temperature.     A  second  coat  of  varnish  must  on  no  account  be  laid 


*  The  superiority  of  the  Chinese  and  Ja- 
panese varnishing  is  chiefly  owing  to  the 
excellence  of  a  particular  species  of  resin 
found  in  China  and  Japan,  The  varnishes 
made  with  oil  are  longer  drying  than  those 
made  with  spirits  of  wine,  but  are  of  greater 


durability.  The  spirits  of  wine  should  be 
highly  rectified  :  if  oil  is  used,  it  should  be 
linseed.  It  is  safer  to  purchase  the  varnish 
ready  prepared  than  to  attempt  the  making  of 
it,  as  the  solution  of  resin,  particularly  in  oil, 
is  somewhat  dangerous. 


90  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

on  before  the  first  coat  is  quite  dry.  If  the  work  is  to  be  polished,  the  spirit  varnish  must  be 
applied  from  five  to  eight  times,  oil  varnish  three  or  four ;  but  if  the  work  is  not  to  be  polished, 
then  four  coats  of  the  former  and  two  of  the  latter  will  generally  be  found  sufficient. 

When  thoroughly  dry,  the  face  of  the  varnish  may  be  polished  with  pumice-stone,  tripoli, 
water,  and  sweet  oil.  If  it  be  an  oil  varnish,  procure  some  of  the  finest  pulverized  pumice-stone, 
and  mix  it  with  water  to  about  the  consistence  of  cream ;  with  a  piece  of  linen  rag  dipped  in  this 
mixture  rub  the  work  till  all  inequalities  disappear,  and  the  surface  is  as  smooth  as  glass ;  then  dry 
it  with  a  cloth,  and  polish  once  more  with  tripoli  and  sweet  oil ;  then  dry  it  with  a  piece  of  soft 
linen,  rub  it  with  starch  reduced  to  a  fine  powder,  and  finish  with  a  clean  soft  linen  cloth,  until  the 
varnish  assumes  a  dazzling  appearance.  If  it  is  a  spirit  varnish,  omit  the  pumice-stone,  and  begin 
with  the  tripoli  and  water ;  after  this  use  the  tripoli  and  sweet  oil,  and  finish  as  before  described 
for  the  oil  varnish. 

The  difference  is  so  striking  between  the  polished  and  unpolished  surfaces,  as  to  amply  repay 
the  additional  trouble  required  in  the  polishing.  The  polishing  powders  must  be  kept  in  thoroughly 
clean  vessels,  a  single  grain  of  sand  being  sufficient  to  spoil  the  polish. 

M.  DIGBY  WYATT. 


LIST  OF  THE  PLATES. 


The  Frontispiece  is  adapted  from  Add.   MS.  17,341, 
Museum. 


and   Re£j.  I.   D.  I.   of  the  British 


6th  CENTURY  (PL  i). — The  mamiscript  (Bodleian,  No.  93)  from  which  this  interesting  and 
early  alphabet  has  been  taken,  is  one  formerly  in  Lord  Hatton's  possession.  It  is  preserved  in  the 
Bodleian  Library  with  other  manuscripts  formerly  belonging  to  the  same  proprietor.  Although  possess- 
ing no  great  claims  to  notice  as  a  work  of  art,  since  it  contains  no  miniatures,  this  precious  copy  of  the 
Gospels  may  well  take  precedence  of  all  others  in  this  country,  with  the  exception  of  the  companion 
set  preserved  in  the  library  of  Corpus  Christi,  Cambridge ;  since  Wanley,  one  of  the  most 
industrious  and  cautious  students  of  palceography,  has  not  hesitated  to  regard  them  as  the  identical 
copies  once  preserved  at  St.  Augustine's  Monastery,  in  Kent,  and  valued  through  long  ages  as 
having  been  the  property  of  the  great  missionary.  To  such  a  supposition  the  character  of  the  text, 
and  many  very  ancient  inscriptions  contained  in  the  work,  give  at  least  plausibility.  Be  this  as  it 
may,  however,  there  can  be  no  question  that  Mr.  Westwood  is  perfectly  justified  in  placing  it,  as  he 
has  done,  in  a  recent  article  in  the  "Archaeological  Journal "  (together  with  the  Cottonian  MS, 
Vespasian  A  i,  from  which  our  Pis.  3  and  4,  "  7th  Century,"  have  been  taken),  in  that  very  rare 
class,  of  which  about  six  authentic  specimens  only  are  known  ;  and  which  he  regards  as  having 
issued  from  a  Scriptorium  founded  in  this  country  by  the  immediate  followers  of  St.  Augustine. 
From  that  source  emanated,  he  considers,  "  some  of  the  most  beautiful  manuscripts,  wi'itten  in  the 
purest  uncial  or  rustic  capitals,  but  decorated  with  initials  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  or  Irish  style." 
Were  it  not  for  such  a  combination,  it  would  be  exceedingly  difficult  to  recognize  the  possibility  that 
several  manuscripts,  which  we  may  nationally  be  most  proud  to  claim,  qould  have  been  written  and 
illuminated  in  this  country. 

6th  CENTURY  (PI.  2).— All  the  beautiful  specimens  shown  on  this  Plate  have  been  taken 
from  the  Golden  Greek  Canons  of  Eusebius,  in  the  British  Museum  (Add.  MSS.,  No.  5>m)> 
one  of  the  most  important  relics  of  the  decoration  of  the  school  of  Justinian  the  Great  which  time 
has  spared  to  us.  {See  page  9.)  P'rom  its  breadth  of  style  and  bold  treatment  of  colour, 
this  MS.  furnishes  an  excellent  model  for  illuminators  or  decorators  to  study,  reproduce,  and 
improve  upon. 

7th  CENTURY  (PI.  3).— The  Cottonian  manuscript  (Vesp.  A  i)  suppUes  the  material  for  this 
Plate.  It  contains  the  Roman  Psalter,  with  an  Anglo-Saxon  interlineal  translation.  I  have  dra\vn 
attention  to  the  peculiar  class  to  which  this  manuscript  belongs  at  page  18. 

7th  CENTURY  (PI.  4). — This  Plate  gives  various  details  from  the  same  source  which 
furnished  those  for  the  preceding  one.  The  principal  specimen,  Fig.  9,  is  a  portion  of  a  triumphal 
arch  (recto  31),  beneath  which  David  is  represented  seated,  and  playing  on  the  lyre.  He  is  sur- 
rounded by  attendants  rejoicing,  and  blowing  horns  and  trumpets.  The  execution  of  this  subject, 
which  is  the  most  important  illumination  in  the  volume,  is  quite  antique  in  character  ;  the  colours 
being  applied  with  a  free  brush  in  a  style  altogether  differing  from  the  fine  pen-work,  not  only  of 


92  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

the  rest  of  the  vohime,  but  even  of  the  archway  which  forms  the  framing  to  the  subject.  Small 
figures  recur  in  various  headings,  but  they  are  all  drawn  in  a  more  minute,  laboured,  and  ignorant  style 
than  those  of  the  illumination  of  King  David.  Gold,  silver,  and  the  beautiful  purple  stain  abound 
throughout  the  volume,  which  is  written  in  classical  majuscule  letters  throughout.  The  Hibernian 
features  of  surrounding  the  initial  letters  and  ornaments  with  red  dots,  and  using  a  spiral,  the  eye 
of  which  expands  into  a  triple  whorl,  abound  throughout. 

7th  CENTURY  (PI.  5).— The  Figures  8  and  12  of  this  Plate  are  also  from  the  Cottonian 
Vesp.  A  I.  All  the  rest  have  been  selected  from,  probably,  the  most  interesting  manuscript  in 
existence.  It  is  preserved  in  the  same  series  (the  Cottonian)  under  the  title  of  Nero,  D  IV.  and  is 
best  known  as  St.  Cuthbert's  Gospels.  This  manuscript,  having  been  alluded  to  at  page  15,  need 
not  be  now  further  dwelt  on. 

7th  CENTURY  (PI.  6).— All  from  the  Durham  Book.      Nero,  D  IV. 

8th  CENTURY  (PI.    7)  presents  us  with  a  complete  alphabet,  and  various  ornamental  initials - 
made  up  from  manuscripts,  executed  on  the  Continent  at  a  period  immediately  anterior  to  the  age 
of  Charlemagne. 

8th  CENTURY  (PI.  8). — Count  Bastard,  in  his  magnificent  work,  has  given  an  important 
collection  of  examples  of  the  early  Spanish,  or  Visigothic  characters,  from  a  book  of  the  Sacraments 
of  the  Church,  preserved  in  the  Imperial  Library  of  Paris ;  and  from  his  facsimiles  the  materials 
for  this  Plate  have  been  selected. 

8th  CENTURY  (PI.  9).— The  same  source  (Count  Bastard's  work)  supplies  us  with  the  subjects 
engraved  on  this  and  on  the  following  seven  Plates.  Those  on  the  Plate  now  under  notice,  and  on 
that  which  succeeds  it,  were  taken  by  Count  Bastard  from  a  treatise  on  Medicine,  in  the  National 
Library  of  France,  under  the  No.  626.  It  includes  the  works  of  Oribasius,  Alexander  of  Tralles, 
and  Dioscorides,  and  was  formerly  preserved  in  the  chapter-house  of  Notre  Dame,  at  Chartres. 

8th  CENTURY  (PI.  10). — These  letters  scarcely  yet  display  the  elegance  or  magnificence  of 
the  true  Caroline  character  which  we  reach  in 

8th  CENTURY  (PI.  11).— The  initials  shown  on  this  Plate  afford  a  good  idea  of  the  increasing 
attention  bestowed  on  beauty  of  form,  coupled  with  that  imperial  magnificence  which  the  use  of 
gold  lettering  on  a  purple  ground  could  not  fail  to  insure.  They  are  derived  from  a  magnificent 
lectionaiy,  containing  the  Epistles  and  Gospels  of  the  year,  now  in  the  Imperial  Library  at  Paris — 
"  Ancien  Fonds  Latin,  Supplement,  No.  688." 

8th  CENTURY  (PI.  12)  gives  further  illustrations  of  Carlovingi5.n  splendour,  from  the  same 
source  as  those  shown  on  the  preceding  Plate. 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  13).— From  the  Coronation  Book  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  Kings.  Cott.  Tib. 
A  2.     (6V'^  note,  page  21.) 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  14).— Figures  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  and  6,  are  taken  from  the  Bible  of  Louis  le 
Debonnaire,  son  and  successor  of  Charlemagne ;  and  7  and  8  are  from  the  Gospels,  once  highly 
prized  by  Fran9ois  II.  of  France.      [Sec  page  26.) 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  15).— Figures  3,  4,  5,  are  from  the  Bible  of  Charles  le  Chauve,  or  Bald, 
one  of  the  grandsons  of  Charlemagne ;  and  Figures  I,  2,  6,  7,  8,  from  the  Gospels  of  Lothaire. 
Both  of  these  manuscripts  are  in  the  Imperial  Library  of  France.     {See  page  26. ) 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  16).— Figures  i,  2,  3,  and  5,  are  from  the  *' Sacramentaire  "  of  Metz; 
and  Figures  4,  6,  and  7,  from  the  Gospels  of  Mans.     {See  page  26. ) 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  17).— Figures  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  8,  are  from  the  Bible  of  Charles  the 
Bald,  to  which  we  have  already  alluded  ;  and  Figure  7  is  from  the  Gospels  of  Lothaire.  {See 
page  26.) 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  18).— For  this  and  the  following  Plate  we  are  indebted  to  the  magnificent 
Latin  Bible  of  the  British  Museum  collection,  known  as  Add.  MSS.,  No.  10,546. 


LIST  OF  THE  PLATES,  93 

9th  CENTURY  (PI.  19). — Tliese  letters,  and  the  ornaments  Avhich  decorate  them,  are  no  less 
agreeable  in  design  both  as  regards  colour  and  form,  than  those  upon  the  preceding  Plate  from  the 
same  source. 

loth  CENTURY  (PL  20).— From  the  Fragments  of  Charles  the  Bald's  Bible.     liarl.  7,551. 

loth  CENTURY  (PI.  21). — These  initials  are  all  derived  from  French  manuscripts,  and 
exhibit,  more  especially  in  the  foliated  portions  of  the  letter  Q  at  the  lower  left-hand  corner  of  the 
Plate,  a  rapid  approximation  towards  the  style  of  ornament  so  general  and  popular  during  the 
greater  part  of  the  12th  century. 

lOth  CENTURY  (PI.  22). — These  borders,  which  are  further  develoi3ments  of  the  principle  of 
foUation  noted  in  the  last  Plate,  have  all  been  taken  from  the  very  remarkable  Bible  of  St.  Martial 
of  Limoges,  preserved  in  the  Imperial  Library  of  France.     {See  page  27. ) 

loth  CENTURY  (PI.  23).— All  from  the  Gospels  of  Canute.  Reg.  L  D.  G.  A  noble 
specimen  of  Winchester  (Hyde  Abbey)  work.     (6V<f  page  21.) 

nth  CENTURY  (PI.  24).— Nos.  i,  2,  and  3,  from  Harl.  76;  Nos.  4  and  5  from  Egerton,  608. 

nth  CENTURY  (PI.  25).— From  the  British  Museum  MS8.,  Harleian  collection.  No.  7,183; 
consisting  of  a  selection  of  passages  in  Latin  from  the  New  Testament,  exhibits  a  clearly  transitional 
style  of  ornament  from  the  Anglo-Saxon,  to  that  which  is  generally  known  in  architecture  as  pure 
Romanesque.  The  intricate  interlacings  of  the  former  style  are  still  retained ;  but  a  distinct 
recognition  of  the  principle  of  foliation  derived  rather  direct  from  nature  than  through  the  antique, 
is  also  evidenced.     The  colours  are  inharmonious,  and  the  work  is  apparently  German. 

nth  CENTURY  (PI.  26)  is  from  the  same  MSS.  as  the  previous  Plate. 

nth  CENTURY  (PI.  27). — These  letters,  equally  eccentric  in  form  and  colour,  are  derived 
from  the  peculiar  "Evangelaire  of  Mont  Majour,"  preserved  in  the  Imperial  Library  at  Paris. 
They  have  been  figured  by  Count  Bastard. 

1 2th  CENTURY  (PI.  28). — We  now  arrive  at  that  graceful  class  of  lettering,  which,  under  a 
yet  more  perfect  form,  attained  to  such  remarkable  perfection  during  the  13th  century.  Our 
alphabets  have  been  selected  from  the  Harleian  MSS.,  No.  2,8<X),  which  contains  in  three  large 
folio  volumes  a  series  of  lives  of  Saints  for  the  whole  year.  The  volume  formerly  belonged  to  the 
Monastery  of  St.  Mary  and  St.  Nicholas,  at  Arnstein,  in  the  diocese  of  Treves.  The  initial  letters 
throughout  are  for  the  most  part  executed  in  red,  with  the  grounds  of  the  scroll-work,  of  which  they 
arc  composed,  filled  in  with  light  Ijlue  and  green,  after  the  usual  German  manner  of  the  I2tli 
century.  The  drawing  of  the  altogether  conventional  foliage  is  good  throughout  the  whole  work, 
which  is  ascribed  by  Sir  Frederic  Madden  to  "about  the  year  1190." 

I2th  CENTURY  (PI.  29). — These  specimens  are  taken  from  a  manuscript  in  the  Royal 
Liljrary  of  the  British  Museum,  under  the  mark  i  C.  VII.,  containing ^the  books  of  Joshua,  Judges, 
and  Ruth,  in  the  Vulgate  version,  with  St.  Jerome's  prologues,  and  attributed  l^y  Sir  Frederic 
Madden  to  the  middle  of  the  12th  century.  Such  examples  arc  certainly  preferable  models  in  point 
of  lone  to  those  afforded  l)y  the  preceding  Plate ;  and  we  may  look  with  much  satisfaction  upon 
this  manuscript,  since  it  demonstrates  how  free  and  graceful  a  style  of  ornament  may  1)e  associated, 
with  strict  archaeological  propriety,  with  the  cuml)rous  1>ut  well-balanced  forms  of  contemporary 
Norman  architecture. 

I2th  CENTURY  (PI.  30). — Mr.  Henry  Shaw,  in  his  beautiful  work  on  illuminated  manuscripts, 
has  devoted  no  less  than  eight  plates,  giving  an  entire  alphal^et  of  initial  letters,  to  the  illustration 
of  the  remarkable  MS.  which  is  well  known  as  the  Harleian,  No,  2,800,  and  which  has  furnished 
the  material  for  the  Plate  under  notice,  as  well  as  for  our  PI.  28  of  the  same  century.  Sir  Frederic 
Madden  considers  the  MS.  to  be  "written  in  the  class  of  character  which  came  into  use  at  the 
close  of  the  12th  century,  and  which  formed  the  link  between  the  round  open  letter  of  the  preceding 
century  and  a  half,  and  the  square  or  Gothic  letter  of  a  later  period." 

I2th  CENTURY  (PI.  31). — It  is  for  form  rather  than  colour  that  these  cleverly-designed 
borders  can  be  safely  looked  upon  as  models.      They  suffice,  however,  to  show  the  flexibility  of  the 


94  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

florid  style  of  foliation  which  was  the  immediate  precursor  of  the  beautiful  style  of  ornament  which 
we  generally  recognize  in  this  country  as  Early  English.  The  manuscript  from  which  these  patterns 
have  been  chosen  is  in  the  Harleian  collection,  No.  3,045. 

1 2th  CENTURY  (PI,  32)  is  from  the  same  source  as  PI.  29  in  this  century.  It  is  interesting  to 
compare  Figure  i  with  the  same  letter  of  the  9th  century  in  the  Bible  of  Charles  the  Bald  ("Bible 
de  St.  Denis  ").  The  general  outline  of  the  two  is  identical,  while  in  the  later  of  the  two,  foHation 
and  isomorphic  fonii  take  the  place  of  knotwork  with  lacertine  convolution  and  extremities.  It  is 
impossible  to  doubt  that  the  earlier  specimen  fonned  the  model  for  the  later. 

12th  CENTURY  (PI.  33). — These  examples  of  initials  and  ornament  of  the  same  class,  but 
less  agreeable  in  colour  than  those  given  in  the  last  Plate,  are  derived  from  the  British  Museum, 
Harleian  collection.  No.  3,045,— a  very  fine  book,  not  a  little  creditable  to  the  skill,  imagination, 
and  patience  of  Hrabinus  de  Cruch. 

I2th  CENTURY  (PI.  34),  from  the  same  MSS.,  supphes  us  with  a  grand  specimen,  in  the 
initial  letter  M,  of  the  complications  of  form  which,  whether  in  their  early  or  late  styles,  have 
always  proved  grateful  to  the  taste  of  the  Germans. 

I2th  CENTURY  (PI.  35).— No.  i  from  Reg.  2  C  10;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4,  from  Harl.  3,045. 

I2th  CENTURY  (PI.  36).— All  from  Reg.  2  A  22. 

13th  CENTURY  (PI.  37)  gives  us  a  legible,  but  rather  too  square  alphabet,  derived  from  a 
copy  of  Gratian's  Decretals  (or  Canons  of  the  Church),  in  the  Arundel  collection  (No.  490)  of  the 
British  Museum.  This  is  unquestionably  one  of  the  earliest  copies  of  this  celebrated  collection  of 
(a-atian's,  which  was  compiled  by  him  about  the  middle  of  the  12th  century. 

13th  CENTURY  (PI.  38).— In  the  last  Plate  may  be  noticed  a  deviation  from  the  mode  of 
designing  shown  upon  previous  Plates,  in  the  introduction  of  free  strokes  and  flourishes  of  the  pen, 
altogether  outside,  and  occasionally  independent,  of  the  ornamental  letters.  The  present  Plate, 
derived  from  a  set  of  Lives  of  the  Saints  in  the  British  Museum  (Bibl.  Reg.  20  D  7),  Avritten  in 
French,  shows  the  practice  in  an  advancing  stage  of  eccentricity.  It  was  never  very  popular  in 
England,  but  in  Italy,  France,  and  ultimately  in  Flanders,  it  became,  as  we  shall  hereafter  have 
occasion  to  see,  exceedingly  poi^iUar. 

13th  CENTURY  (PI.  39).— In  the  noble  "Image  du  Monde"  (B.  M.  Sloane  2,435),  f^oi" 
which  this  Plate  has  been  taken,  we  meet  with  none  of  the  florid  pen-work  of  the  two  preceding 
Plates;  all  here  is  compatible  with  the  stern  severity  of  the  satirist,  "who  holds,  as  'twere,  the 
mirror  Up  to  Nature. "  In  its  sohd,  opaque  colouring,  heightened  with  white,  burnished  gold 
grounds,  and  strong  black  outline,  this  manuscript  furnishes  us  with  a  beautiful  example  of  the 
style  which  became  most  popular  in  this  country. 

13th  CENTURY  (PI.  40).— All  the  sparkling  details  engraved  on  this  Plate  are  taken  from  the 
British  Museum,  viz.,  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  7,  8,  and  9,  from  a  copy  of  the  Gospels  (Add.  MSS.  17,34!), 
and  Figure  6  from  a  Latin  Bible  (Bibl.  Reg.  i  D  i).  In  the  former  of  these  manuscripts,  executed 
probably  in  France  in  the  latter  part  of  the  century,  we  may  trace  an  evident  incUnation  to  depart 
from  the  conventional  type  of  foliage  common  during  the  earlier  part  of  the  century,  and  a  recurrence 
to  that  more  direct  imitation  of  nature  which  has  always  characterized  those  schools  of  art  in  which 
the  professors  have  attained  any  marked  amount  of  graphic  dexterity. 

13th  CENTURY  (PI.  41).— These  specimens  are  all  from  the  same  manuscripts  as  the  last ; 
viz..  Figures  i  and  6  from  Reg.  i  D  i,  and  Figures  2,  3,  4,  5,  7,  and  8  from  a  copy  of  the 
Gospels  (Add.  MSS.  17,341). 

13th  CENTURY  (PI.  42).— All  from  Reg.  2  C  9i 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  43)  gives  us  two  well-mjlrkcid  alphabets,  selected  to  give  a  clear  idea 
of  tile  Usual  writing  of  this  period. 

14th   CENTURY  (IM.  44),  is  derived  from  som<i  of'  those  noble  fragments  of  French  and 


>  :  > 


LIST  OF   THE  PLATES.  95 

Italian  choral  books  of  the  14th  and  15th  centuries,  which  are  preserved  in  the  South  Kensington 
Museum. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  45).— In  this  Plate,  Figure  5  is  from  the  Lansdowne  Collection  (No. 
463) ;  Figures  lo,  14,  16,  17,  18,  19,  and  22,  from  the  Arundel  Collection  (No.  57);  Figure  2  from 
the  Cottonian,  Tib.  B  VIII.  ;  and  Figures  3,  4,  7,  and  15,  from  the  Add.  MSS.  No.  12,009. 
All  the  others  are  taken  from  a  Missal  (Add.  MSS.,  No.  11,435), — all  in  the  British  Museum. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  46).— All  from  the  Chronicles  of  Thomas  de  Walsingham,  A.D.  1392, 
Bibl.  Reg.  13  E  IX. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  47).— All  from  the  above. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  48).— From  the  South  Kensington  Museum. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  49).— Figure  i  is  from  Reg.  15  D  2  ;  Figure  2  from  Reg.  16  B  4  ; 
Figures  3,  5,  6,  9,  10,  11,  12,  14,  15,  16,  17,  and  18,  from  Harl.  2,899;  Figure  4  from  Reg.  2  AV. ; 
Figiues  7  and  13  from  Cott.  Tib.  B  VIII.;  and  Figure  8  from  Harl.  2,900. 

14th  CENTURY  (Pis.  50,  51,  52,  53,  54,  55,  56,  57,  58,  S9).-^These  are  all  from  cuttings 
from  Italian  and  other  choral  books,  preserved  in  the  South  Kensington  Museum,  and  offer  an 
exceedingly  beautiful  series  of  examples  for  modern  illumination. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  60).— British  Museum.     A  Missal.     Add.  11,435. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  61).— British  Museimi.     Reg.  i  C.  V.     Biblia  Latina. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  62).— Spanish,  from  a  Charter  in  the  British  Museum. 

14th  CENTURY  (PI.  63).— Nos.  4,  5,  10,  11,  12,  13,  and  14,  from  Lans.  463  ;  Nos.  i,  2,  and 
3,  from  Cott.  Lib.  B  VIII.  ;  and  Nos.  7,  8,  9,  and  15,  from  Add.  12,009.  No.  6  is  from  a  detached 
fragment  in  the  South  Kensington  Museum. 

14th  CENTURY  (Pis.  64,  65,  66)  give  a  series  of  bold  initials  from  detached  fraginents  in 
the  South  Kensington  Museum. 

15th  CENTURY  (Pis.  67,  68).— As  above. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  69).— British  Museum.     Burney,  198.     "  Titus  Livitis. " 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  70).— British  Museum.     Add.  15,286. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  71).— Italian.     British  Museum.     Add.  15,286. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  72).— From  a  Manuscript  written  in  Spain.  British  Museiun.  Add. 
21,120. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  73).— From  Fust  and  Schoffer's  Psalter.     British  Museum. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  74).— From  various  Italian  illiuninations  in  the  British  Museum, — the 
large  P  and  H  from  Burney,  175  ;  and  the  large  C  and  N  from  Harl.  3,293. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  75).— From  a  Missal.  British  Museimi.  Add.  15,260.  This  manu- 
script  belonged  to  the  Duke  of  Sussex. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  76).— From  a  Missal.     Had.  2,900. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  77).— All  from  Hari.  7,551. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  78).— Principally  from  Reg.  14  D  i. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  79).— British  Museum.     Reg.  6,  E  IX.     A  Volume  of  Latin  Poems. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  80). -All  from  »*  Hours  of  the  Virgin."     Harl.  2,936. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  81).— British  Museum.     Harl.  2,900.     Horce  B.  Maria;  Virginis. 

15th  CENTURY  (PL  82).— From  the  Meiitz  Psalter. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  83).— From  the  Spanish  MS.     Add.  21,120. 


96'  THE  ART  OF  ILLUMINATING. 

15th  CENTURY  (PI.  84).— Ng.  i,  from  Plato,  Harl.  3,481  ;.No.  4,  from  Livy,  Harl.  3,694; 
Nos.  2,  3,  5,  and  6,  from  Harl,  2,593. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  85).— Nos.  i,  3,  5,  6,  8,  and  lo,  are  from  the  Etymologicum  Magnum, 
printed  by  Calliergi ;  Nos.  2,  4,  7,  and  9,  from  the  New  Testament,  printed  by  Robert  Stephens. 

i6th  CENTU-RY  (PI.  86).— Nos.  i,  3,  5,  6,  8,  and  10,  are  from  the  Etymologicmn,  as  above; 
and  Nos.  2,  7,  and  9,  from  the  New  Testament,  as  above. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI  87).— Nos.   i,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  from  Egerton,  1,147;  Nos.  6  and  8,  from 
Reg.  2  D  40 ;  No.  7  from  Add.  1 7, 280. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  88).— Nos.    i,   2,  3,   4,  and  5,  from  Egerton,    1,147;  Nos.  6  and  8, 
Reg.  2  D  40 ;  No.  7,  Add.  1 7, 280. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  89).— From  a  German  Bible  in  the  British  Museum,  printed  at  Wit- 
tenberg in  1584. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  90).— From  the  above. 

16th  CENTURY  (PI.  91).— Nos.  i,   2,   3,    7,  8,  9,   10,   11,   12,   16,   17,  and  18,  from  Royal 
2  D  40;  Nos.  4,  5,  and  6,  from  Add.  17,280;  Nos.  13,  14,  and  15,  from  Egerton,  1,147. 

1 6th  CENTURY  (PI.  92). — From  a  Bible  printed  at  Frankfort-am-Mayn  in  1560. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  93).— From  a  Psalter.     British  Museum.     Add.  15,426. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  94). -From  a  Missal.     British  Museum.     Add.  18,855. 

i6th  CENTURY  (PI.  95).— All  from  a  Mibsal.     British  Museum.     Add.  18,855. 

M.  D.  W. 


lAl-EL.  I. 


AV    SUU-  uOO    !^''  i. 


PL.l. 


i.  m     ^ i-_^. 


TAl'Ki.ll. 


A  D.    ibOO._  i&OG.    N°'P''  *  '•  •    *** 


PJ..1L. 


■ilk 


i'AtFX.   Jil 


A  D    600-700.    N°  1 


P1..III. 


.^>Bct)eEpqhrLm 

MNO  pqRSTUYXy 


—I 


TAl'Ea,  iV. 


A.D.    bOO.700     N^;    2."    ' 


PL.iy, 


TAFEL  V 


A  D.     GOO-700.    E^'  S. 


PL  Y 


TAFEL  ^n 


A.D.    G00^//00.    N«  4'.    " 


PL  \n. 


I'AFEL  Vll 


AD.  700-800.  U"  V    "    '    ^ 


PL  yij. 


f       <     c    ,    » 


TATELVin. 


A.D.   700_800.  m  t 


PL.  VIE. 


'lAVEL  IX 


AD.    700  800    N"?  3 


PL  IX 


TAFEL  X. 


A.D    700-800    1^"  4.'    I  >',  >  1 


PL  X. 


-^p^^ 
^^S' 


TAFELXn 


AD.  700-800     N^.6\,'r-;;    V  \*  '    PL..XJ1 


l'AHRi:x.iT 


TAFEL  XIV. 


AD     800-900.   NO    g.    i    '. 


PI,  .nv 


fw^  ■ 


'^m^ 


'LAFKLXV 


A..D.   800-_900.  i^*?  S.    : 


PL.  XV. 


TAFEL  iVl. 


A-D.  S00_^0OO.  ]^?  4.    '    : 


PI  Wi 


^"•o,»5    • 


TAJRL  XVil 


A.  ■}.  iiOO..?0':.  N-.   5. 


PL  IVE. 


TA>T.i.  XVm. 


A.D.  800_500.N»  6../*   *    *  * 

;''■'-    iji  ■  I — rr- 


Hi,    XVlll 


SM 


% 


D    .^vK-  .900.   N''  7,.,     ,     .      ......».,.   Jf'.J 


TJ^ILl  IX 


A.I).  300--  JrjOO     N"^    I 


PI.  XX 


TA7EL.  yXL 


AD.    900  1000.   N«2.  J    I  % 


'.  rt'i..  XXI. 


.CO  ^o     ore 


TMEL  XXJI 


AD.    900 1000.     N^   3:    : ,    .  . 


-PL.  XXII 


t         * ,  Z.    c        <«, 


"N 


TMEL  XXIII. 


A.D.  1000-1100.    N''  4.,, 

-«-»-v-?- 


PL.xxni. 


TAFEL^XXIV. 


A.D.  1000  -BOO.  1^^  i;.  I  >. ;  -,  ;     ^  .',  -PL. xxrv: 


TAFEL  XKY. 


A.D.   1000._1100.  m  ?.] 


Vh.  IXV. 


'^ 


%. 


TAFEL  KYI 


A.D,  LiOO-iiOO.  "N"  i».      \j  i\f  I  V 


M..jm. 


>  >      »  »    •  ,     ,        ,  •     o    •»   ,   > 


TAFEL  XT.'II 


■AD.  1000-1400.    :n«  ^ 


rL.xx\ai, 


TAFF.LXXVIir 


A   D     11004200.    1^[^  1 


>  J    .  >  3 


PL.  XXVIU 


tnvvojcyi 


•:o; 


TAFlM.  XKiX. 


A.  D  .1100    V>00    N<?  ?    ,, 


P1.XM. 


TAFEL  XXX 


AD     llOO      IZOO    No;j 


PL;  XXX 


TAFEL  XSXl 


A.D.    1100-^1200     N94.  :    ::  ^  ^ 


'PL.  XXXI. 


TAb'£L  Mm 


AD.  1100_12OO.  I^°  5.%.^  '/':  •    '' 


PL.XXXll. 


TAFEL  XXXil! 


AlJ    liOO  _   IZOO    mj^^. 


PLXXX'!! 


■5  •)  ,     1  ,      ■»     ■» 


J     '     ->      >       ) 


•Ar;-!,xxxpv. 


til   ,]100.    \?W  W  ?,,^  I 


^;..XXXiV 


'  >    »:,> 


«   •      t» 


»  -,  »   •  >  >  1  '  . 


TATEL  iXXV. 


AD.  1100 1200.  :rr.'-8 


PL  XXXV 


TAFEi']<XXyi 


AD.   1100-1200.    N^^  9" 


,'  -'PL.  yxi^i 


TAFEi,  XX  XVI 


L.  XXXVI I 


•AFRi,  XXKVIU 


A.D 


'i    ''     t    Vl^vXX/.V 


TATEL . XXXDC 


}U^]\^  JBL.XXKDC 


liVJE'Er^-XL. 


A.D    1200  130  0,>'lNr^4. 


PL  XL. 


lA^.  »». 


-mi EL.  XL] 


A.D.    1?, 00-1300.  IP  5^ 


PL.zrx 


IVU^EL  XUI 


AD     120Q...J300.  N-i'S'. 


,  ,  P,L  XLII 


:'/c    <^   ''c'^   r     f'^c    "^c*^         <:    <:  t  t  c  c  "■   c  '•  (  '' 


lAFELXLIli  AJD.    1300-1400.   N?'L  '    /,    '     ;  r '- '^  .">;,>> PL -XUH 


A.D     !300./14',)0.    m»^ 


/.liV 


»->»>'    >        >•*    » 


TAFKL  lU' 


A.D.  1500 _  14 00   m^?>. 


PL.XIV. 


TA?El.  XlVl 


AD     1300     1400      N^'^ 


,  ,PL^XLVl 


lAFf::.aivu 


A  D      1300     1400     N^K 


TAi'KI/i.Vm 


.A.]>   1300    l40v^N.?  6. 


2L.  XLVHT. 


^     >    :".!    '.     '    1 a- 


TAFEL  XLIX- 


.\.D.  1300-1400    "N9  -7'. 


XLIX 


TAtTI  I 


T)    I^JO  -  1400.  ,HV  >^ 


t^L.L. 


f|r|Y/iOTS)^^ 


TATEL  Lil 


A.D.    1300-1400    JNl'vi-   I   ii'.^l 


.,"„  "-.PL. 111. 


TAFRL  LIU. 


k.]).     1500    1400.    N^lli  -•;,','   ',/  ;'',>:*   PLLIU. 


TA.FB.L  LIV. 


A.D   1300-1400'., •'Ho,J^  y  ^ 


PL.  LW. 


TAFEL.  LV 


A.D    1300-1400.  Wt? 


PL.  LY 


TAl'EL.LVI. 


^D.  1300-1400.  WM-  *• 


PL.  i:v^. 


'.,  ^' 


^->^ 


-■«t»K 


}, 


TAFEL  LVIl. 


AD.  1300-1400,  l^-^.'l^. 


PL.  Wil. 


-1 — ?-*-rr~J-'\  J  J    ,'., 


-s^^' 


I  ■^i> 


%    o 


^*^ 


\ 


•Cl 


..^ 


TA"F£L  LVIU. 


A  D     13  00- J'4''09.  N°  !(&.»>. 


PL   LVIII 


cc      '■•c'^cr''       *'cc  c 


-4* 


^-  ^ 


Y^YEL  LTX. 


AD.  1300  -Um.  N<^;17.2  •  ■  r.- 


PL.UX, 


TAFEL  J,X. 


A  D.  1.300  -  M^Of>"'N^::  IB 


PL.TX. 


€  C  t 


TAFKL  J.Xl 


AD.  1300^.  1400.,.>^^'"l9!  ''   '     '"   ' 


?r,.m. 


0)»«-^ 


lAi'EJ..  LXIi 


AD.    1300 


-1400.  E°2i).,3'  l\: ! 


PL.IXII 


0OO6 


KORILO) 


OOPQR 


6UY 


TAFF.T.   IXlll 


A.T).  1500.-1400.  N^?>i.f>"  *  \S      :\  :y     Pi  ixm 


TAFEI,  r.XlV 


K.  i.XiV, 


PI.  ilV 


.IAF£L,LXVI, 


A.1-).  l.'^00  1400'.''*"S4   "' 


PL.i:^" 


T^^r^- 


T/VFEL  LXVII  AD..  14.00-1500,  W  1.        "  '    -  PL.  LXVll 

■ ■'    '        ->7 «— >*- J -'    ->'    'j— ^ »— ^ J 


aal)c1ift0Hlmiipp{)r^ 

abcbefc^b  tlmuopqrf 


'        '     '     c'    <  "  r    ■-'  '      c"^    "^  '      r*' 


TAFEL  IXVIII. 


AD.  1400-150^),  JP2.  l  >  '•   "^"  ^H  h  PL.  Lxvni 


:"AFKi    ]7vlX 


A  ;>    1400  ;^oo  '>s^.  ^^\'i,,^ 


'^]]/a     :l  l/iX 


TA.FFL    \11. 


A.D,  1400..  LbaviQ^:^'  'v  „ 


PL.  \XX 


TAFJlL  lkau 


PI,  r.xxu 


TA?EL  LXXffl. 


/V.D.  1400...  1500  ,>  W'  7.  „  '    '  PL  DQUll 


->  3j',    a',' 


"1      "^ 


'T'\FE,L  -LXXTf. 


AD     1400-15QG.    N°.8.„^,^^   _^    ^^  PL  LXXEV: 


^: 


p 


lAl-T.L,   aXV. 


A  1;     l^^X)    ibi)0."  N?'9'     ' 


PI.  UXV. 


'L^FEL.  LXX.W. 


A.D.    1400-1500,  'Wf)\'  „"  V  „ 


PL.  .LXXVl. 


o 


TAFEL  LXXYII 


PL.  LXXVIl 


n 


TAFEL  IXXVril 


AD.  I40Of5t)a  3sIo^^^..,>,  ,.,  .^  ,  ,    .^  PI,  LXXVriL 


n 


TAt-tL  LXXTX. 


AD.   1400 -J50p/>If  J^3.  ^> -.,>,..,„,,  ,    ,.PL.LXXI)?:. 


#!■       I' 


j^l; 


TAFEL  JoXXX. 


AD.    14^00-1500:.    1T?»K. 


PL   LXXX. 


TAFEL.  LXXXI. 


A.  I).  1400.-1600: 


PJ.,  LXML. 


p 


jAFunxai 


A.D.  1400^1500 ,nB?  le.  .,     „  oo„.,o,  oo^  o    „  „    „  PL.  IXXXll. 


TAFEL  LXXXill 


A.I)     1400 


PL.IlXXlll 


Q 


:AFr:i,   \JMN 


A.L.      1400„.  ibQO    >h'  m. 


PI.  LXXXIV, 


c  r  f.^'.'■,  r^t 


TAFEL   IJQCXV 


AD.    1500-1600.;^}    i; 


]  :  ;PL.  i.xxx\r 


^^:^«C2^lfi^filfi&s^S^4 


T?55 


■csr^3g»ga 


TDpr 


wry 


TAFRL.LXXXVI. 


A.r.  1500.;rLS00.    N?2. 


%  PL.  LXXXYL. 


o„e     „  o    o- 


7    ' 


"^m^^^^^^ 


n,.  r,>(XXVU. 


r 


'\  L.    1500...  l&OQ.  ,N^ 


''   i#^ 


TArEL  IJCXXIX. 


A  D.   l.SOo^aC'lO,    MO.S  >,,.,,  ,,,  ,,  ,  ,    .         PI.  IJODflX 


>k 

V 

1 

^ 


4 


g 

1 

-^9^  P  C^^^ 

\, 

-^->^ 

8 

© 

S/f./' 


w:^ 


c    _  <.  _  t  c 


!Ab'b'.J.,  XC 


A  n  iS(A)  i(soo  ,^N^*  e 


IM,  xc 


1 

1 

^P 

^S 

^ 

<^MM^ 

F^'^        7)^^ 

^iPf^ljlQ/^ 

^'''"^v^^ 

HI 

^M 

5pi^ 

f^m 

!i^sS^^^£?^i^^i 

{wmmtm 

^B^jf/^^^^fc^g 

1 

^^s 

[^^ 

s 


Jv 


TAFELXCI 


A.D.    lba&  If^OO.   ilf^^*^,  r>  >  j  i  ,', 


PI,  jq:l 


TAFEL  XCII 


AD.  1500-lG00.'.:^r{) 


^Kn  I 


PL.  XCU 


L 


•AFl-.l.  XCUI 


AD     ibOO     leQCN^V^. 


Pi.xriri 


rg,,  J.,    t  1  ,  a.     a    ^    ,» 


TAFKl,  XC 


TAFEL  XCV. 


A.  .u.    1500.>_>i600    NMl. 


PL.  IC 


V 


RETURN       CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

TOM^       202  Mam  Library oaz-^av^ 


TO 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 

HOME  USE 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AUtK  /  uAYS 

1 -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-340p 
6-month  loans  may  be  rechaVged  by  bringing  books  to  Circ"M,on  Desk 
Renewals  ond  rechorges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  due  date 

nilg   AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


EBVINii 


T   0CT2'."7< 


2  S 1077" 


PBSiCK 


JIM2  67T 


1' 


:;■.  -I  0   laO^ 


»«. 


C\R- 


SEFZ't'n 


OCT  14  1977 


's-^ 


lOV    71900    50 


«BBc«i 


■""26 'O; 


SEP    4MM 


nvc  cm  "W'l' •■ 


i^.^^ 


-RteT^ft' 


:m. 


m 


■m 


7, — l^O' 


QRCUIATION 


dIFt; 


OeC  -  7 198Z 


•V8 


;pc.cm.  JANJO'W 


!IS 


a 


^ 


7— '  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DD  6,  40m,  6  76  BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


kffifr.   V'.- 


LD21 — A-40m-5,'74 
(R8191I.) 


University  of  California 

APR  11  1977  iT' 


255305 


*•*!•.' 


"•*■■'■■'■  ■  'W»- 


t^ia.  _•«■-  .    J — aijc!»" 


^^€S^^' 


L^S£r  ^